BD 4415

DESIGN MANUAL FOR ROADS AND BRIDGES
VOLUME 3
SECTION 4
HIGHWAY STRUCTURES:
INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE
ASSESSMENT
PART 14
BD 44/15
THE ASSESSMENT OF CONCRETE HIGHWAY
BRIDGES AND STRUCTURES
SUMMARY
This Standard gives requirements and guidance for the
assessment of existing concrete highway bridges and
structures on motorways and other trunk roads. This
is a revised document to be incorporated into Design
Manual for Roads and Bridges. It supersedes and
replaces BD 44/95 and BA 44/96.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

1.
Remove existing contents pages for Volume 3

and insert new contents pages for Volume 3 dated
August 2015.
2.
Remove BD 44/95 and BA 44/96 from Volume 3,

Section 4 which are superseded by this Standard
and archive as appropriate.
3.
Insert BD 44/15 into Volume 3, Section 4,

Part14.
4.
Archive this sheet as appropriate.
Note: A quarterly index with a full set of Volume

Contents Pages is available separately from
TheStationery Office Ltd.
August 2015
HIGHWAYS ENGLAND
BD 44/15
Volume 3, Section 4,
Part 14
TRANSPORT SCOTLAND
WELSH GOVERNMENT
LLYWODRAETH CYMRU
THE DEPARTMENT FOR REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT
NORTHERN IRELAND
The Assessment of Concrete

Highway Bridges and Structures
Summary: This Standard gives requirements and guidance for the assessment of existing
concrete highway bridges and structures on motorways and other trunk roads. This
is a revised document to be incorporated into Design Manual for Roads and Bridges.
It supersedes and replaces BD 44/95 and BA 44/96.
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Registration of Amendments
REGISTRATION OF AMENDMENTS
Amend No
Page No
August 2015
Signature & Date of incorporation

of amendments
Amend No
Page No

of amendments
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Registration of Amendments
REGISTRATION OF AMENDMENTS
Amend No
Page No

of amendments
Amend No
Page No

of amendments
August 2015
VOLUME 3
HIGHWAY STRUCTURES:
INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE
ASSESSMENT
SECTION 4
PART 14
BD 44/15
THE ASSESSMENT OF CONCRETE

HIGHWAY BRIDGES AND STRUCTURES
Contents
Chapter
1. Introduction
2.
Assessment of Strength
3.
Limit States
4.
Use of Appendix A and BS 5400-4:1990
5. References
6. Enquiries
Appendix A
August 2015
Amendments to BS 5400-4
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 1
Introduction
1 INTRODUCTION
Background
1.1
This Standard gives requirements and guidance for the assessment of existing concrete highway bridges and
structures and their structural elements, and must be used in conjunction with BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3), BD 37
(DMRB 1.3), BD 86 (DMRB 3.4.19) and other relevant documents. It supersedes and replaces BD 44/95 and
BA 44/96.
1.2
Appendix A of this Standard contains the relevant assessment clauses which have been presented in the
same format as the design clauses in BS 5400-4. The assessment clauses have been specifically developed
to suit assessment conditions and therefore must not be used in design or construction of new structures.
It is noted that while BS 5400-4 has been withdrawn and replaced by BS EN 1992-2 (the Eurocode for
concrete bridges) for design purposes, the Eurocodes do not as yet include provisions for assessment. The
commentary is contained alongside the assessment clauses. It contains explanations for the main changes
from BS 5400-4, and gives advice on the interpretation of the assessment requirements. Also included are
comments and references which provide additional information appropriate to special situations. Where such
situations arise, any special method of analysis or variation of criteria proposed for an assessment must be
agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.
1.3
In Appendix A of this Standard, any reference to characteristic strength must be to characteristic strength or
to worst credible strength as appropriate.
1.4
The major changes to the Standard compared with the earlier version are as follows:
a)
A single BD with mandatory clauses including commentary/guidance replacing the previous BD and
BA 44.
b)
Incorporation of the requirements of BD 24 (DMRB 1.3.1), IAN 4/96 and IAN 5/96, which are
withdrawn, and updating of superseded references in a number of clauses.
c)
Updated guidance for calculating the worst credible strength in line with the approaches of BS EN
13791 and BS 6089.
d)
Explicitly added requirements for SLS (Serviceability Limit State) checks for prestressed structures
and clarified loads and partial factors to be used when SLS checks are to be performed.
e)
A reduced value of the partial safety factor to be applied to grade 460 reinforcing steel at the ultimate
limit state.
f)
Updated methodology for assessing the shear capacity at support of beams with theoretically
inadequately anchored longitudinal reinforcement.
g)
Added provisions for the assessment of structures with external and/or unbonded prestressing.
h)
Clarifications made to a number of clauses and alternative approaches permitted which incorporate
provisions of the Eurocode for concrete structures (BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-2).
Scope
1.5
This Standard gives requirements for the assessment of existing concrete highway bridges and structures on
trunk roads and motorways.
August 2015
1/1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Mutual Recognition
1.6
The requirements and guidance in this Standard only cover the assessment of existing structures and
structural elements and are given on the basis that any construction and maintenance of concrete highway
bridges and structures will be carried out using the Specification for Highway Works (SHW, Vol.1).
However, products conforming to equivalent standards and specifications of other member states of the
European Economic Area and tests undertaken in other member states may be acceptable in accordance with
the terms of the 104 and 105 series of clauses of that Specification.
Implementation
1.7
1/2
This Standard must be used forthwith on all projects for the assessment of concrete highway bridges and
structures on motorway and all-purpose trunk roads (and on all roads in Northern Ireland). The requirements
must be applied to assessment already in progress provided that, in the opinion of the Overseeing
Organisation, its use would not result in significant additional expense or delay progress (in which case the
decision must be recorded in accordance with the procedure required by the Overseeing Organisation).
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 2
2 ASSESSMENT OF STRENGTH
General
2.1
A key objective of this Standard is to produce a more realistic assessment of the strength of a concrete element
than can be produced using the design code. This is in part achieved by taking advantage of the information
available to an assessor, such as material strength, which can only be predicted at the design stage.
2.2
Many of the criteria given in the design code are based on experimental evidence which in some cases have
been either conservatively interpreted for use in design or updated by later evidence allowing a less conservative
interpretation. For assessment purposes such criteria have been reviewed and amended where appropriate.
2.3
An important feature of BS 5400-4 is the application of the partial safety factor for material strength m to the
characteristic values. This approach is retained in Appendix A but the concept of worst credible strength with a
reduced value of m is introduced as an alternative.
Worst Credible Strength

2.4
The term worst credible strength is used in this Standard to allow for the actual material strengths of the
structural elements being used for assessment. Worst credible strength can be defined as the worst value of that
strength which the assessor, based on experience and knowledge of the material, realistically considers could be
obtained in the structural element under consideration. This value may be greater or less than the characteristic
strength of the material assumed at the design stage. Since this value eliminates some of the uncertainties
associated with the use of characteristic strengths, reductions may be made in the partial safety factor for
material m.
2.5
The method of determining the worst credible strength must be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.
2.6
Worst credible strengths should be used in the following circumstances:

a)
when an initial assessment using characteristic values has shown an element of structure to be
incapable of carrying the full assessment loading of BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3).
b)
if a structure has suffered damage or deterioration in such a way that the actual strengths are known or
thought to be less than the assumed characteristic values.
c)
where no information exists on the characteristic values used in design and it is not possible or
appropriate to adopt an assumed value from BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3).
2.7
Worst credible strengths should generally be derived from tests on concrete cores or steel samples. However,
it would be desirable to undertake assessments, or initial assessments, without undertaking the material
tests required to determine worst credible strengths. Advice on the strengths to be assumed in the absence
of definite information is given in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3). Where concrete strength is specified in terms of
28 day minimum cube strength, this should be considered as being equal to characteristic cube strength.
Where concrete is specified in terms of prescribed concrete mixes these may be used to estimate strengths
which should also be considered as equivalent to characteristic cube strengths. In estimating the strength
of prescribed mixes, it is important to use judgement based on contemporary or older information as there
has been a progressive increase in the strength of concrete with similar proportions due to increases in the
reactivity of cement.
2.8
If construction records include standard 28 day cube results for concrete which is representative of the
critical areas, these may be used. They should be processed in the same way that core results are processed
August 2015
2/1
Chapter 2
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
to obtain worst credible values, see 2.10 below. Because of the difference between wet cured cubes and in
situ concrete, the uncertainty is higher than for in situ core tests so the representative value obtained from
records should be treated as a characteristic, rather than a worst credible value. Caution will be needed in
using the results of non-standard cube tests. Older age tests and tests on cubes stored with the structure may
be used. However, because the early age strength gain of cements varies significantly, extrapolation of early
age cube results is not normally reliable. Similarly, extreme caution is required in using cube results at ages
substantially greater than 28 days as they may show increases in strength which are not achieved in the real
structure.
2.9
Where assessment using the above approaches does not give the required strength, consideration should
be given to taking samples and using worst credible strength values instead. However, before undertaking
the tests, the sensitivity of the assessed strength to assumed material strength should be investigated. In
particular, the strength of lightly reinforced members is often very insensitive to the strength of concrete.
2.10 When samples are required, worst credible strength for concrete must be derived from tests carried out on cores.
Cores are destructive and cannot normally be taken at the critical (most highly stressed) locations of an element,
hence a reliable and realistic method based on the worst credible strengths data from adjacent locations should
be used to obtain worst credible strengths in the critical locations. To assist in determining the statistically most
reliable results of core tests, an integrated programme of testing which may include destructive, semi-destructive
(e.g. near surface tests) and non-destructive tests will be necessary for each element. The assessor should use
judgement in selecting the locations and numbers of samples for such tests. Methods of assessing the estimated
in-situ concrete strength at a location are given in BS EN 13791 and BS 6089. A location is a region
where, in the assessors judgement, there is no more than the normal random variation in concrete strength.
Information on the accuracy of the assessed value is also given. The worst credible strength at a location may
be taken as the lower bound to the estimated mean in situ concrete strength; e.g. for n concrete cores giving
equivalent cube strengths of fc ... fcn and a sample standard deviation of s, and for a confidence level of 90%
(corresponding to a fractile of 0.05 on a one-sided region of a Students t-distribution statistical curve), the
worst credible strength is equal to [(Sfc)/n]-t0.05(s/n), where the value of t0.05 is a function of the number of
cores n and can be taken from BS 6089 or standard statistical t-tables. In applying this formula, the assessor
must be satisfied that the cores are representative of the location under consideration. The formula only
accounts for errors in estimating the mean strength of concrete in the location considered. In practice, due to
variations in water content, curing conditions and compaction, the strength of concrete can vary significantly
over short distances. It is therefore necessary to use caution in interpreting the results of tests. When either
the appearance of the concrete or the test results themselves suggest the variation of strength is significantly
greater than the formula assumes it is necessary to use judgement based on the actual variation or on the
minimum value recorded to obtain a more realistic estimate. The worst credible strength must be based on a
minimum of three cores.
2.11 If the assessor wishes to use a single worst credible concrete strength for the structure as a whole, rather than
individual values at individual critical locations, it will be necessary to determine the number and location of
cores required to produce a representative value for the in situ concrete strength. The sampling rate should
however not be less than one core for each 50 m3 of concrete. The worst credible strength may be taken as
either the least of the individual values or derived in accordance with the approach described above.
2.12 When samples are required for reinforcement or prestressing tendons and bars, the worst credible strength
should be obtained by testing samples taken from the element being assessed. However, it is often impractical
to extract samples from critical sections and the assessor should use judgement in selecting the locations and
numbers of samples for such tests. Removal of prestressing steel for sampling purposes will alter the stress
distribution in the concrete section, and this must be allowed for in the assessment calculations. In choosing
lengths of bars for testing, the assessor must check that the removal of samples will not significantly reduce
the load carrying capacity of the element under consideration. Testing of steel reinforcement and prestressing
strand should generally be carried out to the requirements of BS EN ISO 15630-1 and BS EN ISO 15630-3,
2/2
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 2
respectively. In accessing tendons and bars for testing, methods of concrete removal that minimise risk of
mechanical damage to bars must be used. Also, when cutting out the chosen samples of bars, adjacent bars
which may be highly stressed must not be damaged.
2.13 In the case of steel reinforcement or prestressing tendons, the worst credible strength may be taken as the
lower bound to the mean in situ steel strength based on a 98% confidence level (corresponding to a fractile
of 0.01 on a one-sided region of a Students t-distribution statistical curve) calculated with the formula for
concrete cores given above and the corresponding value of t0.01 taken from standard statistical t-tables. In
determining the steel strength, the assessor must be satisfied that the samples tested are representative of the
location under consideration.
2.14 When using a worst credible steel strength in excess of the characteristic strength, the assessor must
check that the bar anchorages and laps are capable of developing the higher steel stresses. The assessors
knowledge of material strengths which were typical of the period of construction may in some instances aid
consideration of appropriate values for the structure under consideration.
2.15 For non-conforming details, or details not covered by the code, laboratory testing can be used to determine
behaviour and strength. In some cases, test data may already be available.
Partial Safety Factor for Materials
2.16 The values of m for concrete and reinforcing or prestressing steel are given in Appendix A Table 4A. The values
for use with the characteristic strength may be different from those for use with worst credible strengths. To
enable the correct value of m to be used, all limiting criteria have been expressed as formulae with m stated
explicitly rather than as tabulated values.
Application of Reliability Techniques
2.17 As part of the assessment process, reliability techniques may be used subject to the agreement of the
Overseeing Organisation. The full application of reliability techniques to bridge assessment requires specialist
knowledge and experience. Reference to BD 79 (DMRB 3.4.18) should be made for further guidance.
Deterioration and Condition Factors in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3)
2.18 Specific guidance on assessment of structures which have deteriorated due to Alkali Silica Reaction (ASR)
and reinforcement corrosion is given in BA 52 (DMRB 3.4.10) and BA 51 (DMRB 3.4.13), respectively.
Reinforcement corrosion can also have a disproportionate effect on fatigue life and this is considered in BA
38 (DMRB 3.4.5).
2.19 While the application of the condition factor Fc in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3) is not affected in principle by the
requirements of this Standard, the estimated values of Fc must not allow for any deficiencies of the materials in
a structure which are separately allowed for by using worst credible strengths or by making other allowances.
Where possible, specific allowances for deterioration should be made directly, such as loss of material strength
or of material in assessment calculations, and a condition factor of 1.0 used.
August 2015
2/3
Chapter 2
2/4
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 3
Limit States
3 LIMIT STATES
General
3.1
Assessments must be carried out at the ultimate limit state in accordance with BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3). Checks
at the serviceability limit state must be carried out only in the limited number of cases required by this
Standard, or when explicitly required by the Overseeing Organisation.
3.2
Serviceability assessment may be useful for investigating the significance of visible signs of deterioration,
such as excessive cracking, considering factors such as deflection, fatigue and durability.
Ultimate Limit State (ULS)

3.3
The assessment must check that collapse or failure of a structural member will not occur under the
assessment loads as a result of rupture of one or more critical sections, by overturning or by buckling caused
by elastic or plastic instability, having due regard to the effects of sway when appropriate.
3.4
The effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete, temperature difference and differential settlement need not be
considered at the ultimate limit state.
Serviceability Limit State (SLS)

3.5
The need for a serviceability limit state assessment and the necessary criteria for that assessment must be
agreed with the Overseeing Organisation. Unless otherwise agreed with the Overseeing Organisation, the
only SLS check required is to determine that the stresses in prestressed concrete do not exceed the limits
given in 6.3.2 of Appendix A.
3.6
Where the Overseeing Organisation requires other serviceability limit state checks, the criteria should
generally be those specified in Appendix A.
August 2015
3/1
Chapter 3
Limit States
3/2
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 4
4 USE OF APPENDIX A AND BS 5400-4:1990

4.1
Appendix A is based on BS 5400-4 and retains the terminology and clause numbering of that document.
In cases where the BS 5400-4 clauses are not required for assessment, the numbers and headings of
those clauses have been included to retain the structure of the document but the words Not applicable to
assessment have been added in italics. Advisory clauses have been provided with a suffix A.
4.2
Wherever possible, tabulated values in BS 5400-4 have been replaced by formulae in which m is stated
explicitly. Modified tables, figures and equations retain their BS 5400-4 numbers.
4.3
Comments are given on those clauses where the changes from BS 5400-4 are substantial or are not self
evident. There are also comments on some of the clauses in Appendix A which have been marked as Not
applicable to assessment. A number of these relate to serviceability criteria which should only be included
in an assessment on the direction of the Overseeing Organisation.
4.4
When, in Appendix A, reference is made to other clauses within Appendix A, the referenced clause number is
given without any suffix. When, in Appendix A, reference is made to Chapters 1 to 5 of BD44, the referenced
clause numbers are provided with the suffix B.
August 2015
4/1
Chapter 4
4/2
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 5
References
5 REFERENCES
5.1
Normative References
Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB)

DMRB Volume 1: Section 3: General design
BD 37 Loads for Highway Bridges
(DMRB 1.3)
DMRB Volume 3: Section 4: Assessment
BD 21 The Assessment of Highway Bridges and Structures
(DMRB 3.4.3)
BD 86 The Assessment of Highway Bridges and Structures for the Effects of Special Types General Order
(STGO) and Special Order (SO) Vehicles
(DMRB 3.4.19)
British Standards (BS): BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION
BS 5400-4:1990. Steel, concrete and composite bridges. Code of practice for design of concrete bridges
5.2
Informative References
Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB) and Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works
(MCHW) : HMSO
BA 38 Assessment of Fatigue Life of Corroded or Damaged Reinforcing Bars
(DMRB 3.4.5).
BA 51 The Assessment of Concrete Structures Affected by Steel Corrosion
(DMRB 3.4.13)
BA 52 The Assessment of Concrete Structures Affected by Alkali Silica Reaction
(DMRB 3.4.10)
BD 79 The Management of Sub-standard Highway Structures
(DMRB 3.4.18)
MCHW Volume 1 Specification for Highway Works
BS 6089:2010. Assessment to in situ compressive strength in structures and precast concrete components
Complementary guidance to that given in BS EN 13791
BS EN 1992-1-1:2004. Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings
(incorporating amendments 1 and 2, 2011)
August 2015
5/1
Chapter 5
References
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
BS EN 1992-2:2005. Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures Part 2: Concrete bridges design and detailing
rules (incorporating amendment 1, 2010)
BS EN 13791:2007. Assessment of in situ compressive strength in structures and precast concrete components
BS EN ISO 15630-1:2010. Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete. Test methods. Reinforcing
bars, wire rod and wire
BS EN ISO 15630-3:2010. Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete. Test methods. Prestressing steel
5/2
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Chapter 6
Enquiries
6 ENQUIRIES
Approval of this document for publication is given by:
Highways England
Temple Quay House
Bristol
BS1 6HA
M WILSON
Chief Highway Engineer
Transport Scotland
8th Floor, Buchanan House
58 Port Dundas Road
R BRANNEN
Glasgow, G4 0HF Director
Trunk Roads and Bus Operations
Welsh Government
Crown Buildings, Cathays Park
Cardiff, CF10 3NQ
SHEENA HAGUE
Deputy Director
Network Management Division
The Department for Regional Development

Transport Northern Ireland
Clarence Court
10-18 Adelaide Street
Belfast, BT2 8GB
P B DOHERTY
Director of Engineering
All technical enquiries or comments on this Standard should be sent to

standards_enquiries@highwaysengland.co.uk
August 2015
6/1
Chapter 6
Enquiries
6/2
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
APPENDIX A AMENDMENTS TO BS 5400-4

1. SCOPE
2.
DEFINITION AND SYMBOLS

2.1 Definitions
2.1.1
General

2.1.2 Partial load factors
2.1.3
Materials
2.1.3.1
Strength
2.1.3.2
Characteristic stress
2.2 Symbols
3.
LIMIT STATE PHILOSOPHY
3.1 General
4.
ASSESSMENT: GENERAL

4.1 Limit state requirements

4.2 Loads, load combination and partial safety factors fL and f3

4.2.1 Loads

4.2.2 Serviceability Limit State

4.2.2A Serviceability Limit State

4.2.3 Ultimate Limit State

4.2.4 Deflection

4.3 Properties of materials

4.3.1 General

4.3.2 Material properties

4.3.2.1 Concrete

4.3.2.2 Reinforcement and prestressing steel

4.3.2.2A Reinforcement and prestressing steel

4.3.3 Value of m
4.3.3.1
General

4.3.3.2 Serviceability Limit State

4.3.3.3 Ultimate Limit State

4.3.3.3A Ultimate Limit State
4.3.3.4
Fatigue

4.4 Analysis of structure
4.4.1
General
4.4.1A
General

4.4.2 Analysis for Serviceability Limit State
4.4.2.1
General
4.4.2.1A
General

4.4.2.2 Methods of analysis and their requirements

4.4.3 Analysis for Ultimate Limit State

4.4.3A Analysis for Ultimate Limit State

4.5 Analysis of section


August 2015
A/1
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15

4.6 Deflection
4.7 Fatigue

4.7A Fatigue

4.8 Combined global and local effects

4.8.1 General

4.8.2 Analysis of structure

4.8.2A Analysis of structure

4.8.3 Analysis of section
5.
ASSESSMENT: REINFORCED CONCRETE
5.1 General

5.1.1 Introduction

5.1.2 Limit state assessment of reinforced concrete

5.1.3 Loads

5.1.4 Strength of materials

5.1.4.1 Definition of strengths

5.1.4.2 Strength of concrete

5.1.4.3 Strength of reinforcement

5.2 Structures and structural frames

5.2.1 Analysis of structure

5.2.2 Redistribution of moments

5.2.2A Redistribution of moments
5.3 Beams

5.3.1 General

5.3.1.1 Effective span

5.3.1.2 Effective width of flanged beams

5.3.1.3 Slenderness limits for beams

5.3.1.3A Slenderness limits for beams

5.3.2 Resistance moment of beams

5.3.2.1 Analysis of sections

5.3.2.1A Analysis of sections

5.3.2.2 Design charts Not applicable in assessment

5.3.2.3 Assessment formulae
5.3.2.3A
Assessment formulae

5.3.3 Shear resistance of beams

5.3.3.1 Shear stress

5.3.3.1A Shear stress
5.3.3.2
Shear capacity
5.3.3.2A
Shear capacity

5.3.3.3 Enhanced shear strength of sections close to supports

5.3.3.3A Enhanced shear strength of sections close to supports

5.3.3.4 Bottom loaded beams
5.3.3.5
Alternative method
5.3.3.5A
Alternative method
5.3.3.6
Other approaches
5.3.3.6A
Other approaches

5.3.3.7 Assessment of deck hinges and half joint structures

5.3.3.7A Assessment of deck hinges and half joint structures
5.3.4
Torsion
5.3.4.1
General
5.3.4.2
Torsionless systems
A/2
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A

5.3.4.3 Stresses and reinforcement

5.3.4.3A Stresses and reinforcement

5.3.4.4 Treatment of various cross-sections

5.3.4.4A Treatment of various cross-sections
5.3.4.5
Detailing
5.3.4.5A
Detailing

5.3.5 Longitudinal shear

5.3.6 Deflection in beams

5.3.7 Crack control in beams
5.4 Slabs

5.4.1 Moments and shear forces in slabs

5.4.1A Moments and shear forces in slabs

5.4.2 Resistance moments of slabs

5.4.3 Resistance to in-plane forces

5.4.3A Resistance to in-plane forces

5.4.4 Shear resistance of slabs

5.4.4.1 Shear stress in solid slabs: general

5.4.4.2 Shear stresses in solid slabs under concentrated loads (including wheel loads)

5.4.4.2A Shear stresses in solid slabs under concentrated loads (including wheel loads)

5.4.4.3 Shear in voided slabs

5.4.4.3A Shear in voided slabs

5.4.5 Deflection of slabs

5.4.6 Crack control in slabs

5.4.7 Torsion in slabs
5.4.7.1
Slab interior
5.4.7.2
Slab edges
5.5 Columns

5.5.1 General

5.5.1.1 Definitions

5.5.1.2 Effective height of column

5.5.1.2A Effective height of column

5.5.1.3 Slenderness limits for columns

5.5.1.3A Slenderness limits for columns

5.5.1.4 Assessment of strength

5.5.2 Moments and forces in columns

5.5.3 Short column subject to axial load and bending about the minor axis
5.5.3.1
General

5.5.3.2 Analysis of sections


5.5.3.3 Design charts for rectangular and circular columns

Not applicable in assessment

5.5.3.4 Assessment formulae for rectangular columns

5.5.3.5 Simplified design formulae for rectangular columns

Not applicable to assessment

5.4.4 Short columns subject to axial load and either bending about the major axis or biaxial bending

5.4.4A Short columns subject to axial load and either bending about the major axis or biaxial bending
5.5.5
Slender columns
5.5.5.1
General

5.5.5.1A General

5.5.5.2 Slender columns bent about a minor axis

5.5.5.3 Slender columns bent about a major axis

5.5.5.4 Slender columns bent about both axes
August 2015
A/3
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15

5.5.6 Shear resistance of columns

5.5.6A Shear resistance of columns

5.5.7 Crack control in columns

5.5.8 Bearing on columns

5.6 Reinforced concrete walls

5.6.1 General

5.6.1.1 Definition

5.6.1.2 Limits to slenderness

5.6.1.2A Limits to slenderness

5.6.2 Forces and moments in reinforcement concrete walls

5.6.3 Short reinforced walls resisting moments and axial forces

5.6.4 Slender reinforced walls

5.6.4A Slender reinforced walls

5.6.5 Shear resistance of reinforced walls

5.6.5A Shear resistance of reinforced walls

5.6.6 Deflection of reinforced walls

5.6.7 Crack control in reinforced walls
5.7 Bases

5.7.1 General

5.7.2 Moments and forces in bases

5.7.3 Assessment of bases

5.7.3.1 Resistance to bending

5.7.3.1A Resistance to bending

5.7.3.2 Shear
5.7.3.2A
Shear

5.7.3.3 Bond and anchorage

5.7.3.3A Bond and anchorage

5.7.4 Deflection of bases

5.7.5 Crack control in bases

5.8 Considerations of details

5.8.1 Construction details

5.8.1.1 Size of members Not applicable to assessment

5.8.1.2 Accuracy of position of reinforcement

5.8.1.2A Accuracy of position of reinforcement

5.8.1.3 Construction joint Not applicable to assessment

5.8.1.4 Movement joints Not applicable to assessment

5.8.2 Concrete cover to reinforcement

5.8.2A Concrete cover to reinforcement

5.8.3 Reinforcement general consideration

5.8.3.1 Groups of bars

5.8.3.2 Bar schedule dimensions


5.8.4 Minimum area of reinforcement in members

5.8.4.1 Minimum areas of main reinforcement


5.8.4.1A Minimum areas of main reinforcement

5.8.4.2 Minimum area of secondary reinforcement

5.8.4.2A Minimum area of secondary reinforcement

5.8.4.3 Minimum area of links

5.8.4.3A Minimum area of links
A/4
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A

5.8.5 Maximum areas of reinforcement in members


5.8.5A Maximum areas of reinforcement in members

5.8.6 Bond, anchorage and bearing

5.8.6.1 Geometrical classification of deformed bars

5.8.6.2 Local bond Not applicable to assessment

5.8.6.2A Local bond

5.8.6.3 Anchorage bond

5.8.6.3A Anchorage bond

5.8.6.4 Effective perimeter of a bar or group of bars

5.8.6.4A Effective perimeter of a bar or group of bars

5.8.6.5 Anchorage of links

5.8.6.6 Laps and joints

5.8.6.7 Lap length

5.8.6.8 Hooks and bends

5.8.6.8A Hooks and bends

5.8.6.9 Bearing stress inside bends

5.8.6.9A Bearing stress inside bends

5.8.7 Curtailment and anchorage of reinforcement

5.8.7A Curtailment and anchorage of reinforcement

5.8.8 Spacing of reinforcement

5.8.8.1 Minimum distance between bars


5.8.8.1A Minimum distance between bars

5.8.8.2 Maximum distance between bars in tension

5.8.8.2A Maximum distance between bars in tension

5.8.9 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement

5.8.10 Arrangement of reinforcement in skew slabs

5.8.10A Arrangement of reinforcement in skew slabs

5.9 Additional consideration in the use of lightweight aggregate concrete
5.9.1
General
5.9.2
Durability Not applicable to assessment

5.9.3 Strength of concrete


5.9.4A Shear resistance of beams

5.9.5 Torsional resistance of beams

5.9.6 Deflection of beams

5.9.7 Shear resistance of slabs

5.9.8 Deflection of slabs
5.9.9
Columns
5.9.9.1
General
5.9.9.2
Short columns
5.9.9.3
Slender columns

5.9.10 Local bond, anchorage bond and laps

5.9.10A Local bond, anchorage bond and laps

5.9.11 Bearing stress inside bends
August 2015
A/5
Appendix A
6.
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
ASSESSMENT: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
6.1 General
6.1.1
Introduction
6.1.1A
Introduction

6.1.2 Limit state assessment of prestressed concrete

6.1.2.1 Basis of assessment
6.1.2.2
Durability Not applicable to assessment

6.1.2.3 Other limit states and considerations

6.1.3 Loads

6.1.4 Strength of materials

6.1.4.1 Definition of strength

6.1.4.2 Strength of concrete

6.1.4.3 Strength of prestressing tendons

6.2 Structure and structural frames

6.2.1 Analysis of structures

6.2.2 Redistribution of moments

6.3 Beams
6.3.1
General

6.3.1.1 Definitions
6.3.1.2
Slender beams Not applicable to assessment

6.3.2 Serviceability Limit State: flexure

6.3.2A Serviceability Limit State: flexure

6.3.3 Ultimate Limit State: flexure
6.3.3.1
Section analysis
6.3.3.1A
Section analysis
6.3.3.2
Design charts Not applicable to assessment
6.3.3.3
Assessment formula
6.3.3.3A
Assessment formula
6.3.3.4
Non-rectangular sections

6.3.4.1
General
6.3.4.1A
General

6.3.4.2 Sections uncracked in flexure

6.3.4.2A Sections uncracked in flexure

6.3.4.3 Sections cracked in flexure

6.3.4.3A Sections cracked in flexure
6.3.4.4
Shear reinforcement
6.3.4.4A
Shear reinforcement

6.3.4.5 Maximum shear force

6.3.4.5A Maximum shear force
6.3.4.6
Segmental construction
6.3.4.6A
6.3.4.7
Alternative method
6.3.4.7A
Alternative method

6.3.4.8 Other approaches
6.3.4.8A
Other approaches

6.3.5 Torsional resistance of beams
6.3.5.1
General

6.3.5.2 Stresses and reinforcement
A/6
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A

6.3.5.3


6.3.5.4 Other assessment methods

6.3.5.4A Other assessment methods

6.3.6 Longitudinal shear

6.3.7 Deflection of beams

6.3.7A Deflection of beams
6.4 Slabs

6.4A Slabs
6.5 Columns

6.6 Tension members

6.7 Prestressing requirements

6.7.1 Maximum initial prestress

6.7.2 Loss of prestress, other than friction losses
6.7.2.1
General

6.7.2.2 Loss of prestress due to relaxation of steel

6.7.2.3 Loss of prestress due to elastic deformation of the concrete

6.7.2.4 Loss of prestress due to shrinkage of the concrete

6.7.2.4A Loss of prestress due to shrinkage of the concrete

6.7.2.5 Loss of prestress due to creep of the concrete

6.7.2.5A Loss of prestress due to creep of the concrete

6.7.2.6 Loss of prestress during anchorage

6.7.2.7 Losses of prestress due to steam curing

6.7.3 Loss of prestress due to friction
6.7.3.1
General

6.7.3.2 Friction in the jack and anchorage

6.7.3.3 Friction in the duct due to unintentional variation from specified profile

6.7.3.3A Friction in the duct due to unintentional variation from specified profile

6.7.3.4 Friction in the duct due to curvature of the tendon

6.7.3.4A Friction in the duct due to curvature of the tendon

6.7.3.5 Friction in circular construction

6.7.3.6 Lubricants

6.7.4 Transmission length in pre-tensioned members

6.7.4A Transmission length in pre-tensioned members

6.7.5 End blocks and deviators

6.7.5A End blocks and deviators

6.8 Considerations of details
6.8.1
General

6.8.2 Cover to prestressing tendons
6.8.2.1
General
6.8.2.1A
General
6.8.2.2
Pre-tensioned tendons

6.8.2.3 Tendons in ducts

6.8.3 Spacing of prestressing tendons
6.8.3.1
General Not applicable to assessment
6.8.3.2
Pre-tensioned tendons Not applicable to assessment

6.8.3.3 Tendons in ducts

6.8.4 Longitudinal reinforcement in prestressed concrete beams

6.8.5 Links in prestressed concrete beams

6.8.6 Shock loading Not applicable to assessment
August 2015
A/7
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15

6.8.7 Deflected tendons Not applicable to assessment
6.8.8
External tendons
6.8.8A
External tendons
7.
ASSESSMENT: PRECAST, COMPOSITE AND PLAIN CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
7.1 General
7.1.1
Introduction
7.1.1A
Introduction

7.1.2 Limit state assessment

7.1.2.1 Basis of assessment

7.1.2.2 Handling stresses Not applicable to assessment

7.1.2.3 Connections and joints

7.1.2.3A Connections and joints

7.2 Precast concrete construction

7.2.1 Framed structures and continuous beams

7.2.2 Other precast members

7.2.3 Supports for precast members
7.2.3.1
Concrete corbels
7.2.3.1A
Concrete corbels

7.2.3.2 Width of supports for precast units
7.2.3.3
Bearing stresses
7.2.3.3A
Bearing stresses

7.2.3.4 Horizontal forces or rotations at bearings

7.2.4 Joints between precast members
7.2.4.1
General

7.2.4.2 Half joint

7.2.4.2A Half joint

7.3 Structural connections between units
7.3.1
General

7.3.1.1 Structural requirements of connections
7.3.1.2
Assessment method

7.3.1.3 Consideration affecting design details


7.3.1.4 Factors affecting design and construction


7.3.2 Continuity of reinforcement
7.3.2.1
General
7.3.2.2
Sleeving
7.3.2.2A
Sleeving
7.3.2.3
Threading
7.3.2.3A
Threading

7.3.2.4 Welding of bars


7.3.2.4A Welding of bars

7.3.3 Other type of connections

7.3.3A Other type of connections

7.4 Composite concrete construction
7.4.1
General

7.4.2.1
General
7.4.2.2
Vertical shear
A/8
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
7.4.2.2A
Vertical shear

7.4.2.3 Longitudinal shear

7.4.2.3A Longitudinal shear



7.5 Plain concrete walls and abutments
7.5.1
General
7.5.1A
General

7.5.2 Moment and forces in walls and abutments

7.5.3 Eccentricity in the plane of the wall or abutment

7.5.4 Eccentricity at right angles to walls or abutments

7.5.5 Analysis of section

7.5.5A Analysis of section
7.5.6
Shear
7.5.6A
Shear
7.5.7
Bearing

7.5.8 Deflection of plain concrete walls or abutments

7.5.9 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement

7.5.10 Stress limitation for Serviceability Limit State
ANNEX A: REFERENCES
August 2015
A/9
Appendix A
A/10
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
1. SCOPE
1.1
Refer to 1.5B.
2.
DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS
2.1
Definitions
General. For the purposes of this Standard the definitions given in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3) apply. All
2.1.1
formulae are based on SI units in Newtons and millimetres unless otherwise stated.
2.1.2
Partial load factors. For the sake of clarity the factors that together comprise the partial safety factor for
loads are restated as follows. Assessment loads, QA*, are obtained by multiplying the nominal loads, Qk*, by fL,
the partial safety factor for loads. fL is a function of two individual factors, fl and f2, which take account of the
following:
fl
possible unfavourable deviations of the loads from their nominal values;
f2
reduced probability that various loadings acting together will all attain their nominal values
simultaneously.
The relevant values of the function fL (= f1 f2) are given in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3), BD 37 (DMRB 1.3), BD 86
(DMRB 3.4.19) and BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7) as appropriate.
The assessment load effects, SA*, are obtained from the assessment loads by the relation:
SA* = f3 (effects of QA*) = f3 (effects of fL Qk*)
where
f3
is a factor that takes account of inaccurate assessment of the effects of loading, unforeseen stress
distribution in the structure and variations in dimensional accuracy achieved in construction.
The values of f3 are given in 4.2.

2.1.3 Materials
2.1.3.1 Strength. Material strengths are expressed in terms of the cube strength of concrete, fcu, the yield or proof
strength of reinforcement, fy or the breaking stress of prestressing tendon, fpu. The material strengths used may be
either:
(a)
Characteristic strength, which is the strength below which not more than 5% of all possible test results
may be expected to fall, or
(b)
Worst credible strength, refer to 2.4B to 2.15B.
2.1.3.2 Characteristic stress. that value of stress at the assumed limit of linearity on the stress-strain curve for
the material.
August 2015
A/11
Appendix A
2.2
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Symbols
The symbols used in Appendix A are as follows:

Ac
Acon
Ae
Alv

Ao
Aps
As
A's
A'sl
As2
Asc
AsL
Ast
Asup
Asv
At
a'
ab
acr
av
area of concrete
contact area
area of fully anchored reinforcement per unit length crossing the shear plane
area of effectively anchored longitudinal reinforcement in excess to that required to
resist bending co-existent with the shear force
area enclosed by the median wall line
area of prestressing tendons in the tension zone
area of tension reinforcement
area of compression reinforcement
area of compression reinforcement in the more highly compressed face of a column
area of reinforcement in the other face of a column
area of longitudinal reinforcement (for columns)
cross-sectional area of one bar of longitudinal reinforcement provided for torsion
cross-sectional area of one leg of a closed link
supporting area
cross-sectional area of the legs of a link
area of transverse reinforcement
distance from compression face to a point at which the crack width is being calculated
centre-to-centre distance between bars
distance from the point (crack) considered to the surface of nearest longitudinal bar
distance from the section under consideration to the supporting member; distance from the boundary of
the loaded area to the perimeter considered for punching shear
b
width or breadth of section; distance between void centres in voided slabs
ba
average breadth of section excluding the compression flange
bc
breadth of compression face
bcol
width of column
be
width of the edge zone of a slab
bt
breadth of section at level of tension reinforcement
bw
breadth of web or rib of a member
c
depth of cover concrete
cnom
nominal cover
Dc
density of lightweight aggregate concrete at time of test
d
effective depth to tension reinforcement
d'
depth of compression reinforcement from the more highly compressed face
depth of concrete in compression
dc
de
effective depth for a solid slab or rectangular beam; otherwise the overall depth of the compression flange
ds
effective depth to tension steel in prestressed member
d0
depth to the horizontal reinforcement in the half joint
dt
effective depth from the extreme compression fibre to either the longitudinal bars around which the
stirrups pass or the centroid of the tendons, whichever is the greater
d2
depth from the surface to the reinforcement in the face other than the more highly compressed
(EI)c
flexural rigidity of the column cross-section
ex
resultant eccentricity of load at right-angles to plane of wall
Fbst
tensile bursting force
Fbt
tensile force due to ultimate loads in a bar or group of bars
Fub
ultimate anchorage capacity of tension reinforcement
Fub max anchorage capacity required for fully anchored behaviour
f stress
A/12
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
fcav
fci
scpb
scp
fcu
fpb
fpe
fpt
fpu
f's
fs2
ft
fy
fyL
fyv
h
hf
hmax
hmin
hred
hw
hx
hy
I
K
k
kt
kl
Ls
le
lex
ley
lo
l
ll
lt
M
Ma,i*
Mcr
Mg
Mi
Mix
Miy
Mq
Mtx
Mty
Mu
Appendix A
average compressive stress in the flexural compressive zone

concrete strength at (initial) transfer
total direct stress at the location of the prestressed section being checked due to bending and axial load
effects, taken as positive in compression
mean compressive stress in the concrete due to the prestressing and axial loading
characteristic or worst credible concrete cube strength
tensile stress in tendons at (beam) failure
effective prestress (in tendon)
stress due to prestress
characteristic or worst credible strength of prestressing tendons
stress in reinforcement in compression, taken as equal to fy/(ms + fy/2000)
stress in reinforcement in other face
maximum principal tensile stress; tensile strength of reinforcement
characteristic or worst credible strength of reinforcement
characteristic or worst credible strength of longitudinal reinforcement
characteristic of worst credible strength of shear reinforcement
overall depth (thickness) of section (in plane of bending)
thickness of flange
larger dimension of section
smaller dimension of section
depth of concrete in compression under the ultimate loads on precast segmental structures with unbonded
prestressing only
wall thickness
overall depth of the cross-section in the plane of bending Miy
overall depth of the cross-section in the plane of bending Mix
second moment of area
factor depending on the type of duct or sheath used; reduction factor for the shear resistance of voided
slabs
constant (with appropriate subscripts)
depends on the type of tendon
depends on the concrete bond across the shear plane
length of shear plane
effective height of a column or wall
effective height for bending about the major axis
effective height for bending about the minor axis
clear height of column between end restraints
thickness of concrete member in the plane of a bent reinforcing bar
length of reinforcing bar measured inside the bend and bearing onto the concrete
transmission length
bending moment due to ultimate loads
moment of resistance of a slab due to the i-direction reinforcement to the x-axis
cracking moment at the section considered
moment due to permanent loads
maximum initial moment in a column due to ultimate loads
initial moment about the major axis of a slender column due to ultimate loads
initial moment about the minor axis of a slender column due to ultimate loads
moment due to live loads
total moment about the major axis of a slender column due to ultimate loads
total moment about the minor axis of a slender column due to ultimate loads
ultimate resistance moment
August 2015
A/13
Appendix A
Mux
Muy
Mx,My
Mx,My
Mxy
Mxy*
Mn
Mn
Mnt
Mo
M1
M2
N
Nc
Ni*
Nx,Ny
Nxy
Nu
Nuz
nw
Pf
Ph
Pk
Po
Px
QA*
Qk*
RA*
r
rps
S
SA*
sv
u0
t
T
Tu
V
Vc
Vc'
Vco
Vcr
Vi
Vp
V1
A/14
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
ultimate moment capacity in a short column assuming ultimate axial load and bending about the major
axis only
ultimate moment capacity in a short column assuming ultimate axial load and bending about the minor
axis only
moments about the major and minor axes of a short column due to ultimate loads; moments about the
axes of a slab
moments of resistance of a slab about the axes in-plane
torsional moment about the axes of a slab
torsional moment of resistance of a slab
moment about an axis perpendicular to the n-direction in a slab
moment of resistance of a slab about an axis perpendicular to the n-direction
twisting moment per unit length of a slab adjacent to the edge zone referred to axes perpendicular and
parallel to the edge
moment necessary to produce zero stress in the concrete at the depth d
smaller initial end moment in a column due to ultimate loads (assumed negative if the column is bent in
double curvature)
larger initial end moment in a column due to ultimate loads (assumed positive)
ultimate axial load at section considered; number of bars in a group
ultimate resistance of a slab in compression (per unit length)
ultimate tensile resistance of a slab due to the i-reinforcement (per unit length)
in-plane axial forces in a slab
in-plane shear force in a slab
ultimate resistance axial load
axial loading capacity of a column ignoring all bending
ultimate axial load per unit length of wall
effective prestressing force after all losses
horizontal component of the prestressing force after all losses
basic load in tendon
prestressing force in the tendon at the jacking end (or at tangent point near jacking end)
prestressing force at distance x from jack
assessment load
nominal load
Assessment reaction at support
internal radius of bend
radius of curvature of a tendon
first moment of area of the part of the section excluding any area below the location being checked,
calculated about the centroidal axis of the whole section
assessment load effects
spacing of links along the member
perimeter of the loaded area for a concentrated load
breadth of bearing area over a support
torque due to ultimate loads
ultimate torsional strength
shear force due to ultimate loads
ultimate shear resistance of concrete
shear resistance of a solid slab
ultimate shear resistance of a section uncracked in flexure
ultimate shear resistance of a section cracked in flexure
shear capacity of infill concrete
shear capacity of precast prestressed section
longitudinal shear force due to ultimate load
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Vs
shear resistance of shear reinforcement
Vsv
shear resistance due to links in a voided slab
Vt
Flexural shear force per unit width at the edge of a slab
ultimate shear resistance of section; ultimate punching shear capacity of a slab
Vu
Vux
ultimate shear capacity of a section for the x-x axis
Vuy
ultimate shear capacity of a section for the y-y axis
Vx
applied shear due to ultimate loads for the x-x axis
Vy
applied shear due to ultimate loads for the y-y axis
shear stress
v
ultimate shear stress in concrete (for half joints)
vu
vc
ultimate shear stress in concrete
v1
ultimate longitudinal shear stress per unit area of contact surface
torsional shear stress
vt
minimum ultimate torsional shear stress above which reinforcement is required
vtmin
vtu
ultimate torsional shear stress
neutral axis depth; distance form jack
x
x1
smaller centre-line dimension of a link
y
distance of the fibre considered in the plane of bending from the centroid of the concrete section
yo
half the side of end block
ypo
half the side of loaded area
y1
larger centre-line dimension of a link
z
lever arm
a
inclination of shear reinforcement to the member axis; factor to determine fpb
al
angle between the axis of the design moment and the direction of the tensile reinforcement
a2
angle of friction at the joint
acw
coefficient taking into account of the state of the stress in the compression chord
an
coefficient as a function of column axial load
as
factor that takes account of the increased bond strength due to transverse pressure
b
coefficient dependent on bar type
f1, f2, f3 partial load factors
fL
product of f1 and f2
m
partial safety factor for strength
mb
partial safety factor for bond
mbs
component of partial safety factor for bond allowing to the variation in bond strength
mc
partial safety for concrete
mcw
partial safety for plain concrete wall
ms
partial safety factor for steel
mv
partial safety factor applied to vc

strain
m
average strain
s
strain in tension reinforcement
1
strain at level considered

coefficient of friction
s
depth factor

geometrical ratio of reinforcement, generally equal to As/bd
net
for a flange
SAsv
area of shear reinforcement
Sbd
area of the critical section for punching shear
f
size (nominal diameter) of bar or tendon
j
diameter of the void in voided slabs

reduction factor for short anchorage
August 2015
A/15
Appendix A

r
q
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
shear enhancement factor for short shear spans

stress, pressure
stress level for fatigue life
angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force used in
variable truss method; angle between the n-direction and the x-axis in a slab
strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear
3.
LIMIT STATE PHILOSOPHY
3.1
General. Refer to 3.1B to 3.6B.
4.
ASSESSMENT: GENERAL
4.1
Limit state requirements. Refer to 3.1B to 3.6B.
4.2
Loads, load combinations and partial safety factors fL and f3
4.2.1 Loads. The nominal values of loads are given in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3), BD 37 (DMRB 1.3), BD 86
(DMRB 3.4.19) and BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7) as appropriate. However, Type HB loading to BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) must
only be used when required by the Overseeing Organisation, as Special Type General Order (STGO) and Special
Order (SO) vehicles and associated SV and SOV load models to BD 86 (DMRB 3.4.19) are now the load models
for abnormal loading. Creep and shrinkage of concrete and prestress (including secondary effects in statically
indeterminate structures) must be regarded as permanent loads. Collision loading to BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7) must be
considered only when required by the Overseeing Organisation.
4.2.2
Serviceability Limit State. For serviceability limit state checks, the Assessment Live Loading (ALL)
derived from type HA loading or Authorised Weight (AW) vehicles to BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3) and the SV/SOV
load models (or STGO/SO vehicles) must be used, together with the other non-vehicular loads defined in BD 37
(DMRB 1.3); they must be applied and have the load factors and combinations in accordance with BD 86 (DMRB
3.4.19) and BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) as appropriate, with the fL factor equal, for load combinations 1 to 5 of BD 37
(DMRB 1.3), to 1.0 for all SV/SOV load models (or STGO/SO vehicles) and associated ALL (or AW vehicles),
in accordance with 2.7 of BD 86 (DMRB 3.4.19). When it has been agreed with the Overseeing Organisation that
Type HB loading has to be included, the ALL (or AW vehicles) and Type HB loading must be used, together with
the other non-vehicular loads defined in BD 37 (DMRB 1.3); they must be applied and have the load factors and
combinations in accordance with BD 37 (DMRB 1.3).
The value of fL for creep and shrinkage of concrete and for prestress (including secondary effect in statically
indeterminate structures) must be taken as 1.0. The value of f3 must be taken as 1.0.
For the limitations given in 4.1.1.1 b) of BS 5400-4 for prestressed concrete, all members must be checked as being
in class 2 for load combinations 1 to 5 of BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) except that, for load combination 1, live loading
can be ignored for lightly trafficked highway bridges (e.g. accommodation bridges, bridleway bridges and foot/
cycle bridges) and railway bridges where the live loading is controlled. For load combination 1, live loading must
comprise ALL or AW vehicles only; however, for transverse cantilever slabs, transversely and two-way spanning
slabs and central reserves (including skew slabs with significant transverse action), the loading must comprise AW
vehicles only, applied as a single vehicle or convoy of vehicles in accordance with Annex D of BD 21 (DMRB
3.4.3). Single wheel loads need not to be considered except for cantilever slabs and the top flanges in beamand-slab, voided slabs and box-beam construction. Cracking type checks for prestressed concrete are considered
satisfied when the requirements of 6.3.2 are met; cracking type checks do not need to routinely be performed for
bridges of prestressed concrete construction where all tendons in a particular section are external and unbonded
except that, for segmental structures with precast elements, the stresses at unreinforced contact joints must comply
with the requirements of 6.3.2.
A/16
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
If cracking type checks in reinforced concrete are required by the Overseeing Organisation, crack widths must
be calculated in accordance with 5.8.8.2, and for the limitations given in 4.1.1.1 a) of BS 5400-4 for reinforced
concrete, only load combination 1 of BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) needs to be considered. Live loading must comprise
ALL or AW vehicles only; however, for transverse cantilever slabs, transversely and two-way spanning slabs and
central reserves (including skew slabs with significant transverse action), the loading must comprise AW vehicles
only, applied as a single vehicle or convoy of vehicles in accordance with Annex D of BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3). Single
wheel loads need not to be considered except for cantilever slabs and the top flanges in beam-and-slab, voided slabs
and box-beam construction.
For the stress limitations given in 4.1.1.3 of BS 5400-4 for prestressed concrete and, where required by the
Overseeing Organisation, for reinforced concrete, checks must be performed for load combinations 1 to 5 of BD
37 (DMRB 1.3). For prestressed concrete, stress limitations checks are considered satisfied when the compressive
stress limits of 6.3.2 are met.
As the tendons in externally prestressed structures do not rely on concrete for corrosion protection, and as the problem
of high stress fluctuations in tendon associated with cracks in bonded construction are not relevant to unbonded
prestressing, the serviceability cracking criteria have been relaxed in the case of external unbonded prestressing. In
longer span prestressed girder concrete bridges, temperature effects often give greater stresses than live loads and
should not be overlooked, especially if required to investigate the cause of observed cracking.
4.2.3
Ultimate Limit State. For ultimate limit state checks, the ALL (or AW vehicles) and the SV/SOV
load models (or STGO/SO vehicles) must be used, together with the other non-vehicular loads defined in BD
37 (DMRB 1.3) and, when required by the Overseeing Organisation, with the loads in BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7);
they must be applied and have the load factors and combinations in accordance with BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3), BD
86 (DMRB 3.4.19), BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) and BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7) as appropriate, with the fL factor equal, for
load combinations 2 and 3 of BD 37 (DMRB 1.3), to 1.0 for all SV/SOV load models (or STGO/SO vehicles), in
accordance with 2.9 of BD 86 (DMRB 3.4.19). When it has been agreed with the Overseeing Organisation that
Type HB loading has to be included, the ALL (or AW vehicles) and Type HB loading must be used, together with
the other non-vehicular loads defined in BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) and, when required by the Overseeing Organisation,
with the loads in BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7); they must be applied and have the load factors and combinations
in accordance with BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3), BD 37 (DMRB 1.3) and BD 48 (DMRB 3.4.7) as appropriate. In
calculating the resistance of members to flexure, vertical shear and torsion, fL for the prestressing force must be
taken as 1.15 where it adversely affects the resistance and 0.87 in other cases, except that, when no unbonded
prestressing is present, the factor fL must be applied only for calculating the resistance of members to vertical shear
and torsion. In calculating secondary effects in statically indeterminate structures, fL for the prestressing force may
be taken as 1.0. The value of f3 must be taken as 1.10 in accordance with BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3) except that where
plastic upper bound methods are used for the analysis of the structure (e.g. yield-line analysis), f3 must be taken as
1.15. For other non-elastic methods, the factor may be taken as 1.10.
4.2.4
Deflection. When required by the Overseeing Organisation, deflection must be calculated for the most
unfavourable distribution of loading for the member (or strip of slab) and may be derived from an elastic analysis
of the structure. The partial safety factors are those of the serviceability limit states.
4.3
Properties of materials
4.3.1
General. Either the characteristic strength, or the worst credible strength (see 2.1.3.1), may be used for a
material strength. In general, in analysing a structure to determine load effects, the material properties appropriate
to the characteristic, or worst credible, strength must be used, irrespective of the limit state being considered.
August 2015
A/17
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
For the analysis of sections, the material properties to be used for the individual limit states must be as follows:
(a)
Serviceability limit state: values are given in 4.3.1 of BS 5400-4
(b)
Ultimate limit state: values are given in 4.3.2
The appropriate m values are given in 4.3.3: mc for concrete, and ms for steel.
4.3.2
Material properties
4.3.2.1 Concrete. In assessing the strength of sections at the ultimate limit state, the assessment stress-strain
curve for normal weight concrete may be taken from Figure 1, using the value of mc for concrete given in 4.3.3.3.
The modulus of elasticity to be used for elastic analysis must be appropriate to the cube strength of the concrete,
and, in the absence of test data, the short term value must be taken as (20 + 0.27 fcu) kN/mm with fcu in N/mm
units. The effect of creep under long term loading may be allowed for by using half of the short term modulus of
elasticity. To determine the effects of imposed deformations, for the calculation of deflections and to determine
crack widths and stresses due to the effects of long and short term loading and imposed deformations, an
appropriate intermediate value between the two above may be used.
For lightweight concrete having an air dry density between 1400 kg/m and 2300 kg/m, the values given in the
previous paragraph must be multiplied by (Dc/2300) where Dc is the density of the lightweight aggregate concrete
in kg/m.
Poissons ratio may be taken as 0.2. The value for the coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken from Table 4.3
of BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3).
A/18
August 2015
Appendix A
VolumeAppendix
3 SectionA4 to BS 5400-4
Amendments
Part 14Amendments
BD 44/15 to BS 5400-4
Volume 3 Section 4
Appendix
A
Volume
Section
4
Part 14 3BD
44/XX
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Figure 1 Short term assessment stress-strain curve for normal weight concrete
Figure
1 Short
term
assessment
curvefor
fornormal
normalweight
weight
concrete
Figure
1 Short
term
assessmentstress-strain
stress-strain curve
concrete
Figure
2 Short
termassessment
assessment stress-strain
stress-strain curve
Figure
2 Short
term
curvefor
forreinforcement
reinforcement
Figure 2 Short term assessment stress-strain curve for reinforcement
August 2015
Mmmm/yyyy
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
Chapter/Page
A/19
Appendix A
Appendix A to BS 5400-4
Amendments
Amendments
to BS 5400-4
Appendix
A
Volume 3 Section 4
Volume
Section
Part 14 3BD
44/XX4
Part 14Volume
BD 44/XX
3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Figure
3 Short
term
assessment
stress-strain
normaland
andlow
lowrelaxation
relaxation
products
Figure
3 Short
term
assessment
stress-straincurve
curve for
for normal
products
Figure 3 Short term assessment stress-strain curve for normal and low relaxation products
Figure
Short
term assessment
stress-strain
curve
for wire
'as drawn'
Figure 4
Short4term
assessment
stress-strain
curve for as
drawn
and as wire
spun strand
Figure 4 Short term assessment

and 'asstress-strain
spun' strandcurve for 'as drawn' wire
andThe
'as assessment
spun' strand
4.3.2.2 Reinforcement and prestressing steel.
stress-strain curves may be taken as follows:
(a)
for reinforcement, from Figure 2, using the value of ms given in 4.3.3 or, for steels with sufficient
ductility, from the stress-strain diagram with the inclined top branch in 3.2.7 of BS EN 1992-1-1, using
the value of ms given in 4.3.3;
(b)
for prestressing steel; from Figure 3 or Figure 4, using the value of ms given in 4.3.3.
Chapter/Page
A/20 Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
August 2015
Mmmm/yyyy
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Alternatively where the reinforcement or tendon type is known, manufacturers characteristic stress-strain curves
may be used with the values of ms given in 4.3.3.
For reinforcement, the modulus of elasticity may be taken as 200 kN/mm. For prestressing steel, the modulus of
elasticity may be taken from Figure 3 or Figure 4 as the appropriate tangent modulus at zero load.
4.3.2.2A Reinforcement and prestressing steel
The stress-strain diagram with the inclined top branch of BS EN 1992-1-1 should only be used, at the ultimate limit
state, for reinforcing steels whose properties are not inferior to those corresponding to class B of Annex C of BS
EN 1992-1-1.
4.3.3
Values of m
4.3.3.1 General. For the analysis of sections, the values of m are summarised in 4.3.3.2 to 4.3.3.4.
4.3.3.2 Serviceability Limit State. Where a serviceability limit state check is required, the values of mc and
ms to be applied to the characteristic stresses defined in 2.1.3.2 and 4.3.1 must be based on Table 4 of BS 54004 unless worst credible strengths are used, when the values of mc may be reduced by 10% provided they are not
taken as less than unity.
4.3.3.3 Ultimate Limit State. For both reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete, the values of m applied
to either the characteristic strengths or worst credible strengths are summarised in Table 4A; these replace the m
values for reinforced and prestressed concrete given in BD 21 (DMRB 3.4.3).
Table 4A Values of m at the Ultimate Limit State.

Application
Reinforcement and prestressing tendons
Concrete
Shear in concrete
Bond
Plain concrete wall
1
Symbol
ms
Value for use with:

Characteristic strength
mc
mv
mb
mcw
Worst credible strength
1.15 1
1.10 2
1.50
1.20
1.25
1.15
1.40
1.25
2.25
1.80
May be reduced to 1.05 for grade 460 steel.
2May
be reduced to 1.05 for grade 460 steel or for any steel grade if measured steel depths are used in addition to the
worst credible steel strength.
4.3.3.3A Ultimate Limit State

The partial safety factor m is composed of two sub-factors:
i.
m1 which takes account of possible reductions in the strength of the material in the structure as a whole as
compared with the characteristic value deduced from control specimens;
ii.
m2 which takes account of possible weaknesses of the structure arising from any other cause.
August 2015
A/21
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
In the case of steel, BS 8110-1 suggests that the ms value of 1.15 used in BS 5400-4 and in earlier issues of BS
8110-1 is unjustifiably conservative. The ms value of 1.15 used here may therefore be reduced to 1.05 for grade
460 steel. If the worst credible strength has been determined by testing samples of bars or tendons extracted from
the structure, then m1 could be taken as 1.0. Furthermore, if measured effective depths are used in calculations, m2
could be reduced from its value used in design. The actual design value of m2 is not known, but both reference (1)
and BS 8110-2 suggest that m could be reduced from its design value of 1.15 to 1.05 for assessment. Hence, a m
value of 1.10 has been adopted for use with the worst credible steel strengths and 1.05 when measured steel depths
are also used.
In the case of concrete, m1 is often taken to be 1/0.8 = 1.25 (2). This implies that, at the design stage, m2 = 1.5/1.25
= 1.2. If the worst credible concrete strength has been determined then, in an assessment, m1 can be taken as
1.0. Hence, m = m2. It is emphasised that m2 has to allow for any future deterioration of the concrete due to, for
example, chemical attack, weathering, shrinkage and thermal movements. Hence, m2 could take a value between
1.2 for new concrete (i.e. the value implied in design) and 1.0 for old concrete which is not expected to deteriorate
further. BS 6089 implies that a m value of 1.2 should be applied to the mean estimated in situ cube strength,
whereas BS 8110-2 states that a value not less than 1.05 should be applied to the worst credible strength. The latter
value is considered to be rather low, and hence, allowing for the fact that it is difficult to determine accurately the
worst credible strength for concrete, the higher value of 1.20 has been adopted for both new and old concrete.
If concrete strengths obtained from original construction records are used, the mc values used should be those
from Table 4A for characteristic strength. This is because, although some of the uncertainty about the potential
strength of the concrete is eliminated, the actual strength of concrete is greatly influenced by the curing conditions
(temperature and humidity). BS cured specimens used for concrete control are typically some 20% stronger than
concrete in structure. If steel strengths from original construction records are used, the factors for characteristic
strength may be used.
4.3.3.4 Fatigue. When applying 4.7, the values of ms applied to a reinforcement stress range is 1.00.
4.4
Analysis of structure
4.4.1 General. The requirements of methods of analysis appropriate to the determination of the distribution of
forces and deformations which are to be used in ascertaining that the limit state criteria are satisfied are described
in BS 5400-1. Where a member is continuous over a support which is considered to provide no restraint to rotation
and the analysis is undertaken assuming a span equal to the distance between the centres of point supports, the
bending moment at the support may be reduced by an amount equal to RA*t/8, with RA* being the assessment
reaction at support and t being the breadth of the bearing area.
4.4.1A General
The permitted reduction in bending moment over supports (moment rounding) is that adopted by the Eurocodes
(5.3.2.2 of BS EN 1992-2).
4.4.2
Analysis for Serviceability Limit State
4.4.2.1 General. Elastic methods of analysis must be used to determine internal forces and deformations.
The flexural stiffness constants (second moment of area) for sections of discrete members or unit widths of slab
elements may be based on any of the following:
(a)
Concrete section: The entire member cross-section, ignoring the presence of reinforcement.
(b)
Gross transformed section: The entire member cross-section including the reinforcement, transformed on
the basis of modular ratio.
A/22
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
(c)
Appendix A
Net transformed section: The area of the cross-section which is in compression together with the tensile
reinforcement, transformed on the basis of modular ratio.
A consistent approach must be used which reflects the different behaviour of various parts of the structure.
Axial, torsional and shearing stiffness constants, when required by the method of analysis, should be based on the
concrete section and used with (a) or (b). In assessment, however, it is often beneficial to use cracked properties, and
these should be used with reduced torsional properties to achieve compatibility with (c). For slabs (where torsion
and flexure are not really separate effects) it is appropriate to reduce the torsional stiffness in proportion to the ratio
of the average cracked to uncracked flexural stiffness for the two directions.
Moduli of elasticity and shear moduli values must be appropriate to the characteristic, or worst credible, strength of
the concrete.
4.4.2.1A General
BS 5400-4 allows cracked or uncracked properties to be used. In assessment intermediate properties may be used.
4.4.2.2 Methods of analysis and their requirements. The method of analysis must take account of all the
significant aspects of behaviour of a structure governing its response to loads and imposed deformations.
4.4.3
Analysis for Ultimate Limit State. Elastic methods can be used to determine the distribution of forces
and deformations throughout the structure. Stiffness constants can be based on any of those listed in 4.4.2.1. The
torsional stiffness may be reduced where appropriate in accordance with 5.3.4.2. Other constants may also be
adjusted to give some allowance for redistribution where this will give a more realistic representation of behaviour.
Non-linear and plastic methods of analysis may be used with the agreement of the Overseeing Organisation.
4.4.3A
Analysis for Ultimate Limit State
A wide variety of analytical approaches can be used to assess concrete bridges, ranging from simple static load
distributions, through conventional elastic analyses to sophisticated non-linear analyses. It should be borne in
mind that static analysis and conventional linear elastic analyses normally give safe lower bound solutions for
ultimate strength. It is therefore often appropriate to use the approach of progressive screening. That is, starting
with simple conservative approaches and progressing to more realistic approaches until either adequate strength is
proved or the structure is found to be genuinely inadequate.
Concrete bridges are generally designed by performing elastic analyses using uncracked section properties, and
ensuring that individual sections can resist the elastic stress resultants. The elastic analysis is not intended to predict
the actual behaviour of the structure being designed, but is used merely because it results in a set of stress resultants
which are in equilibrium and, hence, provides a safe design (3). However, in assessment, one is attempting to predict
the actual behaviour of an existing structure. Although an elastic analysis would give a conservative assessment,
there is scope for more accurate analysis, because the section properties are fully defined.
Elastic analysis can be made more realistic by using reduced stiffness for element properties corresponding to
load effects which would otherwise exceed section strengths. This is commonly done for torsion. In particular,
if analysis of simply supported skew slab structures suggests that top steel is required when not provided or is
overstressed in the obtuse corners, this can be avoided by the use of torsionless analysis. Also, because many earlier
concrete beam and slab bridges were designed using static load distribution approaches, with little allowance for
either torsion or global transverse moments, it is often advantageous to analyse them using reduced transverse and
torsional stiffnesses. In principle, provided ductility is adequate, any elastic analysis is a safe lower bound solution
whatever section properties are used.
August 2015
A/23
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Although elastic analysis is safe, it is often advantageous to use more realistic analyses. These include:
i.
Upper bound collapse analyses which predict the collapse load of the complete structure, as opposed to
checking discrete critical sections. It is emphasised that experience of these methods is necessary in order
that the critical collapse mechanism can be identified. Guidance on the applications of such methods to
bridges can be found in references (4-8).
ii.
Non-linear analyses which are capable of predicting the behaviour of a structure at all stages up to
collapse. Most non-linear analyses are capable of predicting only flexural failures. Guidance on their use
can be found in references (1) and (9).
iii.
Methods which take account of restraints which are generally ignored in design, e.g. membrane action
in top slabs of beam and slab decks (10). Guidance on the use of compressive membrane action for
assessment of bridge deck slabs is given in BD 81 (DMRB 3.4.20).
4.5
Analysis of section
4.5.1 Serviceability Limit State. An elastic analysis must be carried out. In-plane shear flexibility in concrete
flanges (shear lag effects) must be allowed for. This may be done by taking an effective width of flange (see
5.3.1.2).
4.5.2 Ultimate Limit State. The strength of critical sections must be assessed in accordance with clauses 5,
6 or 7 to satisfy the requirements of 4.1. In-plane shear flexibility in concrete flanges (shear lag effects) may be
ignored.
4.6
Deflection. When deflection checks are required by the Overseeing Organisation, the material properties,
stiffness constants and calculations of deflections may be based on the information given in 4.3.2.1 and/or in
Appendix A of BS 5400-4.
4.7 Fatigue. When the assessor considers a structure to be fatigue prone, the effect of repeated live loading on
the fatigue strength of a bridge must be assessed. For reinforcing bars that have been subjected to welding, details
of compliance criteria are given in BS 5400-10 as implemented by BD 9 (DMRB 1.3).
For unwelded non-corroded reinforcement the fatigue life must be determined in accordance with BS 5400-10 as
implemented by BD 9 (DMRB 1.3), using the following parameters for the r - N relationship:
bars < 16mm diameter;

bars > 16mm diameter;
m = 9
m = 9
k2 = 0.75 x 1027
k2 = 0.07 x 1027
The effective stress range to be used in fatigue assessment should be obtained by adding 60% of the range from
zero stress to maximum compressive stress to that part of the range from zero stress to maximum tensile stress.
However, where the stress range under load combination 1 of the Assessment Live Loading at the serviceability
limit state of 4.2.2 is less than the value given below, no further fatigue check is required.
Span

less than 3.5m

3.5m - 5.0m

5.0m - 10.0m

10.0m - 200m

200m and greater
A/24
bars < 16mm dia

280 N/mm
250 N/mm
195 N/mm
155 N/mm
250 N/mm
bars > 16mm dia

220 N/mm
190 N/mm
150 N/mm
120 N/mm
190 N/mm
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Provided the following requirements are met, the local effects of wheel loads applied directly to a slab spanning
between beams or webs need not be checked for fatigue:
1.
The clear span to overall depth ratio of the slab does not exceed 18.
2.
The slab acts compositely with its supporting beams or webs.
Either (a) the slab acts compositely with transverse diaphragms or webs or (b) the width of the slab
perpendicular to its span exceeds three times its clear span.
The slab does not contain welded reinforcement or reinforcement couplers.
4.7A Fatigue
The requirements for unwelded non-corroded bars given in 4.7 are based on a study carried out for the Department
of Transport. Many deck slabs would fail fatigue checks. However, extensive testing has shown that the stress
range due to wheel loads experienced by the reinforcement in most cases is substantially less than that predicted by
conventional analysis. Accordingly, checks are not required for local effects provided the conditions in 4.7 above
are met.
Guidance on determining the fatigue life of corroded reinforcement is given in BA 38 (DMRB 3.4.5). Guidance on the
fatigue strength of tack welded reinforcing bars is given in BA 40 (DMRB 1.3.4).
Failure to satisfy the fatigue requirements should not necessitate immediate remedial action. Management of the
structure may however be affected; for instance inspection frequency of the affected elements may be increased as
advised by the assessor.
4.8
Combined global and local effects
4.8.1
General. In addition to the assessment of individual primary and secondary elements to resist loading
applied directly to them, it is also necessary to include the loading combination(s) that produces the most adverse
effects due to global and local loading where these coexist in an element.
4.8.2
Analysis of structure. Analysis of the structure may be accomplished either by one overall analysis (e.g.
using finite elements) or by separate analyses for global and local effects. In the latter case the forces and moments
acting on the element from global and local effects must be combined as appropriate.
In order to take advantage of the beneficial effects of membrane action, methods of analysis which take account of
in-plane as well as flexural effects may be considered. See also 4.4.3.
4.8.2A Analysis of structure
Guidance on the use of compressive membrane action for the assessment of bridge deck slabs is given in BD 81
(DMRB 3.4.20).
4.8.3
Analysis of section. Section analysis for combined global and local effects must be carried out in
accordance with 4.5 to satisfy the requirements of 4.1.
(a)
Serviceability Limit State
(1)
For reinforced concrete elements, if a crack width check is required by the Overseeing Organisation, the
total crack width due to combined global and local effects will be determined in accordance with 5.8.8.2.
August 2015
A/25
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
(2)
For prestressed concrete elements, coexistent stresses, acting in the direction of prestress, may be added
algebraically in checking the stress limitations.
(b)
Ultimate Limit State: The resistance of the section to the combination of local and global effects must
be checked using the assumptions given in 5.3.2.1 or 6.3.3.1 as appropriate allowing for any axial force.
However, in the case of a deck slab, the resistance to combined global and local effects is deemed to be
satisfactory if the axial force from the global effects is checked separately from the resistance to local
moments.
5.
ASSESSMENT: REINFORCED CONCRETE
5.1 General
5.1.1 Introduction. This clause gives methods of assessment which will in general ensure that, for reinforced
concrete structures, the requirements set out in 4.1 are met.
5.1.2 Limit state assessment of reinforced concrete. Clause 5 follows the limit state philosophy set out in
3.1B to 3.6B.
5.1.3 Loads. In clause 5 the assessment load effects (see 2.1) for the ultimate and serviceability limit states are
referred to as ultimate loads and service loads respectively. The values of the loads to be used in assessment are
derived from 4.2. When analysing sections, the terms strength, resistance and capacity are used to describe the
assessment resistance of the section (see also BD 21, DMRB 3.4.3).
5.1.4
Strength of materials
5.1.4.1
Definition of strengths. Throughout clause 5 the symbol fcu represents either the characteristic
or the worst credible cube strength of concrete, and the symbol fy represents either the characteristic or the worst
credible reinforcement strength.
5.1.4.2
Strength of concrete. Assessment may be based on either the specified characteristic cube strength,
or the worst credible cube strength assessed as the lower bound to the estimated in situ cube strength determined in
accordance with 2.4B to 2.11B. For structures designed to codes prior to the adoption of the term characteristic
strength, the concrete strength was specified in terms of the minimum 28 day works cube strength. For the purpose
of assessment, the characteristic strength of concrete may be taken as the minimum 28 day works cube strength.
5.1.4.3 Strength of reinforcement. Assessment must be based on either the specified characteristic yield or
proof stress, or the worst credible yield or proof stress assessed from tests on reinforcement samples extracted
from the structure. For structures designed to codes prior to the adoption of the term characteristic strength, the
reinforcement strength was specified in terms of the guaranteed yield strength. For the purpose of assessment, the
characteristic strength of reinforcement may be taken as the guaranteed yield strength.
5.2
Structures and structural frames
5.2.1
Analysis of structures. Structures must be analysed in accordance with the requirements of 4.4.
5.2.2 Redistribution of moments. Redistribution of moments obtained by rigorous elastic analysis under the
ultimate limit state may be carried out provided all of the following conditions are met:
(a)
A/26
Checks are made to ensure that adequate rotation capacity exists at sections where moments are reduced,
making reference to appropriate test data. In the absence of a special investigation, the plastic rotation
capacity may be taken as the lesser of:
August 2015
are met:
(a)
are 4made to ensure that adequate rotation capacity exists at sections where
VolumeChecks
3 Section
Appendix A
Part 14moments
BD 44/15are reduced, making reference to appropriate test data. In the absenceAmendments
of a special to BS 5400-4
investigation, the plastic rotation capacity may be taken as the lesser of:
1)
0.008 + 0.035 (0.5 - d / d )
1)
0.008 + 0.035 (0.5 - dcc / dee )
or
or
0.6

d dc
2)
2)
where
where
dc
de

d
(b)
(b)
(c)
(c)
but not
but not less
thanless
0 than 0
is the calculated depth of concrete in compression at the ultimate limit state;

dc
is the effective
for a solid
or rectangular
beam,
otherwise
overall depth of the
isdthe
calculated
depthdepth
of concrete
in slab
compression
at the
ultimate
limitthe
state;
e
compression
flange;
is the effective depth for a solid slab or rectangular beam, otherwise the overall depth
is the diameterflange;
of the smallest tensile reinforcing bar;
off the compression
d
is the effective depth to tension reinforcement.
is the diameter of the smallest tensile reinforcing bar;

Proper account is taken of changes in transverse moments and transverse shears consequent on
redistribution of longitudinal moments.
Proper account is taken of changes in transverse moments and transverse shears

consequent
onreactions
redistribution
longitudinal
Shears and
used inofassessment
aremoments.
taken as those calculated either prior to, or after
redistribution, whichever are the greater.
Shears and reactions used in assessment are taken as those calculated either prior to, or
after redistribution,
whichever
the greater.
As an alternative
to the approach
in theare
previous
paragraph, a linear elastic analysis with limited moment
redistribution under the ultimate limit states may be carried out, without explicit checks done on the rotation
capacity,
in accordance
5.5 of in
BSthe
ENprevious
1992-2 and
the accompanying
5.5 ofanalysis
BS EN 1992-1-1,
provided the
As
an alternative
to thewith
approach
paragraph,
a linear elastic
with limited
conditions
and limitations
contained
thereinlimit
are met.
moment
redistribution
under
the ultimate
states may be carried out, without explicit checks
Criterion (d) of BS 5400-4 has been omitted. The BS 5400-4 criterion (d) limited moment redistribution to
members up to about
members up to 1.2m deep, whereas the available test data (11) on rotation capacity only cover
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
0.8m deep. In view of the fact that BS 5400-4 limits moment redistribution to members of a certain depth whilst
permitting plastic methods to be applied to members of any depth, and given that criterion (a) requires either a
special investigation or the adoption of conservative formulae, 1) and 2), for rotation capacity, it is not considered
necessary by the Overseeing Organisation to include also a specific limitation on depth.
In BS EN 1992-2 and BS EN 1992-1-1 a clear distinction is made between the conditions and limitations for
performing a linear analysis with limited moment redistribution and plastic analysis. Provided the requirements
in 5.5 of BS EN 1992-2 and 5.5 of BS EN 1992-1-1 are met, ultimate limit state analysis with limited moment
redistribution may be performed without explicitly checking the rotation capacity. Further restrictions on ductility
and rotation capacity are generally necessary when a plastic analysis is performed.
5.3 Beams
5.3.1
General
5.3.1.1 Effective span. The effective span of a simply-supported member must be taken as the smaller of:
(a)
the distance between the centres of bearings or other supports;
(b)
the clear distance between supports plus the effective depth;
August 2015
A/27
Appendix A
(c)
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
for members resting directly on masonry, concrete or brick, the distance between the centroids of the
bearing pressure diagrams. In this case, the bearing pressure diagrams must be determined by assuming
that the reaction is distributed linearly from a maximum at the front edge of the support to zero at the
back of the bearing area. The length of the bearing area must not be taken as greater than the depth of the
beam where the support is of soft brick, or one-quarter of the depth of the beam where the support is of
hard material such as granite or concrete.
The effective span of a member framing into supporting members must be taken as the distance between the shear
centres of the supporting members.
The effective span of a continuous member must be taken as the distance between centres of supports except where,
in the case of beams on wide columns, the effect of column width is included in the analysis.
The effective length of a cantilever must be taken as its length from the face of the support plus half its effective
depth except where it is an extension of a continuous beam when the length to the centre of the support must be
used.
5.3.1.2 Effective width of flanged beams. In analysing structures, the full width of flanges may be taken as
effective.
In analysing sections at the serviceability limit state, and in the absence of any more accurate determination, the
effective flange width must be taken as the width of the web plus one-tenth of the distance between the points of
zero moment (or the actual width of the outstand if this is less) on each side of the web. For a continuous beam the
points of zero moment may be taken to be at a distance of 0.15 times the effective span from the support.
In analysing sections at the ultimate limit state the full width of the flanges may be taken as effective.
5.3.1.3 Slenderness limits for beams. A simply-supported or continuous beam is considered to have adequate
lateral stability when the clear distance between lateral restraints does not exceed 300 bc/d, where d is the effective
depth to tension reinforcement and bc is the breadth of the compression face of the beam midway between
restraints.
A cantilever with lateral restraint provided only at the support is considered to have adequate lateral stability when
the clear distance from the end of the cantilever to the face of the support does not exceed 150 bc/d.
Beams outside these limits, require additional analysis and calculation to demonstrate their stability.
5.3.1.3A Slenderness limits for beams
BS 5400-4 gives two limits: one a function of bc, and the other a function of bc2/d. According to reference (12), the
first limit is not a major parameter, and the second limit is conservative. The assessment limits on bc2/d are obtained
by dividing the value in reference (12) by a partial safety factor of 1.5.
5.3.2
Resistance moment of beams
5.3.2.1 Analysis of sections. When analysing a cross-section to determine its ultimate moment of resistance, the
following assumptions must be made:
(a)
A/28
The strain distribution in the concrete in compression and the strains in the reinforcement, whether in
tension or compression, are derived from the assumption that plane sections remain plane.
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Appendix
Volume 33curve
Section
Appendix
A
Volume
444
(b)
TheA
in Figure
1
Appendix
Astresses in the concrete in compression are either derived from the stress-strain
Volume 3 Section
Section
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
Amendments
to
BS
Part
14
44/XX
with the
in flanged,
Amendments
to appropriate
BS 5400-4
5400-4 value of mc given in 4.3.3.3 or, in the case of rectangular
Partsections
14 BD
BDand
44/XX
ribbed and voided sections where the neutral axis lies within the flange, the compressive stress may be
taken as equal to 0.6 fcu/mc over the whole compression zone. In both cases the strain at the outermost
(d)
stresses
the
are
are
(d)
The
stresses
in
the
reinforcement
are
derived
from
4.3.2.2.
The
values
of
are given
given in
in
ms
compression
at failure is taken
0.0035.from
(d) The
The
stresses in
infibre
the reinforcement
reinforcement
areasderived
derived
from 4.3.2.2.
4.3.2.2. The
The values
values of
of ms
ms are given in
4.3.3.3.
4.3.3.3.
4.3.3.3.
(c)
The tensile strength of concrete is ignored.
In
In
the
analysis
of
cross-section
of
beam
that
has
to
resist
small
axial
thrust,
the
effect
of
the
In the
the analysis
analysis of
of aaa cross-section
cross-section of
of aaa beam
beam that
that has
has to
to resist
resist aaa small
small axial
axial thrust,
thrust, the
the effect
effect of
of the
the
ultimate
axial
force
may
be
ignored
if
it
does
not
exceed
0.1
f
times
the
cross-sectional
area.
are
given
in
4.3.3.3.
The
stresses
in
the
reinforcement
are
derived
from
4.3.2.2.
The
values
of
(d)
cu
ultimate
axial
force
may
be
ignored
if
it
does
not
exceed
0.1
f
times
the
cross-sectional
area.
cu
ms
ultimate axial force may be ignored if it does not exceed 0.1 fcu times the cross-sectional
area.
In5.3.2.1A
the analysis
of a cross-section
of a beam that has to resist a small axial thrust, the effect of the ultimate axial
5.3.2.1A
Analysis
of
sections
5.3.2.1A Analysis
Analysis of
of sections
sections
timesthe
thefailure
cross-sectional
force
be ignored
it doescurve
not exceed
0.1 f1
The
concrete
stress
in
strain
0.0035
The may
concrete
stressifstrain
strain
curve
in Figure
Figure
1cu and
and
the
failure
strain of
ofarea.
0.0035 are
are appropriate
appropriate to
to
The concrete stress strain curve in Figure 1 and the failure strain of 0.0035 are appropriate to
unbound
concrete.
Higher
unbound
concrete.
Higher
failure
stresses
and
strains
are
achieved
when
the
concrete
is
unboundAnalysis
concrete.
Higher failure
failure stresses
stresses and
and strains
strains are
are achieved
achieved when
when the
the concrete
concrete is
is
of
sections
5.3.2.1A
laterally
restrained
by
helical
binding
or,
to
a
lesser
extent,
by
conventional
links.
If
the
laterally
laterally restrained
restrained by
by helical
helical binding
binding or,
or, to
to aa lesser
lesser extent,
extent, by
by conventional
conventional links.
links. If
If the
the
ultimate
strength
of
is
by
of
compression
zone
and
ultimate
strength
of
member
is
governed
by
failure
of
the
concrete
compression
zone
and
if
ultimate
strength
of aaa member
member
is governed
governed
by failure
failure
of the
theofconcrete
concrete
compression
zone
and if
ifconcrete.
The
concrete
stress
strain
curve
in
Figure
1
and
the
failure
strain
0.0035
are
appropriate
to
unbound
the
member
marginally
fails
an
assessment
using
the
unbound
stress-strain
curve,
it
would
be
the
member
marginally
fails
an
assessment
using
the
unbound
stress-strain
curve,
it
would
be
the
member
marginally
fails
an
assessment
using
the
unbound
stress-strain
curve,
it
would
be
Higher failure stresses and strains are achieved when the concrete is laterally restrained by helical binding or, to
advisable
to
for
effects
of
or
binding.
Appropriate
guidance
to
allow
for
the
enhancing
effects
of
links
or
helical
binding.
Appropriate
guidance
advisable
to allow
allow
for the
the enhancing
enhancing
effects
of links
links
or helical
helical
binding.
Appropriate
guidance
a advisable
lesser extent,
by conventional
links.(13)
If the
ultimate
strength
of a member
is governed
by failure
of the concrete
(14)
(13)
(14)
can
be
obtained
from
references
and
.
(13)
(14)
can
be
obtained
from
references
and
.
can
be
obtained
from
references
and
.
compression zone and if the member marginally fails an assessment using the unbound stress-strain curve, it would
be advisable to allow for the enhancing effects of links or helical binding. Appropriate guidance can be obtained
The
BS
to
(13)requirement
The
BS
5400-4
requirement
to
check
the
steel
strain
and
the
provision
of
an
alternative
and (14).
from
Thereferences
BS 5400-4
5400-4
requirement
to check
check the
the steel
steel strain
strain and
and the
the provision
provision of
of an
an alternative
alternative
method
method
of
analysis
are
not
relevant
to
assessment.
However,
it
should
be
remembered
that
if
method of
of analysis
analysis are
are not
not relevant
relevant to
to assessment.
assessment. However,
However, it
it should
should be
be remembered
remembered that
that if
if
the
section
is
over-reinforced
it
could
fail
in
a
brittle
mode
with
little
warning.
theBS
section
is
over-reinforced
it
fail
in
with
little
warning.
The
5400-4
to check
the steel
and themode
provision
an alternative
the
section
is requirement
over-reinforced
it could
could
failstrain
in aa brittle
brittle
mode
withof
little
warning. method of analysis are not
relevant to assessment. However, it should be remembered that if the section is over-reinforced it could fail in a
5.3.2.2
charts.
brittle
mode with Design
little warning.
5.3.2.2
Design
charts.
Not
applicable
to
assessment
5.3.2.2
Design
charts. Not
Not applicable
applicable to
to assessment
assessment
5.3.2.2
Not applicable
toProvided
assessment
5.3.2.3
Assessment
formulae.
5.3.2.3 Design charts.
Assessment
formulae.
that
the
amount
of
redistribution
of
the
elastic
5.3.2.3
Assessment
formulae. Provided
Provided that
that the
the amount
amount of
of redistribution
redistribution of
of the
the elastic
elastic
ultimate
ultimate moments
moments has
has been
been less
less than
than 10%,
10%, the
the formulae
formulae below
below may
may be
be used
used to
to calculate
calculate the
the
ultimateAssessment
moments has
been lessProvided
than 10%,
the
formulae
may be used
calculate
the moments has
5.3.2.3
formulae.
that
the
amount
ofbelow
redistribution
ofa flanged
thetoelastic
ultimate
ultimate
moment
of
resistance
of
aaa solid
slab
or
rectangular
beam,
or
of
beam,
ribbed
ultimate
moment
of
resistance
of
solid
slab
or
rectangular
beam,
or
of
aa flanged
beam,
ribbed
ultimate
moment
of
resistance
of
solid
slab
or
rectangular
beam,
or
of
flanged
beam,
ribbedof a solid slab
been
less
than 10%,
the
formulae
belowaxis
maylies
be used
to calculate
the
ultimate
moment
ofcompression.
resistance
slab
or
voided
slab
when
the
neutral
within
the
flange
and
the
flange
is
in
slab
or
voided
slab
when
the
neutral
axis
lies
within
the
flange
and
the
flange
is
in
compression.
or voided
slab or
when
neutral
axisribbed
lies within
flange
and
the the
flange
is inaxis
compression.
orslab
rectangular
beam,
of a the
flanged
beam,
slabthe
orthe
voided
slab
when
neutral
lies within the flange
For
flanged
beams
where
the
flange
is
in
tension
formulae
below
may
be
used
without
For
flanged
beams
where
the
flange
is
in
tension
the
formulae
below
may
be
used
without
For
flanged
beams
where
the
flange
is
in
tension
the
formulae
below
may
be
used
without
and
the
flange
is
in
compression.
For
flanged
beams
where
the
flange
is
in
tension
the
formulae
below may be used
limitation
on
neutral
axis
For
without
compression
reinforcement
the
ultimate
limitation
on
the
neutral
axis
depth.
For
sections
without
compression
reinforcement
the
ultimate
limitation
on the
theon
neutral
axis depth.
depth.
For sections
sections
without
compression
reinforcement
thethe
ultimate
without
limitation
the neutral
axis depth.
For sections
without
compression
reinforcement
ultimate moment
moment
of
resistance
may
be
taken
as
the
lesser
of
the
values
obtained
from
Equations
111 and
2.
moment
of
resistance
may
be
taken
as
the
lesser
of
the
values
obtained
from
Equations
and
moment
of
resistance
may
be
taken
as
the
lesser
of
the
values
obtained
from
Equations
and
2.
of resistance may be taken as the lesser of the values obtained from Equations 1 and 2. Equations 3 2.
and 4 may
Equations
3
and
4
may
be
used
for
sections
with
compression
reinforcement.
A
rectangular
stress
Equations
3
and
4
may
be
used
for
sections
with
compression
reinforcement.
A
rectangular
stress
3 and 4 with
maycompression
be used for sections
with compression
rectangular
stress
beEquations
used for sections
reinforcement.
A rectangularreinforcement.
stress block of A
maximum
depth
0.5d and a
block
maximum
depth
0.5d
aaa uniform
compression
stress
of
0.6f
/
has
been
assumed.
cu
mc
block
of
maximum
depth
0.5d
and
uniform
compression
stress
of
0.6f
/
has
been
assumed.
cu
mc
/
has
been
assumed.
uniform
compression
0.6fand
block of
of
maximum stress
depth of
0.5d
and
uniform
compression
stress
of
0.6f
/
has
been
assumed.
cu mc
cu mc

M
M
M uuu
=
=
=
((( ff yy /// ms
)) A
Ass zz
ms ) As z
y ms
M
M
M uuu
=
=
=
22
((( 000...225
/// mc
)bd
2
225
)bd
225 fff cu
)bd
mc
cu
mc
cu
M
M
M uuu
=
=
=
((( fff yy /// ms

)) A
Ass
ms
ms ) As
y
Equation 1
11
Equation
Equation Equation
1
222
Equation
Equation Equation
2
Equation
((( 000...666 fff cu

// mc )bx(d
)bx(d -- 00..55 x)
x) +
+ ff sA'
(d -- dd ))
A' s (d
cu
mc )bx(d - 0.5 x) + f ss A' ss (d - d )
cu / mc
333
Equation Equation
3
Equation
Equation
((( 000...666 fff cu

// mc )bx
)bx +
+ ff s A
A'' s
cu
mc )bx + f ss A' ss
cu / mc
444
Equation Equation
4
Equation
Equation
=
=
=
where
where
where
where
Mu
uu
M
AM
M
s u
A
s
A'A
As ss
A
b A
Asss
is the ultimate resistance moment;

is
resistance
moment;
is
the
ultimate
resistance
moment;
is the
areaultimate
of tension
reinforcement;
is the
the
ultimate
resistance
moment;
is
the
area
of
tension
reinforcement;
is
of
is the
areaarea
of compression
reinforcement;
is the
the
area
of tension
tension reinforcement;
reinforcement;
is
area
reinforcement;
is
the
area
of
compression
reinforcement;
is the
width
of of
thecompression
section in compression,
at the level of the neutral axis;
is the
the
area
of
compression
reinforcement;
bbb
is
is
the
width
of
the
section
in
compression,
at
the
level
of
the
neutral
axis;
is the
the width
width of
of the
the section
section in
in compression,
compression, at
at the
the level
level of
of the
the neutral
neutral axis;
axis;
ddd
is
the
effective
depth
to
the
tension
reinforcement;
is
the
effective
depth
to
the
tension
reinforcement;
is the effective depth to the tension reinforcement;
d'
is
d'
is
the
depth
to
the
compression
reinforcement;
August
2015
d'
is the
the depth
depth to
to the
the compression
compression reinforcement;
reinforcement;
fffyy
is
the
characteristic,
or
worst
credible
is
the
characteristic,
or
worst
credible
strength,
of
the
reinforcement;
is the characteristic, or worst credible strength,
strength, of
of the
the reinforcement;
reinforcement;
y
A/29
Appendix A
Appendix Ato BS 5400-4
Amendments
Appendix A
Appendix A
d f is the
effective
tension reinforcement;
is equal
to fdepth
/(msto+the
fy/2000);
s
is equal
to the
fyy/(compression
d' fs is the
depth to
reinforcement;
ms + fy/2000);
x
is the neutral axis depth;
is
the
neutral
axis
depth;
fy x
is
the
characteristic,
or
worst
credible
strength, of the reinforcement;
to farm;
y/(ms + fy/2000);
zfs
is equal
the lever
fy/(ms
+ fy/2000);
fzs is equal
is thetoneutral
lever
arm;
axis depth;
fx is the
is the
characteristic,
or worst credible strength, of the concrete;
x fcu
neutral
axis
depth; or worst credible strength, of the concrete;
is
the
characteristic,
cu
z , ms is
arm;partial safety factors given in 4.3.3.3.
arethe
thelever
material
lever
arm;
z mc
arethe
thecharacteristic,
material
partial
safety credible
factors given
in 4.3.3.3.
mc , is
msthe
f
is
or worst
strength,
of the concrete;
cu
fcu is the characteristic, or worst credible strength, of the concrete;
mc, lever
the
material
partial
factors
in 4.3.3.3.
ms
The
arm,
z, in Equation
1safety
may
be
calculated
from
the equation:
mc
areare
the
material
partial
safety
factors
givengiven
in 4.3.3.3.
, ms
The
lever
arm,
z, in Equation
1 may
be calculated
from the equation:
Thelever
leverarm,
arm,
Equation
1 may
be calculated
the equation:
0.84(1fmay
)calculated
The
z, z,
in in
Equation
fromfrom
the equation:
ms
yy / be
ms Ass
z = [1 - 0.84( f y / ms ) As ]d
z = [1 - ( f / )bd ]d
mc
cuf/ /mc
( f cu
)bd
0.84(
) As
ms
cu y mc
]d
z = [1
(
/
)bd
f

mc
cu
The value z should not be taken as greater than 0.95d.
The value z should not be taken as greater than 0.95d.
Volume 3 Section 4
Volume 3 Section
4 BD 44/15
Part 14
Volume 3 Section
4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Equation 5
Equation 5
Equation 5Equation 5
The
value
z should
notnot
be 3
taken
greater
thanthan
0.95d.
The
value
z should
be
taken
as sections
greater
0.95d.
When
using
Equations
and
4asfor
with
compression reinforcement the neutral axis
When
When using
using Equations
Equations 33 and
and 44 for
for sections
sections with
with compression
compression reinforcement
reinforcement the
the neutral
neutral axis
axis
depth x must first be calculated from Equation 4.
depth
xusing
must
first be 3calculated
from
Equation
When
Equations
and 4 for sections
with compression
reinforcement the neutral axis depth x must first be
Whenusing
Equations
3 and 4 for
sections
with4.compression
reinforcement the neutral axis
calculated from Equation 4.
depth
must first
from Equation
4. must be determined from Equation 3.
If
d' < x0.429x
thenbe
thecalculated
ultimate resistance
moment
If d' < 0.429x then the ultimate resistance moment must be determined from Equation 3.
If d' < 0.429x then the ultimate resistance moment must be determined from Equation 3.
< 0.429x then either

the ultimate
resistance moment
must
be determined
Equation
If d' >
the compression
steel must
be ignored
and thefrom
section
treated3.as singly
If d' > 0.429x then either the compression steel must be ignored and the section treated as singly
the either
ultimate
determined
5.3.2.1.
Ifreinforced
d' > 0.429xor
the resistance
compression
steel mustusing
be ignored
and the section treated as singly reinforced or the
reinforced
orthen
the
ultimate
resistance
determined
using
5.3.2.1.
If d' > 0.429x
then
either the
compression
ultimate
resistance
determined
using
5.3.2.1. steel must be ignored and the section treated as singly
reinforced
the ultimate
using 5.3.2.1.
For flangedorbeams,
whereresistance
the flangedetermined
is in compression,
but where the neutral axis extends below
For flanged beams, where the flange is in compression, but where the neutral axis extends below
For
is inresistance
compression,
but where
neutralasaxis
the bottom of the
theflanged
bottombeams,
of the where
flange,the
theflange
ultimate
moment
may the
be taken
theextends
lesser ofbelow
the values
the
bottom
ofbeams,
the resistance
flange,
the
ultimate
resistance
moment
may
bethe
taken
as the
lesser
of the values
For
flanged
where
the
flange
is
in
compression,
but
where
the
neutral
axis
extends
below
the
ultimate
moment
may
be
taken
as
the
lesser
of
values
given
by
Equations
6 and 7, where
flange,
given by Equations 6 and 7, where hf is the thickness of the flange:
is
the
thickness
of
the
flange:
given
by
Equations
6
and
7,
where
h
f
is the
thickness
the flange:
hfthe
bottom
of theofflange,
the ultimate resistance moment may be taken as the lesser of the values
given by Equations 6 and 7, where hfhisff the thickness of the flange:
(d h f )
6
M u = ( f / ms )) Ass (d

Equation 6Equation

2 )
Equation 6
M uu = ( f yyy / ms
ms As
h2f
)
Equation 6
M u = ( f y / ms ) As (d
2 h ff

= (0.6 f cu / mc
)
(d h f )
u
M
mc bh ff
Equation 7
M uu = (0.6 f cu
cu / mc ) bh f (d 2 )
h2f
)
Equation 7
M u = (0.6 f cu / mc ) bh f (d
5.3.2.3A
formulaeformulae
2
5.3.2.3AAssessment
Assessment
5.3.2.3A
Assessment formulae
BS 5400-4 has a limitation on the compressive stress in steel which it inherited from CP110. This
BS
5400-4
has
aAssessment
limitation
on
the
compressive
stress
in steel
which
it inherited
from
CP110.has
This
BS
has
a limitation
the
compressive
stress
ininsteel
which
itand
inherited
from
CP110.
5.3.2.3A
formulae
has5400-4
not been
justified
by on
tests
and
was abandoned
BS 8110-1
does not
appear
in This
BS EN not been
has
not
been
justified
by
tests
and
was
abandoned
in
BS
8110-1
and
does
not
appear
in
BS
EN
justified
by tests
was abandoned
BS 8110-1 and
does
not appear
EN 1992-1-1.
Therefore,
BS 5400-4
hasand
a limitation
on the in
compressive
stress
in steel
itBS
inherited
from CP110.
Thisthe
1992-1-1.
Therefore,
the restriction
on
steel compression
has which
been in
removed.
1992-1-1.
Therefore,
the
restriction
on
steel
compression
has
been
removed.
restriction
on
steel
compression
has
been
removed.
has not been justified by tests and was abandoned in BS 8110-1 and does not appear in BS EN
1992-1-1.
Therefore,
the restriction
Shear
resistance
of beams on steel compression has been removed.
Shear resistance
Shear
resistanceofofbeams
beams
5.3.3
5.3.3
5.3.3
5.3.3 Shear
resistance
of beams
5.3.3.1
ShearThe
stress.
The
shear
stress,
v, at any cross-section
must befrom:
calculated from:
shear
stress,
v, at
any cross-section
must be calculated
5.3.3.1
5.3.3.1 Shear stress.
Shear stress.
The
shear
stress,
v, at any cross-section
must be calculated from:
Shear
V stress. The shear stress, v, at any cross-section must be calculated from:
V
Equation 8
b ww dd
bVw
v =
Equation 8
where
bw d
where
where
V
is the shear force due to ultimate loads;
V is the
is the
shear
due
to ultimate
V where
shear
forceforce
due to
ultimate
loads;loads;
bw
is the breadth of the section which, for a flanged beam, must be taken as the rib width;
bVw is the
is the
breadth
ofsection
the
which,
for a flanged
beam,
the rib width;
breadth
of the
for a flanged
beam, must
bemust
takenbe
as taken
the ribas
width;
bw
shear
force
duesection
towhich,
ultimate
loads;
d
is the
effective
depth
to
tension
reinforcement.
d d is the
effective
depthdepth
to tension
reinforcement.
is
the
effective
to
tension
reinforcement.
bw
is the breadth of the section which, for a flanged beam, must be taken as the rib width;
d

5.3.3.1
vv
=
=
A/30
Chapter/Page
Chapter/Page
August 2015
Mmmm/yyyy
Mmmm/yyyy
Except
when
section
assessed
accordance
with
5.3.3.5,
shear
stress,
must
Except
when
thethe
section
is is
assessed
in in
accordance
with
5.3.3.5,
thethe
shear
stress,
v, v,
must
notnot
Except
Except when
when the
the section
section is
is assessed
assessed in
in accordance
accordance with
with 5.3.3.5,
5.3.3.5, the
the shear
shear stress,
stress, v,
v, must
must not
not
exceed:
exceed:
Appendix
Volume 3 Section 4
exceed:
exceed: A
Volume
3 Section
4 5400-4
Amendments
to BS
0
.
36
(
0
.
7
f cuff cu
250
Part 14 0BD
44/15
.36
(
0
.
7

/ 250
) f))cuff cu/ // mc mc
0.36 (0.7
// 250
0.36 (0.7 fcucu / 250) fcucu / mc

mc
Part 14 BD 44/XXAppendix A
Except
the
section
is assessed
infor
accordance
with
the
shear stress,
v,
must not
(where
mc
the
partial
safety
factor
concrete
given
in
4.3.3.3)
whatever
shear
reinforcement
(where
mcwhen
is is
thethe
partial
safety
factor
for
concrete
given
in5.3.3.5,
4.3.3.3)
whatever
shear
reinforcement
(where
partial
safety
factor
for
concrete
given
in
4.3.3.3)
whatever
shear
reinforcement
mc is
(where
is
the
partial
safety
factor
for
concrete
given
in
4.3.3.3)
whatever
shear
reinforcement
exceed:
mc the section is assessed in accordance with 5.3.3.5, the shear stress, v, must not exceed:
when
is
provided.
isExcept
provided.
is
is provided.
provided.
0situations
.36 (0.7where
where
f cu /significant
250
) f cu / axial
mc
In
some
significant
axial
compressive
forces
exist,
they
may
enhance
shear
In In
some
situations
compressive
forces
exist,
they
may
enhance
shear
some
situations
where
significant
axial
compressive
forces
exist,
they
may
enhance
shear
In
some
situations
where
significant
axialfor
compressive
forces
exist,
they
may
enhance
shear
capacity
(resistance).
This
may
be
allowed
for
in
assessment
e.g.
by
using
the
corresponding
capacity
(resistance).
This
may
be
allowed
in
assessment
e.g.
by
using
the
corresponding
capacity
(resistance).
This
may
be
allowed
for
in
assessment
e.g.
by
using
the
corresponding
(where
is
the
partial
safety
factor
for
concrete
given
in
4.3.3.3)
whatever
shear
reinforcement
is provided.
capacity
(resistance).
This
may
be
allowed
for
in
assessment
e.g.
by
using
the
corresponding
mc
(where
mc for
is for
the
partial safety
factor for concrete given in 4.3.3.3) whatever shear reinforcement
requirement
for
columns
in
5.5.6.
requirement
columns
inin
5.5.6.
requirement
columns
5.5.6.
requirement
is
provided. for columns in 5.5.6.
In some situations where significant axial compressive forces exist, they may enhance shear capacity (resistance).
In
haunched
beam,
the
component
of
the
flange
forces
perpendicular
to
the
longitudinal
InThis
a haunched
beam,
the
component
ofe.g.
thethe
flange
perpendicular
toto
thethe
longitudinal
In
aaamay
haunched
beam,
component
of
flange
forces
perpendicular
longitudinal
be allowed
forthe
in
assessment
by
usingforces
the
corresponding
requirement
for columns in 5.5.6.
In
haunched
beam,
the
component
of
the
flange
forces
perpendicular
to
the
longitudinal
In
some axis
situations
where
significant
axial
forces
exist,
theythe
may
enhance
shear
centroidal
axis
of
the
beam
calculated
from
an
elastic
section
analysis
under
the
relevant
load
centroidal
ofof
thethe
beam
calculated
from
ancompressive
elastic
section
analysis
under
relevant
load
centroidal
axis
beam
calculated
from
an
elastic
section
analysis
under
the
relevant
load
centroidal
axis
of
the
beam
calculated
from
an
elastic
section
analysis
under
the
relevant
load
capacity
(resistance).
This
may
be
allowed
for
in
assessment
e.g.
by
using
the
corresponding
case
may
be
subtracted
algebraically
from
the
applied
shear
force.
case
be subtracted
thethe
applied
shear
force. to the longitudinal centroidal axis of the
Incase
a may
haunched
thealgebraically
component
offrom
the
flange
perpendicular
may
subtracted
algebraically
from
applied
shear
case
may be
be beam,
subtracted
algebraically
from
the forces
applied
shear force.
force.
requirement
for
columns
in
5.5.6.
beam calculated from an elastic section analysis under the relevant load case may be subtracted algebraically from
5.3.3.1A
Shear
stress
5.3.3.1A
Shear
stress
the
applied shear
force.
5.3.3.1A
Shear
stress
5.3.3.1A
Shear
stress
In
a
haunched
beam,
the
component
of5400-4
the flange
forces
perpendicular
to the
longitudinal
The
upper
limit
to
shear
stress
in
BS
5400-4
is
known
to
be
conservative
and
the
increased
The
upper
limit
to
shear
stress
inin
BSBS
5400-4
is is
known
toto
bebe
conservative
and
thethe
increased
The
upper
limit
to
shear
stress
known
conservative
and
increased
(5)
The
upper
limit
to
shear
stress
in
BS
5400-4
is
known
to
be
conservative
and
the
increased
(5)
(5)
centroidal
axis
of
the
beam
calculated
from
an
elastic
section
analysis
under
the
relevant
load
5.3.3.1A
Shear
stress
limit
here
is
based
on
plasticity
theory
,
which
is
the
basis
of
the
varying
angle
truss
limit
here
is is
based
onon
plasticity
theory
,(5)which
is is
thethe
basis
ofof
thethe
varying
angle
truss
limit
here
based
plasticity
theory
,
which
basis
varying
angle
truss
limit
here
is
based
on
plasticity
theory
,
which
is
the
basis
of
the
varying
angle
truss
case
mayofbe
algebraically
the
appliedmethod
shear
force.
approach
of
BS
EN
1992-1-1
given
as
an
alternative
method
given
in
5.3.3.5.
However,
the
approach
BSsubtracted
EN
1992-1-1
given
asfrom
anan
alternative
given
inin
5.3.3.5.
However,
thethe
approach
of
BS
EN
1992-1-1
given
as
alternative
method
given
5.3.3.5.
However,
approach
of
BS
EN
1992-1-1
given
as
an
alternative
method
given
in
5.3.3.5.
However,
The
upper
limit
to
shear
stress
in
BS
5400-4
is
known
to
be
conservative
and
the
increased
limit
here
0..36
36
7
f cuff cu
/ 250
250
is
more
conservative
than
that
in the is based
maximum
shear
limit
of0.36
(0((.700..
/ 250
) f))cuff cu/ // mc mcis is
more
conservative
than
that
inin
maximum
shear
limit
ofof
0
7
/
more
conservative
than
that
maximum
shear
limit
(5), which
.36the(0basis
.7 of
fcucuthe
/ 250
) fcucu angle
/ mc
is more
conservative
than
that ingiven as an
maximum
shearShear
limit
of 0is
varying
approach
of BS EN
1992-1-1
on
plasticity theory
mc truss
5.3.3.1A
stress
5.3.3.5,
so
sections
which
do
not
satisfy
this
maximum
to
5.3.3.1
may
still
have
adequate
5.3.3.5,
so
sections
which
do
not
satisfy
this
maximum
to
5.3.3.1
may
still
have
adequate
5.3.3.5,
so
sections
which
do
not
satisfy
this
maximum
to
5.3.3.1
may
still
have
adequate
fcu adequate
/ increased
250) fcu / mc is more
alternative
method
given
in 5.3.3.5.
However,
the is
maximum
shear
limit of
0.36still
(0.7
the
5.3.3.5,
sections
which
do sufficient
not
satisfy
this
maximum
tolongitudinal
may
have
The
upper
limit
to
stress
in
BS
5400-4
known
to
be5.3.3.1
conservative
and
strength
to
5.3.3.5
if
they
have
sufficient
transverse
and
reinforcement.
strength
toso
5.3.3.5
if shear
they
have
transverse
and
longitudinal
reinforcement.
(5)
strength
to
5.3.3.5
if
they
have
sufficient
transverse
and
longitudinal
reinforcement.
conservative
than
that
in
5.3.3.5,
so
sections
which
do
not
satisfy
this
maximum
to
5.3.3.1
may still have adequate
strength
if they
have sufficient
andbasis
longitudinal
reinforcement.
limit
heretois5.3.3.5
based on
plasticity
theory ,transverse
which is the
of the varying
angle truss
strength
to
5.3.3.5
if
they
have
sufficient
transverse
and
longitudinal
reinforcement.
approach
of BSinEN
1992-1-1
given
as anforalternative
method
given
ingenerally
5.3.3.5.
However,
the
The
sub-clauses
in
BS
5400-4
are
written
for
prismatic
beams
and
are
generally
conservative
The
sub-clauses
BSBS
5400-4
are
written
prismatic
beams
and
areare
conservative
The
sub-clauses
in
5400-4
are
written
for
prismatic
beams
and
generally
conservative
The
sub-clauses
inThis
BS
5400-4
written
for
and
are
generally
conservative
0.36 (0are
.7allows
allows
f cu / advantage
250
)prismatic
f cu / tomcto
isbe
more
conservative
than
that in ofof
maximum
shear
limit
of
for
haunched
ones.
This
sub-clause
advantage
taken
of
the
vertical
component
for
haunched
ones.
sub-clause
bebeams
taken
the
vertical
component
The
sub-clauses
in BS
5400-4
are written
for prismatic
beams
and
are of
generally
conservative
for haunched
for
haunched
ones.
This
sub-clause
allows
advantage
to
be
taken
of
the
vertical
component
of
for
haunched
ones.
This
sub-clause
allows
advantage
to
be
taken
of
the
vertical
component
of
5.3.3.5,
so
sections
which
do
not
satisfy
this
maximum
to
5.3.3.1
may
still
have
adequate
flange
forces
in
these.
If
three
dimensional
finite
element
models
are
used
for
box
beams,
the
flange
forces
in
these.
If
three
dimensional
finite
element
models
are
used
for
box
beams,
the
This
ones.
sub-clause
allows
advantage
to
be
taken
of
the
vertical
component
of
flange
forces
in
these.
If three
flange
forces
in
these.
If
three
dimensional
finite
element
models
are
used
for
box
beams,
the
flange
forces
inthe
these.
If three
dimensional
finitehave
element
models
are
used
for box beams, the
strength
to
5.3.3.5
if
they
have
sufficient
transverse
and
longitudinal
reinforcement.
web
shears
from
the
computer
model
will
already
have
the
flange
forces
subtracted.
web
shears
from
computer
model
will
already
the
flange
forces
subtracted.
dimensional
finite
element
models
are
used
for
box
beams,
the
web
shears
from
the
computer
model
will
already
web
shears
from
the
computer
model
will
already
have
the
flange
forces
subtracted.
web
shears
from
the
computer
model
will
already
have
the
flange
forces
subtracted.
have the flange forces subtracted.
The
sub-clauses
in BS
5400-4 are written for prismatic beams and are generally conservative
5.3.3.2
Shear
capacity
5.3.3.2
Shear
capacity
5.3.3.2
Shear
capacity
5.3.3.2
Shear
capacity
Shear ones.
capacity
5.3.3.2
for
haunched
This
sub-clause allows advantage to be taken of the vertical component of
flange
forces
inshear
these.
If three dimensional
finite
element
models
are used
box
beams,
the
Sections
without
shear
reinforcement:
In
the
absence
of
shear
reinforcement,
the
ultimate
shear
Sections
without
reinforcement:
InIn
thethe
absence
ofof
shear
reinforcement,
thefor
ultimate
shear
Sections
without
shear
reinforcement:
absence
shear
reinforcement,
the
ultimate
shear
Sections
without
shear
reinforcement:
In
the
absence
of
shear
reinforcement,
the
ultimate
shear
Sections
without
shear
reinforcement:
In
the
absence
of
shear
reinforcement,
the
ultimate
shear
resistance
Vu of a
web
shears
from
the
computer
model
will
already
have
the
flange
forces
subtracted.
of
a
section
is
given
by:
resistance
V
is given
by:
resistance
VuVof
u a section
resistance
of
section is
is given
given by:
by:
resistance
Vuu of
section
is given
by:aa section
5.3.3.2V uV u = =
= Shear
svs c vbccapacity
wbdw d
V
V uu = ss vvcc bbww dd
Sections
without
shear
is
given
by: In the absence of shear reinforcement, the ultimate shear
where
the
depth
factor
sisreinforcement:
isssgiven
given
by:by:
where
the
depth
factor
where
the
depth
factor
x
by:
is
given
where
the
depth
factor
s
s is given by:
where the V
depth
section
resistance
u of afactor

500
500
but
not
less
than
0.7.
500)0.25
but
not
less
than
0.7.
not
less
than
0.7.
sV
d but
25
vc )b))00w..25
but
not
less
than
0.7.
ssu = ( (((ds500
but
not
less
than
0.7.
d
s
d
0.25
d in in
The
ultimate
shear
stress
concrete
The
ultimate
shear
stress
concrete
vcvvis:
c is:
The
ultimate
shear
stress
concrete
is:
The
ultimate
shear
stress
in
concrete
vcc is:
The
ultimate
shear
stress
concrete
vc is:
is given
by:
where the depth factor ins in
0.24
24100
100
0.24
A1ss/)311// 33 ( 1 /)311// 33 (but see 5.3.3.2A)
AsA
= 00.500
( 100
) ( f f) (but
seesee
5.3.3.2A)
(
.
24
100
v
v
c ==
cv
0.25 As ) 1 / 3 ( cuf cu ) 1 / 3 (but
(but
5.3.3.2A)
(

c
) not
) than
(butsee
see5.3.3.2A)
5.3.3.2A)
=
(
( f cuculess
d

0.7.
vcs (mv mv b)wbbdww d but
mv
mv
bw d
d
The ultimate shear stress in concrete vc is:
Ass should not be taken less than 0.15 or greater than 3.0, and the partial safety factor for
where
the
term
( 100
where
the
term
100AsA
should
taken
less
than
0.15
greater
than
3.0,
and
partial
where
the
term
( 100
notnot
bebe
taken
less
than
0.15
oror
greater
than
3.0,
and
thethe
partial
A)s should
(
where
the
term
))) should
where the term ( 100
should not
not be
be taken
taken less
less than
than 0.15
0.15 or
or greater
greater than
than 3.0,
3.0, and
and the
the partial
partial
bdww dd100
wb
0.b24
As )1 / 3 ( )1 / 3 (but see 5.3.3.2A)
d
b
w
=
(
f
visc taken
from
4A.
shear
factor
cu Table
safety
factor
shear
is
taken
from
4A.
safety
forfor
shear
Table
is is
taken
from
Table
4A.
mv
mv
mv
safety
mv
taken
mv
wd
safety factor
factor for
for shear
shear
taken from
from Table
Table 4A.
4A.
mvbis
The term As is the area of longitudinal tension reinforcement that continues at least a distance equal to the effective
A
depth, d, beyond the section
considered. At supports the area of longitudinal tension reinforcement that continues
where the term ( 100 s being
) should
not be taken less than 0.15 or greater than 3.0, and the partial
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
up
to
the
support
may
be
used,
appropriately
reduced in accordance with 5.8.7 when thereChapter/Page
isChapter/Page
insufficient anchorage at
Mmmm/yyyy
b
wd
Mmmm/yyyy
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
safety factor for shear mv is taken from Table 4A.
August 2015
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
A/31
The term
Aseffective
is the area
of longitudinal
tension
reinforcement
that continues
at least
distance
equal
to the
depth,
d, beyond the
section
being considered.
At supports
theaarea
of
equal
to
the
effective
depth,
d,
beyond
the
section
being
considered.
At
supports
the
area
of
The term As tension
is the area
of longitudinal
reinforcement
that continues
at least
a distance
longitudinal
reinforcement
thattension
continues
up to the support
may be used,
appropriately
longitudinal
tension reinforcement
thatthe
continues
up
to the
support
may
be
used, the
appropriately
equal
to in
the
effective
depth,
d, beyond
section
being
considered.
Atatsupports
area both
ofVolume
reduced
with 5.8.7
when
there
is insufficient
anchorage
support.
Where
top 3 Section 4
Appendix
A accordance
reduced
in
accordance
with
5.8.7
when
there
is
insufficient
anchorage
at
support.
Where
both
top
longitudinal
tension
reinforcement
that
continues
up
to
the
support
may
be
used,
appropriately
used
must
be
that
which
is
in
tension
and
bottom
reinforcement
are
provided,
the
area
of
A
s
Part 14 BD 44/15
must be that
is Where
in tension
and bottom
reinforcement
are
provided,
the force
area
ofbeing
As used
reduced
accordance
5.8.7
when
there
is insufficient
anchorage
at which
support.
both top
under
theinloading
whichwith
produces
the shear
considered.
under
the
loading
which
produces
the
shear
force
being
considered.
and bottom reinforcement are provided, the area of As used must be that which is in tension
under the
loading
the
shear
force
being considered.
Sections
with
shearwhich
reinforcement:
Shear
reinforcement
may
form
ofmust
vertical
links,
support.
Where
both
top
andproduces
bottom reinforcement
are provided,
thetake
areathe
of A
be that
which is in tension
s used
Sectionslinks
with or
shear
reinforcement:
Shearonly
reinforcement
mayeffective
take theinform
of vertical
links,
inclined
bent-up
bars,
and
must
be
considered
resisting
shear
if the
under the loading which produces the shear force being considered.
inclinedof
links
or
bent-up
bars,
anddirection
must
effective
resisting
shear
ifnot
the
Sections
with
Shearonly
reinforcement
mayat
take
thein
form
of to
vertical
links,
spacing
the shear
legs
ofreinforcement:
links,
in the
ofbe
theconsidered
span and
the right
angles
it,
does
spacing
of
the
legs
of
links,
in
the
direction
of
the
span
and
at
the
right
angles
to
it,
does
not
inclinedthe
links
or bent-up
and
only be considered
effective
if the links or bentexceed
effective
depthbars,
d and
if:mustreinforcement
Sections
with
shear
reinforcement:
Shear
may take
the forminofresisting
vertical shear
links, inclined
exceed
the
effective
depth
d
and
if:
spacing
of the
ofbe
links,
in the direction
of resisting
the spanshear
and atif the
angles
tolegs
it, does
not in the direction
up
bars, and
mustlegs
only
considered
effective in
the right
spacing
of the
of links,
od and if:
ofexceed
the span
and
at
the
right
angles
to
it,
does
not
exceed
the
effective
depth
the
effective
depth
d
and
if:
Asv (sin cos ) ( f yv / ms ) 0.2bw s y and 30 o
Asv (sin cos ) ( f yv / ms ) 0.2bw s y and 30
where Asv (sin cos ) ( f yv / ms )
0.2bw s y
and 30 o
where
is the cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement at a particular cross-section;
A
sv
is the
the spacing
cross-sectional
area of
shear reinforcement
a particular cross-section;
is
of the shear
reinforcement
along theatmember;
swhere
v
is
the
spacing
of
the
shear
reinforcement
along
the
member;
sAvsv
cross-sectional
area
of shear
reinforcement
ataxis
a particular
cross-section;
is the
inclination
of the
shear
reinforcement
ofcross-section;
the member;
cross-sectional
area
of
shear
reinforcement
atto
a the
particular
Asv is the
is
the
inclination
of
the
shear
reinforcement
to
the
axis
of
the
member;
spacing
ofshear
the or
shear
reinforcement
along
thethe
member;
is the
characteristic,
worst
credible,
strength
of
shear reinforcement but not greater
v
is the
spacing
of the
along
the
member;
sv fsfyv
is the
the
characteristic,
orreinforcement
worst
credible,
strength
of the
shear
but not greater
yv
is
inclination
of
the
shear
reinforcement
to
the
axis
of thereinforcement
member;
than
500
N/mm;

is the inclination of the shear reinforcement to the axis of the member;
than
500
N/mm;
characteristic,
orsafety
worst
credible,
strength
ofin
the4.3.3.3;
shear reinforcement
but not
greater
is
the
material
partial
factor
for steel
fyv
ms is the
fyv
characteristic,
or worst
credible,
strength
of given
the shear
reinforcement
but not greater
than
500 N/mm;
is
the
material
partial
safety
factor
for
steel
given
in
4.3.3.3;
ms
than
500
N/mm;
is
the
breath
of
the
cross-section.
b
ms w is the material partial safety factor for steel given in 4.3.3.3;
is the
the
breath
ofpartial
the cross-section.
is
material
safety factor for steel given in 4.3.3.3;
bwbms
w is the
breath
of the
cross-section.
is the breath
of the
cross-section.
bw
Where
effective
vertical
links
are present, Vu must be taken as:
be taken
Where
effective
vertical
links
present,
Vu must
be taken
as: as:
Where effective vertical links areare
present,
V must
where
Asv
Where effective vertical links are present, Vu must

d be taken as:
V u = s vc b w d + ( f yv / ms ) d Asv

V u = s vc b w d + ( f yv / ms ) sv Asv
sdv
V u = s vc b w d + ( f yv / ms ) Asv
sv
above.
where the parameters s , vc , bc and d are as defined
where
parameters
xs ,vsc ,, vbcc ,and
d aredasare
defined
above.above.
bc and
as defined
wherethethe
parameters
d arecapacity
ascapacity
defined
above.
where
the parameters
effective,
For
vertical
linkstoto
the
tensile
of
the longitudinal
reinforcement
at a A f / , must be
s , vc , b
c and
For
vertical
links
bebe
effective,
the
tensile
of the
longitudinal
reinforcement
at a section,
s y ms
For
vertical
links
to
be
effective,
the
tensile
capacity
of
the
longitudinal
reinforcement
at a
section,
Asfy/ms, must be greater than:
greater
than:
/ms, must
greater the
than:
section,
Asfylinks
For
vertical
to be be
effective,
tensile capacity of the longitudinal reinforcement at a
section, A
(V be
s greater
Msfy/ms, must
vc b w d)than:

M + (V s vc b w d)
z
2
+
z
(V s2vc b w d)
M
+
where
areare
thethe
co-existent
ultimate
bending
moment
and shear
forceforce
at theatsection
under under
consideration, z is
zandV V
2
whereMMand
co-existent
ultimate
bending
moment
and shear
the section
where
M
and
V
are
the
co-existent
ultimate
bending
moment
and
shear
force
at
the
section
under
the
lever
arm,
which
may
be
taken
as
0.9d
or
calculated
from
Equation
5,
whichever
the
greater
(but
consideration, z is the lever arm, which may be taken as 0.9d or calculated from Equation 5, not to be taken
consideration,
z are
is the
lever
may
be
takenthan
as 0.9d
or
from
Equation
5,under
aswhichever
greater
and
Asnot
isarm,
the
effectively
longitudinal
reinforcement
inthe
thesection
tensile
zone, as defined
where
Mthan
and
Vgreater
the
co-existent
bending
moment
andcalculated
shear
ateffectively
is the
the0.95d),
(but
to which
beultimate
taken
asanchored
greater
0.95d),
and
Asforce
Appendix
A
Volume
3
Section
4
isformula
the
whichever
theforzgreater
(but
not
beprevious
taken
astensile
greater
than
0.95d),
and
A
section.
However,
within
sagging
or hogging region,
inanchored
the formula
calculating
varm,
sindividual
c intothe
consideration,
lever
which
may
be
taken
as as
0.9d
or
calculated
fromeffectively
Equation
longitudinal
reinforcement
in the
zone,
defined
inan
the
for14calculating
Amendments
to is
BSthe
5400-4
Part
BD5,44/XX
the
longitudinal
force
must
be
more
thanas
Mdefined
where
Mformula
thefor
maximum
ultimate moment
anchored
longitudinal
reinforcement
intaken
theastensile
zone,
calculating
max/z, and
theis
effectively
the tension
greater
(but
not
tonot
be taken
greater
than
0.95d),
Athe
section.
However,
within
anas
individual
sagging
orinhogging
region,
the
vwhichever
s ismax
c in the previous
Volume
3
Section
4
within
that
region.
section.
However,
an
orinhogging
region,
the
vc in the previous
anchored
longitudinal
reinforcement
intaken
the tensile
zone,
theM
formula
formaximum
calculating
longitudinal
tension
force
must
not bewithin
asindividual
more
thanassagging
Mdefined
max/z, where
max is the
Part
14asBD
44/XX
/z,
where
M
is
the
maximum
longitudinal
tension
force
must
not
be
taken
more
than
M
max
max
section.that
However,
vc in the previous
ultimate
moment within
region. within an individual
f yv sagging or hogging region, the
Inclined
or bent-up
bars
must
be assumed
to form
tension
members
of one
or
more single
maximum
stress
inwithin
any
link
or
bar
be taken
as the
. Bent-up
bars
must
beis
checked
for systems of
ultimatelinks
moment
that
region.
where
Mmax
the maximum
longitudinal
tension
force
must
notmust
be taken
as more
Mmax/z,The
than
lattice girders in which the concrete forms the compression
members.
maximum
stress
in
any link or bar must
ms
ultimate links
moment
within that
Inclined
or bent-up
barsregion.
must be assumed to form
the tension members of one or more
f
yv or
anchorage
(see
5.8.6.3)
and
bearing
(see
5.8.6.8
and
5.8.6.9).
Inclined
bent-up
bars
must
be
assumed
to
form
the(see
tension
members
of
one(see
or more
be
as
. of
Bent-up
must
checked
anchorage
and bearing
5.8.6.8
bar must be
takensystems
aslinks
Bent-up
bars
must
checked
for
single
latticebars
girders
inbebe
which
the for
concrete
forms
the5.8.6.3)
compression
members.
The and 5.8.6.9).

single
systems
of
lattice
girders
in
which
the
concrete
forms
the
compression
members.
The
ms
Inclined links or bent-up bars must be assumed to form the tension members of one or more
The
treatment
of
shear
reinforcement
at
an
angle
to
the
member
axis
(inclined
links
or
bent
aring (see 5.8.6.8
and 5.8.6.9).
single systems
of lattice girders in which the concrete forms the compression members. The
up
bars)
as
members
of
a
lattice
is
conservative
when
there
is
a
long
length
of
inclined
linksas members of
The treatment of shear reinforcement at an angle to the member axis (inclined links or bent up bars)
bent
In such
situations,
ultimate
shear
resistance
in Figure
may the ultimate
lattice
isup
conservative
when
there
is a the
longlinks
length
inclined
links or indicated
bent up bars.
In such 5.1
situations,
cement ata or
an
angle
tobars.
the member
axis
(inclined
or of
bent
be
taken
as:
shear resistance
Figure
5.1 may
be takenlinks
as:
ce is conservative
when indicated
there is ainlong
length
of inclined
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
ions, the ultimate
shear resistance indicated in Figure 5.1 may
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
f yv d

Vu s vc bw d Asv (sin cos )
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy

s
ms
v

f yv d

(sin cos )
s v > 45o, Vu must not be taken as greater than
However,
mswhen
A1v ( f y ms )
ust not beA/32
taken as greater 2than
Vu
1 cot
s v c bw d
August 2015
yv

s vc bw d Asv (sin cos )

s
ms v
f yv d
Volume 3 Section 4
o
V s vc bw >
d 45
cos ) as greater than
A
,svV(sin
However,
u must not be taken
Part 14
BDu 44/15when
ms s v
be taken as: Vu
Appendix A
2 A1v ( f y ms )
Vu >o45o, Vu must not betaken
as greater than
However,
when
s v c bw d
However, when > 45 , V1u
must
cot not
be taken as greater than
2 A1v ( f y ms )
Vu Alv is the area of effectively
s vc banchored
longitudinal reinforcement in the tensile zone in
where
wd
1 cot

excess of that required to resist that bending moment which is co-existent with the shear
force under consideration.
where
the area of effectively anchored longitudinal reinforcement in the tensile zone in excess of that required
whereAlvAis
lv is the area of effectively anchored longitudinal reinforcement in the tensile zone in
toexcess
resist that
bending
moment
whichthat
is co-existent
with the which
shear force
under consideration.
of that
required
to resist
bending moment
is co-existent
with the shear
force under consideration.
Figure
Figure5.1
5.1Inclined
Inclinedshear
shear reinforcement
reinforcement
Shear Shear
has to be
by a combination
of links and
reinforcement.
Hence, part ofHence,
the longitudinal
hasresisted
to be resisted
by a combination
of longitudinal
links and longitudinal
reinforcement.
Figure
5.1reinforcement
Inclined
shear
tensionpart
reinforcement
in a section
is used
to resist shear
and
not available
theshear
co-existing
If
of the longitudinal
tension
in reinforcement
aissection
is usedtotoresist
resist
and is moment.
not
under available
a specifiedto
assessment
loading
there
is
sufficient
longitudinal
tension
reinforcement
to
resist
the
bending
resist the co-existing moment. If under a specified assessment loading there is
Shearsufficient
has
belongitudinal
resisted
by atension
combination
linksthe
and
longitudinal
Hence,
moment
but to
insufficient
excess
reinforcement
toofresist
co-existing
shearreinforcement.
force,
then the
is incapable of
reinforcement
to
resist
the bending
moment
butsection
insufficient
part of
the
longitudinal
tension
reinforcement
in
a
section
is
used
to
resist
shear
and
is
not
the
specified
assessment
loading.
However,
the
section
would
be
capable
of
resisting
a
smaller
carrying
excess reinforcement to resist the co-existing shear force, then the section is incapable of loading
which
wouldtoinduce
athe
smaller
bendingmoment.
moment,
thus,a result
in asection
greater
excessloading
of reinforcement
to resist
available
resist
co-existing
Ifand,
under
specified
assessment
thereofisresisting
carrying
the specified
assessment
loading.
However,
the
would
be
capable
the
smaller
co-existing
shear
force.
Hence
the section
should
be bending
checked
under
progressively
smaller
sufficient
longitudinal
tension
reinforcement
to resist
the
moment
but
insufficient
a smaller
loading
which
would
induce
a smaller
bending
moment,
and,
thus,
result
in a assessment
loadings
until the combined
bending
and co-existing
shear
force
be resisted.
excess reinforcement
to resist
themoment
co-existing
shear force,
then
the can
section
is incapable of
carrying the specified assessment loading. However, the section would be capable of resisting
An
alternative
methodwhich
for determining
the shear
capacity
based onmoment,
varying angle
truss approach
a smaller
loading
would induce
a smaller
bending
and, thus,
result in is
a given in 5.3.3.5.
Mmmm/yyyy
Shear capacity
5.3.3.2A
Chapter/Page
Assessment sub-clause 5.3.3.2 is a rearrangement of the BS 5400-4 design sub-clause. It covers sections both with
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
and
without shear reinforcement (either in the form of links or bent-up bars). All of the shear
can be resisted by
bent-up bars, since it has been demonstrated (15) that such shear reinforcement is fully effective. However, since test
data are not available for < 30o, no attempt has been made to allow for shear reinforcement bent at such angle.
The upper limit of 460 N/mm2 for the strength of shear reinforcement in BS 5400-4 is merely what was the
standard grade at the time of publication. 480 N/mm2 is the value which was found (16) should be imposed in order
to guarantee that the shear reinforcement would yield at collapse prior to crushing of the concrete. However, the
480 N/mm2 limit is the actual reinforcement strength, so increasing the upper limit of the unfactored strength to
500N/mm2 is justified, as the actual value for use in assessment would always be reduced to values lower than
480N/mm2 after the material partial safety factor for steel is applied.
August 2015
A/33
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
The constant 0.27 in the BS 5400-4 expression for vc has been reduced to 0.27 x 1.1/1.25 = 0.24, because the BS
5400-4 expression is actually the mean value divided by m (17). However, m should be applied to the characteristic
value, and the BS 5400-4 expression actually implies a m value in the range 1.0 to 1.1 applied to the characteristic
shear strength. Hence, the correction detailed above has been carried out. However, where a substantial volume of
concrete would be involved in the shear failure, as in the case of slabs, the constant can be taken as 0.27 (see 5.4.4.1).
The BS 5400-4 requirement to over-design links to resist an additional shear stress of 0.4 N/mm2 has been
omitted from the assessment code. It is understood that its introduction was to allow for a possible reduction in
shear capacity under fatigue loading. In general, it is not considered necessary to make such an allowance in an
assessment. However, when it is known or suspected that links have been tack welded to main steel it would be
advisable to include the additional shear stress, since significant reductions in fatigue strength can occur as a result
of tack welding (18). See also 4.7 and BA 40 (DMRB 1.3.4).
Appendix
Volume33Section
Section44
Appendix AA
Volume
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
in shear
strength at this
The maximum
spacing
of links is specified as d because test data (19) show a reduction
Amendments
to BS
5400-4
Part 14
BD 44/XX
spacing rather than the BS 5400-4 value of 0.75d.
The
BS
5400-4
requirement
for
additional
longitudinal
reinforcement
hasbeen
been
relaxed
inthe
the
2 is not included
(4) that
of 40 N/mm
because it has
shown
it is not justified
The
BS
5400-4requirement
upper limit on
fcuadditional
The
BS
5400-4
for
longitudinal
reinforcement
has
been
relaxed
in
following
respects:
2. More recent work (20) suggests this may not be valid for
by
test
data
collected
for
values
up
to
117
N/mm
following respects:
concretes made with some aggregates, notably limestone. Special considerations (tests or evidence of satisfactory
(1)performance
Thecontribution
contribution
to
shear
resistance
fromthe
theused)
concrete
has
beentaken
taken
intobefore
account
of the mixto
with
theresistance
types
of aggregates
should
therefore
be made
using values of fcu
(1)
The
shear
from
concrete
has
been
into
account
2 for thethe
when
calculating
additional
longitudinal
reinforcement
requirement.
above
60
N/mm
calculation
of
the
shear
capacity.
when calculating the additional longitudinal reinforcement requirement.
for/zadditional
longitudinal
reinforcement
hasresisted
been relaxed
in down.
the following respects:
on the total
longitudinal
force to be
is laid
(2)The BS
An5400-4
upperrequirement
limitof
ofM
Mmax
(2)
An
upper
limit
max/z on the total longitudinal force to be resisted is laid down.
(1)
contribution
to shear
from
themay
concrete
been
taken into
account
the
if
shouldThe
benoted
notedthat
thatthe
the
stressresistance
inbent-up
bent-up
bars
havehas
tobe
be
limited
toless
less
thanfwhen
fyv//mscalculating
ItItshould
be
stress
in
bars
may have
to
limited
to
than
yv ms if
additional
longitudinal
reinforcement
requirement.
theanchorage
anchorageor
orbearing
bearingstress
stressrequirements
requirementsof
of5.8.6.3,
5.8.6.3,5.8.6.8
5.8.6.8and
and5.8.6.9
5.8.6.9are
arenot
notcomplied
complied
the
with.
with.
(2) An upper limit of Mmax/z on the total longitudinal force to be resisted is laid down.
BSIt5400-4
5400-4
requires
beams
tohave
have
aminimum
minimum
areahave
ofshear
shear
links.
Intoassessment
assessment
is
/is
should be
noted that
the stress
in abent-up
bars may
to belinks.
limited
less than fyvitit
BS
requires
beams
to
area
of
In
ms if the anchorage or
recognised
that
some
beams
designed
to
previous
codes
may
have
no
shear
links
or,
lessthan
than
bearing stress
5.8.6.3, 5.8.6.8
and 5.8.6.9
nothave
complied
with.links or, less
recognised
that requirements
some beams of
designed
to previous
codesare
may
no shear
theminimum,
minimum,but
butare
arestill
stillcapable
capableof
ofresisting
resistingshear.
shear.Therefore
Thereforethe
therequirement
requirementto
toprovide
provide
the
minimum
shear
links
has
been
removed.
However,
it
should
be
remembered
that
a
beam that some
BS 5400-4
requires
to have
a minimum
area ofitshear
links.
assessment that
it is recognised
minimum
shear
linksbeams
has been
removed.
However,
should
be In
remembered
a beam
without
links
could
failin
inaabrittle
brittlemay
mode
with
littlewarning.
warning.
When
the
shear
reinforcement
in
beamslinks
designed
to fail
previous
codes
have
nolittle
shear
links or, less
thanthe
theshear
minimum,
but are stillin
capable
without
could
mode
with
When
reinforcement
a
member
does
not
satisfy
either
the
minimum
area
or
the
maximum
spacing
criteria,
the
of resisting
shear.
the requirement
to provide
shear links
has criteria,
been removed.
a member
does
not Therefore
satisfy either
the minimum
area orminimum
the maximum
spacing
the However, it
should
be
remembered
that
a
beam
without
links
could
fail
in
a
brittle
mode
with
little
warning.
shear
capacity
of
the
member
should
be
taken
as
that
resulting
from
the
contribution
of
theWhen the shear
shear capacity of the member should be taken as that resulting from the contribution of the
reinforcement
in a member
does not satisfy
either
the minimum
area
or the reinforcement.
maximum spacing criteria, the shear
concrete
resistance
alone,
disregarding
the
contribution
from
the
shear
concrete resistance alone, disregarding the contribution from the shear reinforcement.
capacity of the member should be taken as that resulting from the contribution of the concrete resistance alone,
disregarding the
contribution
from
the shearofreinforcement.
5.3.3.3
Enhanced
shear
strength
sections close to supports. For sections within a
5.3.3.3
Enhanced shear strength of sections close to supports. For sections within a
3dof
of asupport,
support,an
anenhancement
enhancementto
tothe
theshear
shearstrength
strengthof
of5.3.3.2
5.3.3.2may
may beallowed
allowed
distanceaav<<3d
distance
vEnhanceda shear
5.3.3.3
strength
of sections close
to supports.
For sections
within abe
distance av < 3d of a support,
where
the
term
where
the term to the shear strength of 5.3.3.2 may be allowed where the term
an enhancement

s s vvcc bbwwdd
replaced
by
is
replaced
by
isisreplaced
by

s s vvcc bbwwdd
in5.3.3.2,
5.3.3.2,for
forboth
bothcases
caseswith
withand
andwithout
withouteffective
effectiveshear
shear
andwhere
wherethe
theshear
shearcapacity
capacityVVuin
and
u
reinforcement,
is
multiplied
by
the
factor
,
giving,
for
sections
without
effective
shear
reinforcement, is multiplied by the factor , giving, for sections without effective shear
reinforcement,aashear
shearcapacity
capacityof
of
reinforcement,
s vvc bb wdd
u
==
VVuA/34
c
w
s
and,for
forsection
sectionwith
witheffective
effectiveshear
shearreinforcement,
reinforcement,aashear
shearcapacity
capacityof
of
and,
August 2015
is
is replaced
replaced by
by
Volume 3 Section

4ss vvcc bbww dd
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
and
in 5.3.3.2,
5.3.3.2, for
for both
both cases
cases with
with and
and without
without effective
effective shear
shear
and where
where the
the shear
shear capacity
capacity V
Vuu in
reinforcement,
is
multiplied
by
the
factor
,
giving,
for
sections
without
effective
shear
reinforcement,
is
multiplied
by
the
factor
,
giving,
for
sections
without
effective
shear
and where
the shear capacity
Vucapacity
in 5.3.3.2,
for both cases with and without effective shear reinforcement, is
reinforcement,
a shear
of
reinforcement,
shear
capacity
of without effective shear reinforcement, a shear capacity of
multiplied
by the factora ,
giving,
for sections

V
V uu
=
=

ss vvcc bb ww dd
and,
for
with
shear
aa shear
and, for
section
with effective
shear reinforcement,
a shear capacity
of capacity
and,
for section
section
with effective
effective
shear reinforcement,
reinforcement,
shear
capacity of
of

d

+ (( ff yv // ms )) d A
sv

ss vvcc bbww dd +
A
sv
ms
yv

ss vv

Appendix A
V uu
V
=
=
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
In the In
above
for the purpose
calculating
vc the full area
of full
tensile
reinforcement
continues
up to the
vvcc the
area
of
tensile
the
above
for
purpose
of
Appendix
A
33that
Section
44 that
the
full
area
ofVolume
tensile reinforcement
reinforcement
that
In
the formulae,
above formulae,
formulae,
for the
theof
purpose
of calculating
calculating
Appendix
A
Volume
Section
Appendix
A
Volume
3
Section
4
support
must
be
used.
continues
up
to
Amendments
to
Part
continues
up5400-4
to the
the support
support must
must be
be used.
used.
Amendments
to BS
BS
5400-4
Part 14
14 BD
BD 44/XX
44/XX
Part 14 BD 44/XX
The term
is a shear
enhancement
factor for short shear
spans which
may be applied
if theapplied
main reinforcement
The
is aa shear
shear
enhancement factor
factor for
for short
short shear
shear spans
spans which
which may
may be
be applied if
if the
the main
main
The term
term is
3d enhancement
<
3d
of
a
support,
the
value
of
is
by: the
continues
to
the
support.
For
sections
within
a
distance
a

v
a support,
reinforcement continues to the support. For sections
within a distance av < 3d ofgiven
reinforcement continues
to the support. For sections within a distance av < 3d of a support, the
av
33ddis given
value
of
by:
value
of 3dis given by:
aav
where thea vvdistance av is measured from the edge of a rigid bearing, the centre-line of a flexible

bearing or the face of a support.
measured
from
the
edge
of aa rigid
bearing,
the centre-line
of
a flexible
where
the
distance aavv is
measured
from
the
edge
bearing,
centre-line
of
where
the
wherethe
thedistance
distance aavv is
measured from
a rigid
bearing,
the the
centre-line
of a flexible
bearing or the face of a
issupport.
measured
fromthe
theedge
edgeofof
of
a rigid
rigid
bearing,
the
centre-line
of aa flexible
flexible
where
distance
bearing
or
the
face
of
a
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
bearing
or
the
face
of
a
support.
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
support.
The
term
is
equal
to:
bearing or the face of a support.
The
isisequal
The
term
to:
Theterm
term
equal to:
The
term
is
is equal
equal
to: s Fub
(to be taken not greater than unity)

Fub max

F

ub
(to
betaken
takennotnot
greater
than
unity)

sss F
Fub
(to
greater
than
unity)

greater
than
unity)
ub (to
(tobebe
be taken
taken not
not
greater
than
unity)

F
ub
max
F
ub
max

factor that takes into account the increased bond strength due to bearing
where s isFuba max
pressure in the support region, given by

takes
into
account
increased
bond
strength
due
to
bearing
where
ss is

is aa factor
factor
that
takes
into
account
the
increased
bond
strength
due
to
bearing
where
where
a
factor that
takes
into
account
thethe
increased
bond
strength
due to
bearing
pressure in the support
sisisaafactor

that
takes
into
account
the
increased
bond
strength
due
to
bearing
where
s
pressure
in
the
support
region,
given
by
pressure
in
the
support
region,
given
by
region,
given
by
5.3 given by
pressure in the support
s 1.0region,

(to be taken not greater than 2.6)
f cu
55..33
11..00

(to
taken
greater
bebetaken
notnot
greater
thanthan
2.6)2.6)
5.3
(to
ss

(to
1
.
0

(to be
be taken
taken not
not greater
greater than
than 2.6)
2.6)
ff cu
s

f cu
and is the bearing
pressure on the reinforcement due to the ultimate loads (that may be taken as
cu
is themay
total
ultimate
anchorage
equal
to the reaction
at support
divided bydue
thetobearing
area),
Fub (that
and
isthe
thebearing
bearingpressure
pressure on
the
reinforcement
thethe
ultimate
loads
be taken
as equal
to the reaction
and
is
on
the
reinforcement
due
to
ultimate
loads
(that
may
be
taken
as
and
is
the
bearing
pressure
on
the
reinforcement
due
to
the
ultimate
loads
(that
may
be
taken
as
in theby
tension
reinforcement
atthe
thetotal
front
face
ofanchorage
the support
(calculated
inbeaccordance
with
and
to
isforce
the divided
bearing
pressure
ondivided
the
reinforcement
due
to
the
ultimate
loads
(that
may
taken
as
at
support
the
bearing
area),
F
is
ultimate
force
in
the
tension
reinforcement
at the
is
the
total
ultimate
anchorage
equal
the
reaction
at
support
by
the
bearing
area),
F
ub the bearing area), Fub is the total ultimate anchorage
equal
to
the
reaction
at
support
divided
by
ub
is
given
by
5.8.6.3)
and
F
ubmax
is
the
total
ultimate
anchorage
equal
to
the
reaction
at
support
divided
by
the
bearing
area),
F
ub
is
given
by
front
face
of
the
support
(calculated
in
accordance
with
5.8.6.3)
and
F
ubmax
force
in the
at
the front
face of
the support
(calculated
in accordance
with
force
the
reinforcement
at
force in
in and
the tension
tension
reinforcement
at the
the front
front face
face of
of the
the support
support (calculated
(calculated in
in accordance
accordance with
with
is
given
by
5.8.6.3)
F
ubmax
is
given
by
5.8.6.3)
and
F
ubmax
F

6

v
b
d
5.8.6.3)
and
Fubmax is given
ub max
s c by
w

F

6 s vvc bbw dd
max
F

ub
sfor
c bwabove,
Inmax
the In
formula
are not to be taken as greater than As fy/msthan
. For A
internal
supports of
Fub
the66formula
s Fub and
ubmax
sFF
for aabove,
ub
max
s vc
w d
ub and Fubmax are not to be taken as greater
s fy/ms. For
continuous
structures
may
be
taken
as
1.0.
internal supports of continuous structures may be taken as 1.0.
ss F
and F ubmax are
not to
be
taken as
greater than
Ass ffyy/
In
the
formula
for
above,
ub
ms.. For
are
to
be
as
For
In
the
formula
for
above,
ub and Fubmax
s F
Fstructures
are not
not
to
be taken
taken
as greater
greater than
than A
As fy/
/ms
In the formula
forof
continuous
above,
ub and Fubmax
ms. For
internal
supports
may
be
taken
as
1.0.
Where supports
this sub-clause
gives a lower
shear strength
than
that
given
by 5.3.3.2 the greater value
should be used.
internal
of
continuous
structures
may
be
taken
as
1.0.
thisofsub-clause
gives
a lowershear
that given by 5.3.3.2 the greater value
internalWhere
supports
continuous
structures
may strength
be takenthan
as 1.0.
should be used.
Notwithstanding
the permitted
shear enhancement
above,
the
shear
stress
upper limit
of
5.3.3.1
must not be exceeded,
Where
this
sub-clause
gives
aa lower
shear
strength
than
that
given
by
5.3.3.2
the
greater
value
Where
this
sub-clause
gives
lower
shear
strength
than
that
given
by
5.3.3.2
the
greater
value
Where
this
sub-clause
gives
a
lower
shear
strength
than
that
given
by
5.3.3.2
the
greater
value
whatever
shear
reinforcement
is
present.
should
be used.
should
used.
Notwithstanding
the permitted shear enhancement above, the shear stress upper limit of 5.3.3.1
should be
be
used.
must
not
be
exceeded,
whatever
sheargenerally
reinforcement
is present.
Sections within the
a distance
d from
theenhancement
support
need
not
be assessed
for shear,
providing
the shear
Notwithstanding
permitted
shear
above,
the
shear
stress
upper
limit
of
5.3.3.1
Notwithstanding
the
permitted
shear
enhancement
above,
the
shear
stress
upper
limit
of
5.3.3.1
Notwithstanding
the
permitted
shear
enhancement
above,
the
shear
stress
upper
limit
of
5.3.3.1
reinforcement
calculated
for
the
section
at
distance
d
is
continued
to
the
support.
must
not be
exceeded, whatever
shear reinforcement
is present.
must
be
reinforcement
present.
withinwhatever
a distanceshear
d from
the support is
must not
notSections
be exceeded,
exceeded,
whatever
shear
reinforcement
isgenerally
present. need not be assessed for shear, providing
the shear reinforcement calculated for the section at distance d is continued to the support.
Sections
within
aa distance
dd from
the
support
generally
need
not
be
assessed
for
shear,
providing
Sections
within
distance
from
the
support
generally
need
not
be
assessed
for
shear,
providing
Sections
within
a
distance
d
from
the
support
generally
need
not
be
assessed
for
shear,
providing
August
2015
A/35
the
shear
reinforcement
calculated
for
the
section
at
distance
d
is
continued
to
the
support.
the
reinforcement
calculated
for
section
is
to
sectionsdd close
to supports
the shear
shear5.3.3.3A
reinforcementEnhanced
calculated shear
for the
thestrength
section at
atofdistance
distance
is continued
continued
to the
the support.
support.
Two factors are introduced. The factor is the shear enhancement factor which is a
5.3.3.3A
Enhanced
shear strength
of
close
to
supports
5.3.3.3Amodification
Enhanced
strengthdefined
of sections
sections
closeof
toBS
supports
of theshear
enhancement
in 5.3.3.3
5400-4. This factor is less
Appendix A
Amendments
Appendix
A to BS 5400-4
Amendments
Appendix A to BS 5400-4
Volume 3 Section 4
Part4 14 BD 44/15
Volume 3 Section
Part 14 3BD
44/XX4
Volume
Section
Part 14 BD 44/XX
5.3.3.3A Enhanced shear strength of sections close to supports
(22)
Appendix
A
Volume
33,Section
44
Appendix
A
Volume
assessment
rules introduce a reduction factor in the equation for Vu. This method
Appendix
A
Volume
33 Section
Section
44
Appendix
A
Volume
Section
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
(22)
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
derived
by
application
of
the
variable
angle
truss
approach
described
in
5.3.3.5
and
consistent
Two
factors
are
introduced.
The
factor
is
the
shear
enhancement
factor
which
is
a
modification
of
the
enhancement
assessment
rules
introduce
a
reduction
factor
in
the
equation
for
V
.
This
method
,
u
Part 14 BD 44/XX
with
BSinby
EN
1992-1-1,
gives
accurate
predicted
shearthan
capacities
than
the
previous
defined
5.3.3.3
of BS 5400-4.
This
factor
is less
conservative
the BS 5400-4
values
the length over
derived
application
of
the more
variable
angle
truss
approach
described
in
5.3.3.5
andand
consistent
(21)
, which(22)
gives a good lower
which
shear
enhancement
is been
effective
is increased
to
in shear
line
with
the
proposal
in
version
of
BD
44 and
has
verified
against
a 3d
large
number
offor
test
data.
(22)
with
BS
EN
1992-1-1,
gives
accurate
predicted
capacities
themethod
previous
assessment
rules
introduce
aaamore
reduction
factor
... This
(22),,
assessment
rules
introduce
reduction
factor
in
in the
the equation
equation
for V
Vuuuthan
This
method
(22),
assessment
rules
introduce
reduction
factor
in
the
equation
for
V
This
method
bound
fit
to
the
test
data.
assessment
introduce
a reduction
factor a in
the number
equationoffor
,
version
of BDrules
44 and
has been
verified against
large
testVdata.
u. This method
derived
by
application
of
the
variable
angle
truss
approach
described
in
5.3.3.5
and
consistent
derived
by
application
of
the
variable
angle
truss
approach
described
in
5.3.3.5
and
consistent
derived
by
application
of
the
variable
angle
truss
approach
described
in
5.3.3.5
and
consistent
Sections
less
than
d
from
the
support
are
not
normally
critical
for
shear,
as
tests
indicate
that
derived
by
application
of
the
variable
angle
truss
approach
described
in
5.3.3.5
and
consistent
with
BS
EN
1992-1-1,
gives
more
accurate
predicted
shear
capacities
than
the
previous
with
BS
EN
1992-1-1,
gives
more
accurate
predicted
shear
capacities
than
the
previous
with
BS
EN
1992-1-1,
gives
more
accurate
predicted
shear
capacities
than
the
previous
BS
5400-4
requires
a
20
diameter
anchorage
to
allow
short
shear
span
enhancement
to
be
used.
However,
tests (22)
<
d
the
load
is
transferred
to
the
support
by
direct
strut
action,
and
the
ultimate
shear
where
a
with BS
EN
1992-1-1,
gives
more
accurate
predicted
shear
capacities
than
the indicate
previousthat
v less
Sections
than
dand
from
thebeen
support
are not
normally
critical
forof
shear,
as tests
version
of
BD
44
has
verified
against
a
large
number
test
data.
version
of
BD
44
and
has
been
verified
against
a
large
number
of
test
data.
show
thatrises
stirrups
canand
contribute
to verified
the shear against
capacity and
shear
enhancement
can occur at short shear spans, even
version
44
been
large
number
of
strength
sharply.
version
of
BD
44
and
has
been
verified
large
number
of test
test data.
data.
dBD
the
load
is has
transferred
to the against
supportaaby
direct
strut action,
and the ultimate shear
where
av <of
at short anchorage
lengths. The revised assessment rules introduce a reduction factor in the equation for Vu. This
strength
rises
sharply.
Sections
than
from
the
support
are
not
normally
for
shear,
as
indicate
that
(22)
Sections
less
than
dd application
from
the
support
are
not
normally
critical
for
shear,
as
tests
indicate
that
method
,less
derived
byd
of the variable
angle
truss critical
approach
described
intests
5.3.3.5
and consistent
with
Sections
less
than
from
the
support
are
not
normally
critical
for
shear,
as
tests
indicate
that
5.3.3.4
Bottom
loaded
beams
.
Where
load
is
applied
near
the
bottom
of
a
section,
Sections
less
than
d
from
the
support
are
not
normally
critical
for
shear,
as
tests
indicate
that
<
d
the
load
is
transferred
to
the
support
by
direct
strut
action,
and
the
ultimate
shear
where
a
v
< dd the
thegives
loadmore
is transferred
transferred
to the
the support
support
by direct
directthan
struttheaction,
action,
andversion
the ultimate
ultimate
shear
where
BS
EN 1992-1-1,
accurate predicted
shear capacities
previous
of BD 44
and has been
<
load
is
to
by
strut
and
where
aaavvvvertical
sufficient
reinforcement
to carry
the load
to the
top
of the
section
must
bethe
in shear
< d the
loadnumber
is transferred
to
support
direct
strut
action,
andof
the
ultimate
shear
where against
5.3.3.4
Bottom
loaded
beams
. Where
load
isby
applied
near
the
bottom
apresent
section,
strength
rises
sharply.
verified
a
large
of
test
data.
strength
rises
sharply.
strength
rises
sharply.
addition
any reinforcement
required
resist
shear.
strengthtovertical
rises
sharply.
sufficient
reinforcement
to carrytothe
load
to the top of the section must be present in
addition
to
reinforcement
required
resist
shear.
5.3.3.4
Bottom
loaded
beams
... Where
load
is
applied
near
the
bottom
of
aaa that
section,
Sections
lessany
than
d from the
support
are to
not
normally
critical
for shear,
as
tests
indicate
where av < d the load
5.3.3.4
Bottom
loaded
beams
Where
load
is
applied
near
the
bottom
of
section,
5.3.3.4
Bottom
loaded
beams
Where
load
is
applied
near
the
bottom
of
section,
5.3.3.5
Alternative
method
.
As
an
alternative
to
the
method
given
in
5.3.3.2,
shear
5.3.3.4
Bottom
loaded
beams
.
Where
load
is
applied
near
the
bottom
of
a
section,
issufficient
transferredvertical
to the support
by directto
andto
thethe
ultimate
strength
risesbe
reinforcement
carry
the
top
the
must
present
sufficient
vertical
reinforcement
tostrut
carryaction,
the load
load
to
the
top of
of shear
the section
section
must
besharply.
present in
in
sufficient
vertical
reinforcement
to
carry
the
load
to
the
top
of
the
section
must
be
present
in
capacity
of
members
with
links
may
be
assessed
using
the
varying
angle
truss
approach
sufficienttovertical
reinforcement
to carry
the
load
to thetotop
the section
must
be present
in
5.3.3.5
Alternative
method
. Asto
an
alternative
theofmethod
given
in 5.3.3.2,
shear
addition
any
reinforcement
required
resist
shear.
addition
to
any
reinforcement
required
to
resist
shear.
addition
to
any
reinforcement
to
resist
adopted
the
(BS required
EN
1992-1-1
andshear.
BS
ENthe
1992-2).
The
shear
strength
V
additionby
tomembers
anyEurocodes
reinforcement
required
to
resist
shear.
Bottom
loaded
beams.
Where
5.3.3.4
load
is
applied
near
bottom
a section,
sufficient
vertical
u is, reinforcement
capacity
of
with
links
may
be
assessed
using
varyingof
angle
truss
approach
for
elements
with
vertical
the1992-1-1
lesser
of:present
to5.3.3.5
carry
the
to
the
top of links,
themethod
section
must
be
addition
tomethod
anyThe
reinforcement
required
to resist shear.
adopted
byload
the
Eurocodes
(BS
EN
and
BSinEN
1992-2).
shear
strength
Vushear
is,
Alternative
As
an
alternative
to
the
given
in
5.3.3.2,
shear
5.3.3.5
Alternative
method
... As
an
alternative
to
the
method
given
in
5.3.3.2,
5.3.3.5
Alternative
method
As
an
alternative
to
the
method
given
in
5.3.3.2,
shear
5.3.3.5
Alternative
method
.
As
an
alternative
to
the
method
given
in
5.3.3.2,
shear
for
elements
with
vertical
links,
the
lesser
of:
capacity
of
with
may
be
using
the
varying
angle
truss
approach
capacityAlternative
of members
members
with links
links
may
be assessed
assessed
using
thegiven
varying
angleshear
trusscapacity
approach
capacity
of
members
with
links
be
assessed
the
varying
angle
truss
approach
5.3.3.5
method.
As anmay
alternative
to the using
method
in 5.3.3.2,
of members with
f
capacity
of
members
with
links
may
be
assessed
using
the
varying
angle
truss
approach
A
yv
adopted
by
the
Eurocodes
(BS
EN
1992-1-1
and
BS
EN
1992-2).
The
shear
strength
V
sv
uu is,
adopted
by
the
Eurocodes
(BS
EN
1992-1-1
and
BS
EN
1992-2).
The
shear
strength
V
is,
cot

z
adopted
by
the
Eurocodes
(BS
EN
1992-1-1
and
BS
EN
1992-2).
The
shear
strength
V
is,
u1992-1-1
links
may
be
assessed
using
the
varying
angle
truss
approach
adopted
by
the
Eurocodes
(BS
EN
and BS
adopted
by
the
Eurocodes
(BS
EN
1992-1-1
and
BS
EN
1992-2).
The
shear
strength
V
u is,
f
A
for
elements
with
vertical
links,
the
lesser
of:

s
yv
sv
for
elements
with
vertical
links,
the
lesser
of:
v
ms
for
elements
with
vertical
links,
the
lesser
of:
forlesser
elements
EN
shear
Vu is,the
cot
strength
zThewith
for1992-2).
elements
vertical
links,
of: with vertical links, the lesser of:
s v ms
ff yv
A
and
Asv
yv
A
cot

Asvsvsv zzz ff yv
yv cot
cot
0.8 f cu

s
and
cot

z
s

ms

cwss vvvv bw z ms
/ cot tan
ms(1 0.5 cos )
ms
0.8mcf cu
cw bw z (1 0.5 cos )
/ cot tan
and
and
mc
and
and
and
fff cu
000...888the
and, for elements with inclined links,
lesser of
cu / cot tan
b
z

(
1

0
.
5
cos

)
cu
f cu
0
.
8
b
z

(
1

0
.
5
cos

)
// cot

tan
cw
w
cw bw
w z (1 0.5 cos )

cw

and, for elements
lesser
cw bw zwith
(1 inclined
0.5 coslinks,
) the
/ cot
cotof

tan
tan

mc
mc
mc

f yv
mc

Asv

z
cot cot sin
Aselements
and,
for
inclined
links,
the
lesser
of
f yv with
sv
and,
for
elements
with
inclined
links,
the
lesser
of
and,forfor
forelements
elements
with
inclined
links,
the
lesser
of
with
z mswith
cotinclined
inclined
cotlinks,
links,
sinthe
the
and,
lesser
of of
and,
elements
lesser
s
ms
A
yv
and
Asvsv z fff yv
yv
A

cot

Asvsv zz f yv cot

cot

sin

cot

sin
sin
sss z ms
and
cot
cot
cot
cot
sin

ms

s
ms
ms
0.8 f cu
cot cot / 1 cot 2
cw bw z (1 0.5 cos )
f
0
.
8
mccu
and
and
and
and
cot cot / 1 cot 2
and cw bw z (1 0.5 cos )

mc

for elements with inclined links. 000...888 fff cu

2
bbbww zzz
cw
000...555 cos
cos
cot
cot
cu cot

(((111

cos
))) 0.8 f cu
cot

cot
/// 111

cot 222
cu cot
cw

cot

cot

cwwith
w zinclined

for
elements
links.

b

(
1

0
.
5
cos

)
cot

cot

/
1

cot
mc
cw w

mc
mc
mc
In these equations:
zIn
isequations:
the lever
arm and may
be taken as 0.9d for members without axial force;
these
equations:
Infor
these
elements
with
for
elements
with inclined
inclined links.
links.
for
elements
with
inclined
links.
with
inclined
links.
memberswithout
withoutaxial
axialforce;
force;
zz for
is isthe
thelever
leverarm
armand
andmay
maybe
be taken
taken as 0.9d for members
elements
In these
is equations:
the angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis perpendicular to
In these
these equations:
equations:
the
shear
force;
In
these
isequations:
theangle
angle
between
compression
andand
thewithout
beam
axis
perpendicular
to theto
shear force;
zIn
is
the
between
the
concrete
compression
strut
the
beam
axis
perpendicular
members
axial
force;
is
the
lever
arm
and
may
be
as
forstrut
members
without
axial
force;
zz
is
the
lever
arm
and the
mayconcrete
be taken
taken
as 000...999ddd for
is
the
lever
arm
for members
members without
without axial
axial force;
force;
z
is shear
the lever
arm and
and may
may be
be taken
taken as
as 0.9d for
the
force;
isa athe
coefficient
taking into
account
thethe
state
of the
stress
inthe
thein
compression
chord, taken
1.0 for noncw isis
coefficient
taking
into
accountofcompression
of
state
of
theand
stress
the compression
chord,as
angle
between
the
concrete
strut
beam
axis
perpendicular
to
is
the
angle
between
the
concrete
compression
strut
and
the
beam
axis
perpendicular
to

is
the
angle
between
the
concrete
compression
strut
and
the
beam
axis
perpendicular
to
prestressed
structures.
Where
the section
is subjected
to an
external
applied
an enhanced
between
the concrete
compression
strut
and
thein
axisload,
perpendicular
cw taken
isis
a the
coefficient
taking
into
account
of the
state
of
the
stress
the
compression
chord,to value in
asangle
1.0force;
for
non-prestressed
structures.
Where
the
section
isbeam
subjected
to an
external
the
shear
the
shear
force;
the
shear
force;
accordance
with
6.3.4.7
may
be
used;
the shear
applied
an enhanced
value in
accordance
with the
6.3.4.7
mayisbesubjected
used; to an external
taken
asload,
1.0force;
for
non-prestressed
structures.
Where
section

is
aaa coefficient
taking
into
account
of
the
state
the
stress
in
the
compression
chord,
applied
load, an enhanced
value
in accordance
withof
6.3.4.7
may be
used;

is
coefficient
taking
into
account
of
the
state
of
the
stress
in
the
compression
chord,
cw
cw

is
coefficient
taking
into
account
of
the
state
of
the
stress
in
the
compression
chord,
cw
is
a
coefficient
taking
into
account
of
the
state
of
the
stress
in
the
compression
chord,
cw
taken
as
1.0
for
non-prestressed
structures.
Where
the
section
is
subjected
to
an
external
taken
as
1.0
for
non-prestressed
structures.
Where
the
section
is
subjected
to
an
external
A/36
taken
as
1.0
for
non-prestressed
structures.
Where
the
section
is
subjected
to
an
external
taken
as 1.0 for
non-prestressed in
structures. Where
the section
is subjected
to an externalAugust 2015
applied
applied load,
load, an
an enhanced
enhanced value
value in
in accordance
accordance with
with 6.3.4.7
6.3.4.7 may
may be
be used;
used;
applied
load,
an
enhanced
value
accordance
with
6.3.4.7
may
be
used;
applied load, an enhanced value in accordance with 6.3.4.7 may be used;
Mmmm/yyyy

Chapter/Page
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Volume 3 Section 4
AppendixAA
Appendix
Part 14 BD 44/15
AmendmentstotoBS
BS5400-4
5400-4
Amendments
Appendix A
Volume3 3Section
Section4 4
Volume
Amendments
to
fBD
014
.8BD
Part14
44/XX BS 5400-4
cu44/XX
Part
is a strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear, taken as 0.6 1

;
250

is the inclination of the shear reinforcement to the axis of the member.
0.08.8f cuf cu
reduction
factor
for
concrete
crackedinininshear,
shear,taken
takenasas0.06.611
astrength
strength
reduction
factor
for
concretecracked
cracked
shear,
taken
isisaisastrength
reduction
factor
for
concrete
; ;
250
250

the
In the above, the angle may be chosen within the limits of 1.0 cot 2.5 to provide
inclination
ofof
the
shear
reinforcement
tothe
theaxis
axisofofofthe
themember.
member.
maximum
shear
capacity,ofexcept
in
elements
whereto
shear
co-exist
with
externally applied
isthe
the
inclination
the
shear
reinforcement
to
the
axis
the
member.
isisthe
inclination
the
shear
reinforcement
tension, where cot must be taken as 1.25. The other symbols are as in 5.3.3.1 and 5.3.3.2. In
2 maximum shear capacity,
Inthe
the
above,
the
angle
bebe
chosen
thethe
limits
ofnot
1.0
cot
cot
2.5
provide
the
may
may
bechosen
chosen
within
the
limits
1.0
to2.5
2.5
provide
the
theabove,
above,
theangle
angleshear
at sections
addition,
the the
maximum
force,
inwithin
Newtons,
must
be
greater
200b
may
within
limits
ofof
1.0
cot
than
totoprovide
the
InIn
w
except
in
elements
where
shear
co-exist
with
externally
applied
tension,
where
cot
must
be
taken
maximum
shear
capacity,
except
in
elements
where
shear
co-exist
with
externally
applied
in
mm.
more
than
d
from
the
edge
of
a
support
with
b
maximum shear capacity, except in elements where
shear co-exist with externally applied as 1.25. The other
w
symbols where
are as incot
5.3.3.1
andbe
addition,
the
maximum
shear
in Newtons,
must notInbe greater than
must
must
takenasIn
as1.25.
1.25.The
Theother
other
symbols
areasforce,
asinin5.3.3.1
5.3.3.1
and5.3.3.2.
5.3.3.2.
tension,
be 5.3.3.2.
taken
symbols
are
and
In
tension,
where
cot
2 at sections more than d from the edge of a support with b in mm.
2
200b
2
w
w greater
If
this
approach
is
used,
the
flexural
reinforcement
at
any
section
must
be
capable
of
resisting
the
at
sections
addition,
the
maximum
shear
force,
in
Newtons,
must
not
be
than
200b
addition, the maximum shear force, in Newtons, must not be greater than 200bw wat sections
maximum
bending
moment
inofany
sectionwith
within
a in
distance
mm. z (cot - cot)/2 in the direction of
morethan
than
fromthe
theedge
edgeof
support
with
mm.
more
d dfrom
a asupport
bwbatwin
If this approach
is used,
the flexural
reinforcement
any
section must be capable of resisting the maximum bending
increasing moment from the section and be provided with effective anchorage in accordance
moment in any section within a distance z (cot - cot)/2 in the direction of increasing moment from the section and be
with
5.8.6.3.
However,
at
athe
simply-supported
end,
bond
stressmust
inmust
the
of reinforcement
this
approach
used,
flexural
reinforcement
atany
anysection
section
be
capable
resisting
thebond stress in
IfIf
this
approach
isisused,
the
flexural
reinforcement
at5.8.6.3.
capable
ofofresisting
provided
with
effective
anchorage
in accordance
withthe
However,
at be
a length
simply-supported
end, the
the
immediately
over
the
bearing
may
be
taken
as
1.5
times
that
given
in
5.8.6.3.
Where
this
maximum
bending
moment
in
any
section
within
a
distance
z
(cot
cot)/2
in
the
direction
of
maximum
momentimmediately
in any section
a distance
z (cot
in the
of
Where this
the lengthbending
of reinforcement
overwithin
the bearing
may be
taken -ascot)/2
1.5 times
thatdirection
given in 5.8.6.3.
is
limited
to:
requirement
is
not
satisfied,
the
shear
capacity
V
increasing
moment
from
the
section
and
be
provided
with
effective
anchorage
in
accordance
u
increasing
moment
from
the
section
and
be
provided
with
effective
anchorage
in
accordance
requirement is not satisfied, the shear capacity Vu is limited to:
with5.8.6.3.
5.8.6.3.However,
However,atata asimply-supported
simply-supportedend,
end,the
thebond
bondstress
stressininthe
thelength
lengthofofreinforcement
reinforcement
with
immediatelyover
overthe
bearing
maybebetaken
takenasas1.5
1.5times
timesthat
thatgiven
giveninin5.8.6.3.
5.8.6.3.Where
Wherethis
this
M may
immediately
thebearing
2 Fsatisfied,
the shear capacity Visislimited
ub
limited
to:
requirement
is
not
to:
requirement is not satisfied,z the
shear capacity Vu u
Vu
(cot cot )

F MM
2 2 F ub

ub
z

z

thisequation,
equation,
F
is
the
maximum
force
cancan
be be
developed
in the
tension
reinforcement at the section
the
maximum
forcethat
that
developed
inmain
the main
tension
InInthis
F
ub
ub
VuVu
(cot

cot

)
considered,
that
is
the
sum
of
the
forces
in
the
bars
in
the
section
limited
to
either
the
available
bond strength to
(cot

cot

)
reinforcement at the section considered, that is the sum of the forces in the bars in
the section
5.8.6.3
(with
the
modification
for
simply
supported
ends
noted
above)
or
to
A
f
/g
whichever
is
s y ms
limited to either the available bond strength to 5.8.6.3 (with the modification
for simply less, and M is the
co-existing
moment
acting
at maximum
the
isthe
the
thatcan
canbebe
developed
main
tensionmoment
thisequation,
equation,
Fub
ms whichever
isdeveloped
less, and in
Minthe
isthe
the
co-existing
supported
ends
noted
orsection.
to Asfforce
isabove)
maximum
that
main
tension
InIn
this
Fub
y/force
reinforcement
thesection
sectionconsidered,
considered,that
thatisisthe
thesum
sumofofthe
theforces
forcesininthe
thebars
barsininthe
thesection
section
acting
at the section.
reinforcement
atatthe
5.3.3.5A Alternative method
limited
to
either
the
available
bond
strength
to
5.8.6.3
(with
the
modification
for
simply
limited to either the available bond strength to 5.8.6.3 (with the modification for simply
mswhichever
whichever
isless,
less,and
andMM
theco-existing
co-existingmoment
moment
supported
ends
noted
above)
ortotoAA
5.3.3.5A
Alternative
method
y/ms
supported
ends
noted
above)
or
sfysf/adds
The traditional
shear
checking
approach
the
concreteiscontribution
toisaisthe
link
contribution
calculated assuming a
acting
the
section.
The
shear checking
approach
the concrete
contribution
to aand
linkis contribution
acting
atatthe
section.
45traditional
truss.
An
alternative
approach,
which isadds
arguably
theoretically
more correct
based on BS EN 1992-1-1, is
truss.toAn
alternative
which
arguably
theoretically
calculated
a 45force
to assumeassuming
the entire shear
be taken
by theapproach,
truss but allow
theistruss
angle to
be varied to give a higher shear
5.3.3.5A
Alternative
method
more
correct
and
is based
BS
EN
is to respect
assumetothe
force to the
be taken
5.3.3.5A
Alternative
method
force.
The equations
givenon
can
then
be1992-1-1,
optimised with
theentire
angle shear
q to determine
best lower bound
The
traditional
shear
checking
approach
adds
the
concrete
contribution
to
a
link
contribution
by
the
truss
but
allow
the
truss
angle
to
be
varied
to
give
a
higher
shear
force.
The
equations
The
shear the
checking
adds the
contribution
to a linkstrength
contribution
thattraditional
does not exceed
relevantapproach
limits. A flatter
trussconcrete
angle gives
a greater assessed
for a given shear
truss.
An
alternative
approach,
which
arguably
theoretically
calculated
assuming
reinforcement
area.
However,
it also
gives
atohigher
compressive
stress
struts
and a requirement
to which
determine
the concrete
besttheoretically
lower
bound
given
can then
be optimised
with
respect
the approach,
angle
truss.
An
alternative
isisin
arguably
calculated
assuming
a a4545
to
continue
the
main
flexural
reinforcement
further
beyond
the
section
where
it
is
no
longer
required
more
correct
and
is
based
on
BS
EN
1992-1-1,
is
to
assume
the
entire
shear
force
to
be
takenaccording to
that
not and
exceed
the relevant
limits.
A flatter
anglethe
gives
a greater
strength
moredoes
correct
is based
on BS EN
1992-1-1,
is truss
to assume
entire
shear assessed
force to be
taken
purely
flexural
truss
butcalculations.
allowthe
thetruss
trussangle
angleto
tobebevaried
varied
togive
give
shear
force.The
The
equations
for
athe
given
shear
reinforcement
area.
However,
it to
also
gives
ahigher
higher
compressive
stress
in
byby
the
truss
but
allow
a ahigher
shear
force.
equations
the
concrete
struts
and a requirement
totocontinue
the main
flexural the
reinforcement
further
totodetermine
determine
thebest
bestlower
lowerbound
bound
given
canthen
then
optimised
withrespect
respect
tothe
theangle
angle
given
can
bebeoptimised
with
Thedoes
method
can
give
greater
benefit
for links
than
the
conventional
approach,
so can
give higher
strength. For
beyond
the
section
where
itrelevant
is
no limits.
longer
required
according
togives
purely
flexural
calculations.
that
does
not
exceed
therelevant
limits.
Aflatter
flatter
truss
angle
gives
greater
assessed
strength
that
not
exceed
the
A
truss
angle
a agreater
assessed
strength
convenience,
separate
equations
are
given
for
vertical
links
and
for
inclined
links
although
the
former
fora agiven
givenshear
shearreinforcement
reinforcementarea.
area.However,
However,it italso
alsogives
givesa ahigher
highercompressive
compressivestress
stressinin can be
for
derived from the latter. When using either pair of equations for members without curtailments, the angle of the
The
method
give and
greater
benefit forto
links
than the
conventional
approach,
so canfurther
give
the
concretecan
struts
anda arequirement
requirement
tocontinue
continue
the
mainflexural
flexural
reinforcement
further
the
concrete
struts
the
main
reinforcement
struts will be determined first. For members with low shear stresses this will be the flattest allowed (tan-1 0.4).
higher
strength.
Forwhere
convenience,
separate
equations
are given
for
vertical
links
and for
beyond
thesection
section
whereit itisisnonolonger
longerrequired
required
according
purely
flexural
calculations.
beyond
the
according
totopurely
flexural
calculations.
With higher
shear stresses
it will be such that
the crushing
equations
(the ones
including
f ) give the actual shear
inclined links although the former can be derived from the latter. When using eithercupair of
force. The shear strength is then given by the other equation (the web crushing limit) that when the provision of
equations
forcan
members
without
curtailments,
the
angle
ofconventional
the45
struts
will
be determined
first.
The
method
cangive
give
greater
benefit
for
links
than
theconventional
approach,
cangive
give
The
method
greater
benefit
for
than
the
sosocan
links
is such
that
the
angle
does
not
have
tolinks
be much
flatter
than
canapproach,
give
shear
strengths
significantly
above the
-1
0.4).
With
higher
For
members
with
low
shear
stresses
this
will
be
the
flattest
allowed
(tan
higher
strength.
For
convenience,
separate
equations
are
given
for
vertical
links
and
for
higher
strength.
For
convenience,
separate
equations
are
given
for
vertical
links
and
for
BD 44 limit given in 5.3.3.1. This is particularly significant with high concrete strengths (23).
) either
givepair
the
shear
stresses
will be the
such
that the
crushing
equations
(the
onesWhen
including
fcueither
inclined
linksit
although
theformer
former
can
derived
fromthe
thelatter.
latter.
Whenusing
using
pairofof
inclined
links
although
can
bebederived
from
actual
shear
force.
The
shear
strength
is
then
given
by
the
other
equation
(the
web
crushing
equations
for
members
without
curtailments,
the
angle
of
the
struts
will
be
determined
first.the angle of the
equations
for
members
without
curtailments,
the
angle
of
the
struts
will
be
determined
first.
The same approach can be used for members with curtailments and with short anchorage. However,
-1 -1 0.4). With higher
limit)
that
the
provision
of
links
isthis
such
the
angle
not (tan
have
be With
muchhigher
flatter
For
members
with
low
shear
stresses
willthat
theflattest
flattestdoes
allowed
(tan to
0.4).
For
members
with
low
shear
stresses
will
bebethe
allowed
struts
maywhen
need
then
also
be limited
bythis
the
curtailments.
) givethe
the is
shear
will
suchthat
thatthe
thecrushing
crushingequations
equations
(theones
including
stresses
can give
shear
strengths
significantly
above
the (the
BD
44ones
limit
given in
This
than
45
)cugive
shear
stresses
it itwill
bebesuch
including
fcuf5.3.3.1.
(23)
5.3.3.6
Other
approaches.
With
the
approval
of
the
Overseeing
Organisation,
methods
employing
actual
shear
force.
The
shear
strength
is
then
given
by
the
other
equation
(the
web
crushing
. other equation (the web crushing plasticity
particularly
concrete
strengths
actual shear significant
force. The with
shearhigh
strength
is then
given by the
theory
may
be used
the assessment
ofisthe
shear
capacity
of concrete
beams.
limit)
that
when
thefor
provision
links
issuch
such
that
theangle
angle
doesnot
not
havetotobebemuch
muchflatter
flatter
limit)
that
when
the
provision
ofoflinks
that
the
does
have
cangive
giveshear
shearstrengths
strengthssignificantly
significantlyabove
abovethe
theBD
BD4444limit
limitgiven
giveninin5.3.3.1.
5.3.3.1.This
Thisisis
than4545
can
than
(23)
(23)
.
particularly
significant
with
high
concrete
strengths
particularly significant with high concrete strengths .
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
August 2015
Chapter/Page
Chapter/Page
A/37
Mmmm/yyyy
Mmmm/yyyy
beams.
5.3.3.6A
Other approaches
Methods
employing
lower-bound and upper bound theorem of plasticity theory, including
5.3.3.6AA
Othertheapproaches
Appendix
Volume 3 Section 4
strut and tie
methodsthe
andlower-bound
collapse mechanisms
have
been
successfully
applied
to problems
of
Methods
employing
and upper
bound
theorem
of
plasticity
theory,
including
Amendments
to BS 5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/15
(5)
.
A
generalised
upper-bound
model
has
been
shear
in
concrete,
as
described
in
reference
strut and tie(6)methods and collapse mechanisms have been successfully applied to problems of
(5)
for the
capacity
of beam-and-slab
concreteupper-bound
bridges. However,
these
methods
developed
. A generalised
model has
been
shear
in concrete,
as shear
described
in reference
(6)
should
be
applied
with
care
and
following
approval
from
the
Overseeing
Organisation.
the shear capacity of beam-and-slab concrete bridges. However, these methods
developed
5.3.3.6A
Otherfor
approaches
should be applied with care and following approval from the Overseeing Organisation.
5.3.3.7 employing
Assessment
of deck
hinges
half
joint structures
assessment
halfand tie
Methods
the lower-bound
and
upper and
bound
theorem
of plasticity. The
theory,
including of
strut
joints isand
covered
in 7.2.4.2
ofofthis
Standard.
methods
collapse
mechanisms
have
been successfully
applied
to problems
ofassessment
shear in concrete,
5.3.3.7
Assessment
deck
hinges
and half joint
structures
. The
of halfas described
(5)
(6)
. A generalised
upper-bound
model has been developed for the shear capacity of beam-and-slab
injoints
reference
is covered
in 7.2.4.2 of
this Standard.
5.3.3.7A
of methods
deck hinges
and
joint
structures
Guidanceapproval
on the from the Overseeing
concrete
bridges. Assessment
However, these
should
be half
applied
with
care and .following
Organisation.
assessment
of
bridges
containing
deck
hinges
is
given
in
BA
93
(DMRB
3.1.5).
5.3.3.7A
Assessment of deck hinges and half joint structures. Guidance on the
assessment of bridges containing deck hinges is given in BA 93 (DMRB 3.1.5).
Assessment of deck hinges and half joint structures. The assessment of half joints is covered in 7.2.4.2
5.3.3.7
5.3.4 Torsion
of this Standard.
5.3.4 Torsion
5.3.4.1
General. In some members, the maximum torsional moment does not occur
5.3.3.7A Assessment of deck hinges and half joint structures. Guidance on the assessment of bridges containing
under the same General
loading asInthe
maximum
flexural moment. In such circumstances reinforcement
5.3.4.1
some
members,
deck
hinges is given in BA.93
(DMRB
3.1.5). the maximum torsional moment does not occur
in
excess
of
that
required
for
flexure
and
other forces
may be
torsion.
under the same loading as the maximum flexural
moment.
In used
such in
circumstances
reinforcement
in excess of that required for flexure and other forces may be used in torsion.
5.3.4 Torsion
5.3.4.2
Torsionless systems. In general, where the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members
has
not
been
taken
into account
in the torsional
analysis
of the
structure,
specific
calculations
5.3.4.2
Torsionless
systems
general,
where the
torsional
or stiffness
of loading as the
5.3.4.1 General.
In
some
members,
the. In
maximum
moment
doesresistance
not no
occur
under
the same
for torsion
willnot
be
necessary.
However,
it in
is essential
thatofsound
engineering
judgement
has and other forces
maximum
flexural
moment.
In such
circumstances
reinforcement
in excess
of that
for
flexure
members
has
been
taken
into
account
the
analysis
the
structure,
norequired
specific
calculations
shown
thatin
torsion
plays onlyHowever,
a minor role
the behaviour
of theengineering
structure, otherwise
may
be
used
torsion.
for
torsion
will
be necessary.
it isinessential
that sound
judgementtorsional
has
stiffness
must
be
used
in
analysis.
shown that torsion plays only a minor role in the behaviour of the structure, otherwise torsional
5.3.4.2
systems.
In general, where the torsional resistance or stiffness of members has not been taken
stiffnessTorsionless
must be used
in analysis.
into
account
in
the
analysis
of
the
structure, no specific
calculations
be necessary.
However, it is
5.3.4.3
Stresses and reinforcement
. Where
torsion infora torsion
sectionwill
substantially
increases
essential
thatstresses,
sound
engineering
has shown
thatcalculated
torsion plays
only a minor
rolestress
in the
behaviour of the
the shear
the torsional
shear stress
must
be
a plastic
5.3.4.3
Stresses
and judgement
reinforcement
. Where
torsion
inassuming
a section
substantially
increases
structure,
otherwise
torsional
stiffness
must
be
used
in
analysis.
distribution.
the
shear stresses, the torsional shear stress must be calculated assuming a plastic stress
distribution.
5.3.4.3
and shear
reinforcement.
torsion
in a section
substantially
increasesreinforcement
the shear stresses, the
Stresses
exceeds
the value
vtmin given
below, torsion
Where the
torsional
stress, vt, Where
torsional
shear
stress must be calculated assuming a plastic stress distribution.
must bethe
present:
Where
torsional shear stress, vt, exceeds the value vtmin given below, torsion reinforcement
must be
Where
the present:
torsional shear stress, vt, exceeds the value vtmin given below, torsion reinforcement must be present:
vtmin = 0.082 f cu / mc
vtmin = 0.082 f cu / mc

The sum of the shear stresses resulting from shear force and torsion (v + vt) must not exceed the
, nor,
in shear
theforce
case
of small
sections
550mm),
shall
the
value
ofofthe
ultimate
shear
stress,
vtufrom
The
shear
stresses
resulting
shear
and
torsion
(v + (v
vt) (y
not exceed
the value
not exceed
the of the
Thesum
sum
ofthethe
shear
stresses
resulting
from
force
and
torsion
+must
v1 t<) must
,
exceed
v
y
/550,
where
y
is
the
larger
centre-line
dimension
of
a
link
torsional
shear
stress,
v
t
tu
1
1
ultimate
shear
stress,
v
,
nor,
in
the
case
of
small
sections
(y
<
550mm),
shall
the
torsional
shear
stress,
vt, exceed
sections (y1 < 550mm), shall the
value of the ultimatetushear stress, vtu, nor, in the case of small
1
and
vtutorsional
y1/550, where
y
is
the
larger
centre-line
dimension
of
a
link
and
shear stress,
vt, exceed vtu y1/550, where y1 is the larger centre-line dimension of a link
1
and
vtu = 0.36 (0.7 f cu / 250) f cu / mc

vtu = 0.36 (0.7 f cu / 250) f cu / mc
Torsion reinforcement must consist of rectangular closed links in accordance with 5.8.6.5 together with longitudinal
reinforcement. Only reinforcement in excess of that required to resist shear or bending must be considered as
torsion reinforcement.
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
Torsional capacity must be calculated assuming that the closed links form a thin-walled tube, the shear stresses in
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
which are balanced by longitudinal and transverse forces provided by the resistance of the reinforcement.
As an alternative approach, combined shear and torsion may be assessed by considering the resulting shear flow in
accordance with 5.3.3.5 and the corresponding approach for torsion in 6.3 of BS EN 1992-2 and 6.3 of
BS EN 1992-1-1.
A/38
August 2015
As an alternative
approach, combined shear and torsion may be assessed by considering the
resistance
of the reinforcement.
resulting shear flow in accordance with 5.3.3.5 and the corresponding approach for torsion in 6.3
of BS
EN 1992-2approach,
and 6.3 ofcombined
BS EN 1992-1-1.
As
an alternative
shear and torsion may be assessed by considering the
Volume 3 Section 4
resulting shear flow in accordance with 5.3.3.5 and the corresponding approach for torsion in 6.3 Appendix A
Part 14 BD 44/15
of
BS EN 1992-2
and 6.3and
of BS
EN 1992-1-1.
5.3.4.3A
Stresses
reinforcement
vtmin is 25% of the pure torsional strength without torsional reinforcement, and was chosen (24)
as the torque below
which
significant reduction in shear or flexural strength of a member
5.3.4.3A
Stresses
andareinforcement
2
to 40N/mm
as requiredand
by BS
not
occur.
Hence,
there
is nostrength
need towithout
limit fcutorsional
vdoes
is
25%
of
the
pure
torsional
reinforcement,
was5400-4.
chosen (24)
tmin
The
limit
has which
been brought
into line
with that
for shear.
theupper
torque
below
a significant
reduction
in shear
or flexural
strength
of a (24)
member
and
was chosen
as the torque below
vas
tmin is 25% of the pure torsional strength without torsional reinforcement,
2
to
40N/mm
as
required
by
BS
5400-4.
does
not
occur.
Hence,
there
is
no
need
to
limit
f
cu of a member does not occur. Hence, there is no need to
which a significant reduction in shear or flexural strength
The
limitTreatment
has
been brought
intocross-sections
line with that for shear.
5.3.4.4
of various
2
limit
fupper
cu to 40N/mm as required by BS 5400-4. The upper limit has been brought into line with that for shear.
(a) Box Treatment
sections:
The
ultimate
torsionalcross-sections
strength (Tu) must be taken as the greater of:
5.3.4.4
Treatment
of cross-sections
various
5.3.4.4
of various
must be
be taken
taken as
(a)
sections:
ultimate
torsional
strength(T
(Tu)u)must
asthe
thegreater
greaterof:of:
(a) Box Box
sections:
TheThe
ultimate
torsional
strength
and
and
and
Tu
2 Ao
Tu
2 Ao
AsL ( f yL / ms ) Ast ( f yv / ms )

2
(
)
x
y

s
v
AsL (l f yL /l ms ) Ast ( f yv / ms )

2
(
)
x
y

s
v
l
l

Equation 10/11
10/11
Equation Equation
10/11
Tu = 2hw Ao vtmin
Tu = 2hw Ao vtmin
where Tu = 2hw Ao vtmin
where
is the thickness of the thinnest wall;

hw
where
is the
area enclosed
by thewall;
median wall line;
Ao is the
thickness
of the thinnest
hw
AhA
areathickness
enclosed
by
median
wall
line;of a section;
area
of one
a closed
link
is the
ofleg
theof
thinnest
wall;
o wst is the
AA
is
the
area
of
one
leg
of
a
closed
link
of
awall
section;
of
one
bar
of
longitudinal
reinforcement;
is
the
area
enclosed
by
the
median
line;
sL
st o
AA
is
the
area
of
one
bar
of
longitudinal
reinforcement;
characteristic,
credible,
of the links;
fsL
is the area
of one legor
ofworst
a closed
link ofstrength
a section;
yv
st
fyv
characteristic,
worst
credible,
strength
of the links;
characteristic,
or
credible,
strength
of the longitudinal reinforcement;
fyLsL is the
is the
area
of oneorbar
ofworst
longitudinal
reinforcement;
A
fyL
is
the
characteristic,
or
worst
credible,
strength
of
the
longitudinal
spacing of the or
links
along
the member;
is the characteristic,
worst
credible,
strength of the links;reinforcement;
fsyvv
sv fx is the
spacing
of
the
links
along
the
member;
smaller centre-line
dimension
ofstrength
a link; of the longitudinal reinforcement;
or worst
credible,
l
yL
xsl y is the
smaller
centre-line
dimension
of
a
link;
larger centre-line
dimension
a link;
is the spacing
of the links
along theofmember;
vl
yl
is the larger centre-line dimension of a link;
must
not becentre-line
taken as greater
than of
500
N/mm.
smaller
dimension
a link;
xfyv
yLthe
l and fis
fyv
and fyL must
not be taken as greater than 500 N/mm.
Appendix
A
Volume 3 Section 4
is the larger centre-line dimension of a link;
yl
Part 14 BD 44/XX
addition,
the
torsional
shear
calculated
and fyL the
must
not
beshear
taken
as stress
greater
thanfrom:
500 from:
N/mm.
yv
InfIn
addition,
torsional
stress
calculated
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
In addition, the
torsional
calculated
T shearofstress
5.3.4.3,
where Tfrom:
is the torque due toEquation
ultimate 9Equation
loads. 9
= requirements

must satisfy
vt the
2 h w Ao
T
(b)
Rectangular
sections:
The of
ultimate
mustdue
beto
taken
as the
greater of
must
satisfy
5.3.4.3,torsional
where Tresistance
is the torque
ultimate
loads.
Equation
9 the
= requirements
vt the
must
satisfy
the
requirements
of
5.3.4.3,
where
T
is
the
torque
due
to
ultimate
loads.
2
value calculated from
10/11 (with Ao taken as 0.8 x1y1), and
h w Equation
Ao
(b) Rectangular sections: The ultimate torsional resistance must be taken as the greater of the
(b)
Rectangular 2sections: The ultimate torsional resistance must be taken as the greater of the value calculated
value calculated from
(with Ao taken as 0.8 x1y1), and
h minEquation 10/11
hmin taken
from
Equation
10/11
A
=
( hmax(with
T
o ) vtmin as 0.8 x1y1), and
u
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
2
3
2
h min
h
( hmax min ) vtmin
Tu =
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
2
3
where hmin and hmax are, respectively, the smaller and larger dimensions of the section.
where hmin and hmax are, respectively, the smaller and larger dimensions of the section.
In addition, the torsional shear stress calculated from:
and
hmax are,
respectively,
the smaller
hminthe
Inwhere
addition,
torsional
shear
stress calculated
from: and larger dimensions of the section.
2T stress calculated from:
In addition, =
the torsional shear
vt

hmin
2
)
h min ( hmax
2T
3
=
vt
hmin
h 2 min ( hmaxof5.3.4.3.
)
must
mustsatisfy
satisfythetherequirements
requirements
of 5.3.4.3.
3
Equation 9(a)
Equation 9(a)
Equation 9(a)
(c)
T,satisfy
L2015
and Ithe
sections:
Such sections
must be divided into component rectangles for purposes of
must
requirements
of 5.3.4.3.
August
torsional assessment. Any division into component rectangles may be chosen which is
compatible
the torsional
reinforcement
any unreinforced
regions
of a of
(c) T, L andwith
I sections:
Such sections
must bepresent.
dividedHence,
into component
rectangles
for purposes
A/39
Appendix A
(c)
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
T, L and I sections: Such sections must be divided into component rectangles for purposes of torsional
assessment. Any division into component rectangles may be chosen which is compatible with the torsional
reinforcement present. Hence, any unreinforced regions of a section may be ignored for torsional
assessment purposes. A component rectangle must be treated as reinforced for torsion only if its link
reinforcement ties it to its adjacent rectangles.
The ultimate torsional resistance of each component rectangle must then be determined using 5.3.4.4(b), and the
sectional torsional resistance taken as the sum of the torsional resistances of the component rectangles. In addition,
the torsional shear stress in each component rectangle must be calculated from Equation 9(a) and must satisfy the
requirements of 5.3.4.3.
Provided that the sum of the torsional resistances of the chosen component rectangles exceeds the torque due to
assessment loading at the ultimate limit state, it can be assumed that the section has adequate torsional strength.
5.3.4.4A Treatment of various cross-sections
(a)
Box sections
Equations 10 and 11 of BS 5400-4 are derived by considering a space truss model and imposing the restriction
that the longitudinal and transverse steel contributions to torsional strength are equal. Equation 10/11 is the
general expression for torsional strength when the longitudinal and transverse steel do not necessarily make equal
contributions to the torsional strength (25).
It should be noted that excessive torsional cracking could occur under service load conditions if the ratio of the first
to second term under the square root sign of Equation 10/11 lies outside the range 2/3 to 3/2.
(b)
Rectangular sections
Equation 10(a) of BS 5400-4 is identical to Equation 10 of BS 5400-4 if Ao = 0.8 x1y1. Hence, Equation 10(a) is not
used in the assessment code.
5.3.4.5 Detailing. A section will be treated as reinforced for torsion only if the pitch of the closed links is less than
the smaller of (x1 + y1)/4 or 16 times the longitudinal corner bar diameter. The diameter of the longitudinal corner bars
must not be less than the diameter of the links.
In areas subjected to simultaneous flexural compressive stress, the value of AsL used in Equation 10/11 may be
notionally increased by:
fcav (area of section subject to flexural compression)/(fyL/ms)
where fcav is the average compressive stress in the flexural compressive zone.
In the case of beams, the depth of the compression zone used to calculate the area of section subject to flexural
compression must be taken as twice the cover to the closed links.
5.3.4.5A Detailing
The BS 5400-4 link spacing limit of 300mm is intended to control cracking at the serviceability limit state and has
been omitted from the assessment code. The last paragraph of the BS 5400-4 sub-clause, which relates to varying
the ratio of link to longitudinal steel, is now covered by Equation 10/11.
A/40
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
5.3.5
Longitudinal shear. For flanged beams, the longitudinal shear resistance at the horizontal flange/web
junction and across vertical sections of the flange which may be critical must be checked in accordance with
7.4.2.3.
5.3.6
Deflection in beams. If required by the Overseeing Organisation, deflections may be calculated in
accordance with 4.2.4 and 4.6.
Crack control in beams. If required by the Overseeing Organisation, flexural crack widths in beams may
5.3.7
be calculated in accordance with 5.8.8.2.
5.4 Slabs
5.4.1
Moments and shear forces in slabs. Moments and shear forces in slab bridges and in the top slabs of beam
and slab, voided slab and box beam bridges may be obtained from a general elastic analysis, or such particular elastic
analyses as those due to Westergaard or Pucher. Strength enhancement due to compressive membrane action can be
taken into account, in accordance to the provisions of BD 81 (DMRB 3.4.20).
Appendix
Volume
AppendixAA
Volume3 3Section
Section4 4
Amendments
totoBS
5400-4
Part
1414
BD
44/XX
Non-linear
methods
also be used. Alternatively, Johansens yield line method may
be
used
obtain the slab
Amendments
BSmay
5400-4
Part
BDto
44/XX
Appendix
A
Volume
3
Section
4
strength directly.
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Guidance
ononspans
the
methods
ofofanalysis
The
effective
must be inofaccordance
5.3.1.1.
Guidance
theapplication
application
ofyield
yieldline
linewith
methods
analysisfor
forconcrete
concreteslabs
slabsisisgiven
giveninin
(5)
(26)
..
references
and (26)
references (5)and
Guidance
on the application
yield in
line
methods of analysis for concrete slabs is given in
5.4.1A Moments
slabs
and shearofforces
(5)
(26)
and moments
. momentsofofslabs
references
5.4.2
. The
5.4.2 Resistance
Resistance
slabs
. Theultimate
ultimateresistance
resistancemoment
momentinina areinforcement
reinforcement
Guidance
on
the
application
of
yield
line
methods
of
analysis
for
concrete
slabs
is given
in references (5) and (26).
direction
may
be
determined
by
the
methods
given
in
5.3.2.
In
assessing
whether
the
direction may be determined by the methods given in 5.3.2. In assessing
whether
the
5.4.2
Resistance
moments
of slabs. The
ultimate
resistance
moment
in
a reinforcement
reinforcement
can
ofoftwo
bending
moments
and
moment
reinforcement
canresist
resista acombination
combination
two
bending
moments
anda atwisting
twisting
momentatata a
5.4.2 in aResistance
moments
ofbe
slabs.
The
ultimate
resistance
moment
inmoment
a reinforcement
direction may be
direction
may
be
determined
by
the
methods
given
in
5.3.2.
In
assessing
whether
the
point
slab,
allowance
must
made
for
the
fact
that
the
principal
and
reinforcement
point in a slab, allowance must be made for the fact that the principal moment and
reinforcement
determineddo
bynot
the generally
methods
in 5.3.2.
In must
assessing
whether
the reinforcement
can moment
resist
a directions.
combination
of two
reinforcement
resist
a given
combination
of
two
bending
moments
and the
athe
twisting
at a
directions
coincide.
This
bebedone
bybychecking
strength
ininallall
directions
do can
notand
generally
coincide.
This
must
done
checking
strength
directions.
bending
moments
a
twisting
moment
at
a
point
in
a
slab,
allowance
must
be
made
for
the
fact
that
the
principal
point in a slab, allowance must be made for the fact that the principal moment and reinforcement
moment and reinforcement directions do not generally coincide. This must be done by checking the strength in all
directions
do not
generallygive
coincide.
This must
be done
by checking
the
strength
in of
all
directions.
The
formulae
the
equations
which
allow
any
number
Thefollowing
following
formulae
give
thegeneral
general
equations
which
allowfor
for
any
number
ofsets
setsofof
directions.
skewed
reinforcement
in
a
slab.
For
the
sign
convention
shown
in
Figure
5.2,
the
applied
skewed reinforcement in a slab. For the sign convention shown in Figure 5.2, the applied
The
following
formulae
give
the
general equations
which
allow
about
ananaxis
perpendicular
totothe
n-direction
is: for any number of sets of
moment,
MM
n, n,
about
axis
perpendicular
the
n-direction
moment,
The
following
formulae
give
the
general equations
which
allow foris:any number of sets of skewed reinforcement
skewed
reinforcement
in
a
slab.
For
the
sign
convention
shown
in Figure
aboutthe
an applied
axis perpendicular to the
in a slab. For the sign convention shown in Figure 5.2, the applied moment,
Mn, 5.2,
2
2
about
axis
perpendicular
to
the
n-direction
is:
moment,
M
2an
2 2M
n,
M

M
cos

M
sin

sin

cos

n-direction
Mn
is:
Mx cos My sin 2 Mxy sin cos
n
xy
M n corresponding
M x cos 2 moments
M y sinof2 resistance
2 M xy sin
cos (sagging) and negative (hogging)
The
for
The corresponding
moments
of resistance
forpositive
positive (sagging) and negative (hogging)
bending
should
be
calculated
separately,
based
reinforcement
ininthe
top
bending
should be
calculated
separately,
basedonon(sagging)
reinforcement
thebottom
bottomand
and
topfaces
faces
The
corresponding
moments
ofjof
resistance
forofpositive
and
negative
(hogging)
bending
should be
The
corresponding
moments
resistance
for
positive
(sagging)
and
negative
(hogging)
respectively.
For
a
slab
with
directions
reinforcement
in
a
face,
the
moment
of
resistance,
respectively.
For
a
slab
with
j
directions
of
reinforcement
in
a
face,
the
moment
of
resistance,
calculated
separately, based on reinforcement in the bottom and top faces respectively. For a slab with j directions
**
bending
should
be calculated separately, based on reinforcement
in the bottom and top faces
MM
n n, is
, isgiven
givenby:
by:
of reinforcement
in a face, the moment of resistance, Mn*, is given by:
respectively. For a slab with j directions of reinforcement
in a face, the moment of resistance,
*
*
*
*
2
2
Mn*, is given
*
*
MMn * by:
MMx *cos
cos2 MMy sin
sin2 22MMxy sin
sincos
cos

Mn
xy
M
cos 2 M*y* sin2 22 2 M xy sin cos
*
MMx * x ( M
cosi )i )
(M ,i ,i cos
x
*sin 22
MMy* * ((M
M
,i*,i cos
(
M
sin 2ii ))i )
M

y

x
,i
*
*
*sin2 cos )
MMxy* * ((M
M
( M ,*i sin
sini ) cos i )
M
*
where
where
where

in which a is theMangle between
the i-direction
reinforcement
and the x axis and M is the moment
of resistance
**
cos
reinforcement
)
(M
in
the angle between
thesin
i-direction
and the x axis and M,i,i
isisthe
i is
inwhich
which
the
i is the angle between the i-direction reinforcement and the x axis and M
where
y xy
xy
,i ,i
,i
ii
a,i
of the slab due to the i-direction reinforcement alone. This assumes the reinforcement in different directions acts
moment
the
momentofofresistance
resistanceofofthe
theslab
slabdue
duetotothe
thei-direction
i-directionreinforcement
reinforcementalone.
alone.This
Thisassumes
assumes
the
*
in
which

is
the
angle
between
the
i-direction
reinforcement
and
the
x
axis
and
M
is
the
reinforcement
in
different
directions
acts
independently.
Care
is
needed
to
ensure
the
correct
i
reinforcement
in different directions acts independently. Care is needed to ensure ,i
the correct
moment
of resistance
ofincluding
the
slab due
the
i-direction
reinforcement
alone.
This
assumes
the
sign
isisused
for
MM
different
are
used.
xyxyasas
signconvention
convention
used
including
forto
differentsign
signconventions
conventions
aresometimes
sometimes
used.
August 2015 in different directions acts independently. Care is needed to ensure the correct
reinforcement
sign
convention
is usedcapacity
including
for Mxythat,
as
different
sign
conventions
are
sometimes
used.
The
provided
for
ofof,,MM
between
the values
n lies
Theslab
slabhas
hasadequate
adequate
capacity
provided
that,
forallallvalues
values
n lies between the values
ofofMM
Mn*n*for
n*n*calculated
n equals
calculatedfor
forsagging
saggingand
andhogging.
hogging.The
Thelimiting
limitingcase
casewhen
whenMM
foronly
onlya a
n equals M
A/41
My
M xy

*
(M
(M
sin i )
,i
,i
sin i cos i )
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
h i is the angle between the i-direction reinforcement and the x axis and M,i is the
nt of resistance of the slab due to the i-direction reinforcement alone. This assumes the
cement in different directions acts independently. Care is needed to ensure the correct
independently. Care is needed to ensure the correct sign convention is used including for Mxy as different sign
nvention is used including for Mxy as different sign conventions are sometimes used.
conventions
Appendix Aare sometimes used.
Volume 3 Section 4
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part 14 3BD
44/XX4
Appendix
A provided that, for all values of , Mn lies between the values Volume
Section
b has adequate
capacity
The slab
has adequate
capacity provided that, for all values of q, Mn lies between the values of Mn* calculated for
Amendments
to BS
5400-4 The limiting case when Mn equals Mn* for only a Part 14 BD 44/XX
calculated
forAppendix
sagging
and
hogging.
sagging
and hogging.
The limiting
case when Mn equals Mn* for only a single value of qVolume
arises when:
A
3 Section 4
value of arises
when:
Part 14 BD 44/XX
2
*
*
*
M x M x M y M y M xy M xy

m/yyyy
Chapter/Page
Figure 5.2 Forces in a concrete slab

Figure 5.2 Forces in a concrete slab
Figure
5.2 Forces
a concreteallowing
slab
In voided slabs, the transverse flexural
strength
must beincalculated
for the effects of
Figure
5.2
Forces
in
a
concrete
slab
transverse
shear the
by an
appropriate
analysis
(e.g.must
an analysis
based on
the assumption
that the
In voided slabs,
transverse
flexural
strength
be calculated
allowing
for the effects
of
Intransverse
voided slabs,
the transverse
flexural strength
must be calculated allowing for the effects of transverse shear by
section
acts
as
a
Vierendeel
frame).
transverse shear by an appropriate analysis (e.g. an analysis based on the assumption that the
an appropriate
analysis
(e.g.
an analysis
based strength
on the assumption
that the transverse
as a of
Vierendeel
In voided
slabs,acts
the
transverse
flexural
must be calculated
allowingsection
for theacts
effects
transverse
section
as
a Vierendeel
frame).
frame).
shearto
byin-plane
an appropriate
(e.g. an analysis
on the assumption
5.4.3transverse
Resistance
forces.analysis
When checking
whether based
reinforcement
can resist athat the
transverse
section
acts
as
a
Vierendeel
frame).
combination
of two to
in-plane
direct
forces
and checking
an in-plane
shear force,
allowance
must
beamade
5.4.3 Resistance
in-plane
forces
. When
whether
reinforcement
resist
5.4.3
Resistance to
in-plane
forces.
When
checking whether
reinforcement
cancan
resist
a combination
of two
for
the
fact
that
the
principal
stress
and
reinforcement
directions
do
not
generally
coincide.
This
combination
of
twoand
in-plane
direct shear
forcesforce,
and an
in-planemust
shearbeforce,
allowance
must
be principal
made
in-plane
direct
forces
an
in-plane
allowance
made
for
the
fact
that
the
stress
and
5.4.3
Resistance
to in-plane
forces
. When
checking
whether reinforcement
can resist a
must
befact
done
bythe
checking
thestress
strength
in
all
directions.
for the
that
principal
and
reinforcement
directions
generally
reinforcement
directions
do not
generally
coincide.
This must
be donedobynot
checking
the coincide.
strength inThis
all directions.
two in-plane
direct forces
and an in-plane shear force, allowance must be made
mustcombination
be done by of
checking
the strength
in all directions.
for
the
fact
that
the
principal
stress
and
reinforcement
directionseach
do not
coincide.
slabofof
overall
thickness
h has
n directions
of reinforcement,
ofisgenerally
which
is a
at
angle This
i
IfIfa aslab
overall
thickness
h has
n directions
of reinforcement,
each of which
at angle
i to the* x-axis (see
must
be
done
by
checking
the
strength
in
all
directions.
*
to
the
x-axis
(see
Fig.
5.2)
and
provides
a
resistive
tensile
force
in
its
own
direction
of
N
,
i
Fig.5.2)
a resistivehtensile
in its own
direction of Ni ,each
then of
it can
resist
set of
in-plane
If a slaband
of provides
overall thickness
has n force
directions
of reinforcement,
which
is the
at angle
i
*
then
it
can
resist
the
set
of
in-plane
forces
N
,
N
,
N
if:
forcesN
,
N
,
N
if:
x
y
xy
to the x-axis
Fig. 5.2) and provides a resistive tensile force in its own direction of Ni ,
x
y (see
xy
slabresist
of overall
h has
n directions
each of which is at angle i
thenIfitacan
the setthickness
of in-plane
forces
Nx, Ny, Nofxyreinforcement,
if:
*
* (see
*
to the x-axis
2 Fig. 5.2) and provides
2a resistive tensile force *in its own direction of Ni ,
N
cos

N
N
sin

N

N
sin

cos

N

i
i
x
i
i
y
i
i
i
xy

then it can *resist2 the set of in-plane*forces
Nx, Ny, Nxy if:
*
N i cos i N x N i sin 2 i N y
N i sin i cos i N xy
and

and
*
( N c NNx )* (cos
N c 2N
N 2 xyN * sin 2 N
and
y )N
N i sin i cos i N xy

i
i
x
i
i
y
2
( N N x ) ( N c N y ) N xy

and c
where Nc = 0.6h fcu/mc.
( N cf /N .x ) ( N c N y ) N 2 xy
where Nc = 0.6h
cu f mc
where Nc = 0.6h
cu/mc.
5.4.3A Resistance to in-plane forces
where
Nexpressions
c = 0.6h fcu/
mc.the general yield criterion for a slab element subjected to in-plane
The
above
are
5.4.3A
Resistance
to in-plane
forces
(5)
forces
.
The above expressions are the general yield criterion for a slab element subjected to in-plane
(5) Resistance to in-plane forces
5.4.3A
forces
.
A/42The above expressions are the general yield criterion for a slab element subjected to in-plane
August 2015
5.4.4 Shear
resistance of slabs
(5)
forces
. resistance of slabs
5.4.4
Shear

Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
5.4.3A
Appendix A
Resistance to in-plane forces
Appendix
A expressions are the general yield criterion for a slab element subjectedVolume
3 Section
The above
to in-plane
forces 4(5).
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Shear resistance of slabs
5.4.4
5.4.4.1
Shear stress in solid slabs: general. The shear stress, v, at any cross-section in a solid
5.4.4.1 Shear stress in solid slabs: general. The shear stress, v, at any cross-section in a solid slab, must be
slab,
must
calculated from:
calculatedbefrom:

V
Equation 12
bd Equation 12
where
where
V V
b b
d d
is the
the shear
loads;
is
shearforce
forcedue
duetotoultimate
ultimate
loads;
is
the
width
of
slab
under
consideration;
is the width of slab under consideration;
reinforcement.
is the
the effective
is
effectivedepth
depthtototension
tension
reinforcement.
The value of v must not exceed the appropriate maximum value given in 5.3.3.1 for beams.
The value of v must not exceed the appropriate maximum value given in 5.3.3.1 for beams.
The shear capacity must be assessed in accordance with 5.3.3.2 and 5.3.3.3, with the following amendments:
The shear capacity must be assessed in accordance with 5.3.3.2 and 5.3.3.3, with the following
amendments:
(a) bw must be replaced with b in all equations;
(a)(b) bw must
replaced with
b in
shear be
reinforcement
must
notallbeequations;
considered as effective in slabs less than 200mm thick;
increased
0.27.less than 200mm thick;
thereinforcement
constant 0.24 in
the not
equation
for vc mustasbeeffective
(b)(c) shear
must
be considered
intoslabs
(c)
the constant 0.24 in the equation for vc must be increased to 0.27.
August 2015
A/43
Chapter/Page
Appendix A
A/44
Mmmm/yyyy
Figure 5 Parameters for shear in solid slabs under concentrated loads

Figure 5 Parameters for shear in solid slabs under concentrated loads
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
August 2015
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Figure
Figure 66 Openings
Openings in
in slabs
slabs
5.4.4.2
Shear
5.4.4.2
Shear stresses
stresses in
in solid
solid slabs
slabs under
under concentrated
concentrated loads
loads (including
(including wheel
wheel
loads)
solid
under
aa concentrated
Figureof
slabs
loads).. The
The maximum
maximum shear
shear capacity
capacity
of6aaOpenings
solid slab
slab in
under
concentrated load
load must
must not
not exceed:
exceed:
Figure 6 Openings in slabs
Figure
6 concentrated
Openings
in (including
slabs
00..36
((00stresses
..77
ff cuin// 250
f cu d uunder
5.4.4.2
in) slabs
solid
slabs
loads (including
wheelThe maximum shear
0 / mcunder
5.4.4.2 Shear
solid
concentrated
loads
wheel loads).
36Shear
stresses
cu 250) f cu d u 0 / mc
capacity
a solid slabshear
undercapacity
a concentrated
loadslab
must
not exceed:
loads)
. Theofmaximum
of a solid
under
a concentrated load must not exceed:
5.4.4.2
Shearofstresses
in solid
slabs
underthe
concentrated
loads (including
wheel
where
uu0 is
the perimeter
the
area.
In
this
dispersal
of
loads
allowed
in
whereloads)
perimeter
of shear
the loaded
loaded
area.
In
this case
case
the
dispersal
of wheel
wheel load
loadsmust
allowed
in
0 is .the
The
maximum
capacity
of
a
solid
slab
under
a
concentrated
not
exceed:
BD
37
(DMRB
1.3.14)
must
be
taken
to
the
top
surface
of
the
concrete
slab
only
and
not
down
0
.
36
(
0
.
7

f
/
250
)
f
d
u
/

cu
cu
0
mc
BD 37 (DMRB 1.3.14) must be taken to the top surface of the concrete slab only and not down to
to
the
the neutral
neutral axis.
axis.
.36 (0.7 of
f cu loaded
/ 250) f cu d In
u 0this
/ mc
where u0 is the 0
perimeter
case the dispersal of wheel loads allowed in BD 37 (DMRB 1.3.14)
where
u0 is the perimeter
of the
the loadedarea.
area. In
this
case the dispersal of wheel loads allowed in
must
be
taken
to
the
top
surface
of
the
concrete
slab
only 1.5d
and not
down
to the neutralofaxis.
The
shear
capacity
must
be
assessed
on
a
perimeter
from
the
the
area
BDThe
37 (DMRB
1.3.14)must
mustbebeassessed
taken toon
thea top
surface1.5d
of the
concrete
slab only
not down
toas
shear capacity
perimeter
from
the boundary
boundary
ofand
the loaded
loaded
area
as
where
u
is
the
perimeter
of
loaded
area.
In
this
case
the
dispersal
of
wheel
loads
allowed
in
shown
in
Figure
5(a),
where
d
is
the
effective
depth
to
the
flexural
tension
reinforcement.
Where
0
theThe
neutral
axis.
shown
incapacity
Figure 5(a),
where
d is the
effective
depth
tofrom
the the
flexural
tension
reinforcement.
Where
shear
must
be
assessed
on
a
perimeter
1.5d
boundary
of
the
loaded
area
as
shown
in
Figure
BD 37 (DMRB
1.3.14)
be taken
to or
thenear
top unsupported
surface of theedges,
concrete
slab
onlyportions
and not of
down to
concentrated
loads occur
on
aamust
cantilever
slab
the
relevant
concentrated
occur
on
cantilever
slab
or
near
unsupported
edges,
theconcentrated
relevant
portions
of
5(a),
where d isloads
the effective
depth
to the flexural
tension
reinforcement.
Where
loads occur
on a
thecapacity
neutral
axis.
the
critical
section
must
taken
as
worst
case
from
(a),
(b)
or
(c)
5.
For
aaarea
group
of
The
shear
must
be be
assessed
onthe
a perimeter
1.5d
from
boundary
of the loaded
as as
the
critical
section
must
be
taken edges,
as
the
worst
case
from
(a),the
(b)the
orcritical
(c) of
of Figure
Figure
5.
Forbe
group
ofthe worst
cantilever
slab
or near
unsupported
the
relevant
portions
of
section
must
taken
concentrated
loads,
adjacent
loaded
areas
must
be
considered
singly
and
in
combination
using
the
shown
in
Figure
5(a),
where
d
is
the
effective
depth
to
the
flexural
tension
reinforcement.
Where
concentrated
loads,
adjacent
loaded
areas
must
be
considered
singly
and
in
combination
using
case from (a), (b) or (c) of Figure 5. For a group of concentrated loads, adjacent loaded areas must bethe
considered
The
shear
capacity
must
be
assessed
on
a
perimeter
1.5d
from
the
boundary
of
the
loaded
preceding
requirements.
concentrated
occur onusing
a cantilever
slab orrequirements.
near unsupported edges, the relevant portions of area as
preceding
requirements.
singly
and inloads
combination
the preceding
shown
in Figure
5(a),
where
d isworst
the effective
depth
tension
reinforcement.
the critical
section
must be
taken
as the
case from
(a), to
(b)the
or flexural
(c) of Figure
5. For
a group of Where
concentrated
loads
occur
on
a
cantilever
slab
or
near
unsupported
edges,
the
relevant
of
The
ultimate
punching
shear
capacity,
V
,
is
given
by:
concentrated
loads,
adjacent
loaded
areas
must
considered
singly and in combination usingportions
the
isuugiven
by:
The
punching
shear
capacity,
Vu, V
Theultimate
ultimate
punching
shear
capacity,
, isbe
given
by:
therequirements.
critical section must be taken as the worst case from (a), (b) or (c) of Figure 5. For a group of
preceding
concentrated
loads,
must
singly and Equation
in combination
using the
V
adjacent
Asv sin loaded
( f yv / areas

V
13
c
ms )
Vuu =
= V
V
11..66be
Vccconsidered
Equation
13 13

Equation
c Asv sin ( f yv / ms )
preceding
requirements.
The ultimate
punching
shear capacity, Vu, is given by:
>
1.6V
thethe
following
equation
mustmust
be used:
IfIfthis
gives
V
gives
following
equation
be
c then
uV
c then
If this
thisThe
gives
Vuu >
> 1.6V
1.6V
the
following
equation
must
be used:
used:
c then shear
ultimate
punching
capacity,
V
,
is
given
u
Vu = Vc Asv sin ( f yv / ms ) 1.6 Vc by:
Equation 13

V
) / 3.5 22..00 V
Vuu V=
= 11=..44 V
VccV

A
Asvsv sin
sin
(( ff yvyv // ms
ms ) / 3.5 1
.6 Vc Vcc
Equation 13
u
c Asv sin ( f yv / ms )
If this gives Vu > 1.6Vc then the following equation must be used:
In these equations:
In
equations:
In these
these
equations:
If this
gives
the
be used:
V
=is
1.characteristic,
4VVu c>1.6V
Acsvthen
sin
( ffollowing
/ ms ) / 3equation
.5 2.of
0must
Vthe
u
yv credible,
c shear reinforcement but not greater than
the
or
worst
strength
fyv
ffyv
is
or worst credible,
strength of
the shear reinforcement
but
500characteristic,
N/mm;
is the
the
but not
not greater
greater
yv
Vcharacteristic,
= 1.4 Vcorworst
Asvcredible,
sin ( f yvstrength
/ ms ) / 3of.5theshear
2.0 Vreinforcement
u
c
than
500
N/mm;
is500
the material
In these equations:
ms than
N/mm; partial safety factor for steel given in 4.3.3;
ms is
material
partial
factor
for
in
4.3.3;
inclination
ofsafety
the shear
reinforcement
to the
is the
is the
the
material
partial
safety
factor
for steel
steel given
given
inplane
4.3.3;of the slab;
ms
V
is
the
shear
resistance
of
the
concrete;
In
these
equations:
is
the
inclination
of
the
shear
reinforcement
to
the
plane
the
fyv is c the
characteristic,
or the
worst
credible,
strength to
of the plane
shear of
reinforcement
is the
inclination of
shear
reinforcement
of
the slab;
slab; but not greater
SA
is
the
area
of
shear
reinforcement
within
the
area
between
the
loaded
area and the critical perimeter,
V
is
the
shear
resistance
of
the
concrete;
sv
c
N/mm;
Vc thanis 500
the
shear
resistance
ofof
theFigure
concrete;
except
for
case
(c)(ii)
5
when
it
is
the
area
of
shear
reinforcement
within
distance
from the
fyvthe material
or worst
credible,
strength
of the shear reinforcement
butanot
greater
ms
is
partial
safety
factor
for
steel
given
in
4.3.3;
load
the effective depth.
thanequal
500 to
N/mm;
is the inclination
of
the shear reinforcement to the plane of the slab;
msthe shear
is the
material of
partial
safety factor for steel given in 4.3.3;
VcHowever,
is
resistance
the concrete;
Sbd, where Sbd is the
shear reinforcement must
be considered effective only if SAsvsin (fyv/ms) > 0.2Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
Mmmm/yyyy
is the inclination of the shear reinforcement to the plane of the slab; Chapter/Page
area of the critical section;
Vc
is the shear resistance of the concrete;
Mmmm/yyyy
Mmmm/yyyy
August 2015
Chapter/Page
Chapter/Page
A/45
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Vc must be taken as the sum of the shear resistances of each portion of the critical perimeter (see Figure 5). The
value of 100 As/(bd) to be used to calculate vc from 5.3.3.2 must be derived by considering the effectively anchored
flexural tensile reinforcement associated with each portion, as shown in Figure 5.
The ultimate punching shear capacity must also be checked on perimeters progressively 0.75d from the critical
perimeter. The value of Asv to be used in Equation 13 is the area of shear reinforcement between the perimeter
under consideration and a perimeter 1.5d within the perimeter under consideration.
If a part of a perimeter cannot, physically, extend 1.5d from the boundary of the loaded area, then the part perimeter
must be taken as far from the loaded areas as is physically possible and the value of vc for that part may be
increased by a factor 1.5d/av, where av is the distance from the boundary of the loaded area to the perimeter actually
considered.
When openings in slabs and footings (see Figure 6) are located at a distance less than 6d from the edge of a
concentrated load or reaction, then that part of the periphery of the critical section which is enclosed by radial
projections of the openings to the centroid of the loaded area must be considered as ineffective.
Where one hole is adjacent to the loaded area and its greatest width is less than one-quarter of the side of the loaded
area or one-half of the slab depth, whichever is the lesser, its presence may be ignored.
5.4.4.2A Shear stresses in solid slabs under concentrated loads (including wheel loads)
All shear reinforcement within the critical perimeter is considered effective. The upper limit to the shear force has
been made more conservative and the effectiveness of large areas of links has been reduced in line with BS 8110-1.
The upper limit on fyv has been increased to 500 N/mm2 (see 5.3.3.2A).
The reduction factor of 0.8 in Figure 5 (b) and (c)(i) was introduced into building codes to allow for moment
transfer at edge and corner columns (27).
Enhancement of vc has been permitted for short shear spans.
5.4.4.3 Shear in voided slabs. The longitudinal ribs between the voids must be assessed as beams (see 5.3.3) to
resist the shear forces in the longitudinal direction including any shear due to torsional effects.
The top and bottom flanges, acting as solid slabs, must each be capable of resisting a part of the global transverse
shear force proportional to the flange thickness. The top flange of a rectangular voided slab must be capable of
resisting the punching effect due to wheel loads (see 5.4.4.2). Where wheel loads may punch through the slab as a
whole, this must also be checked.
The longitudinal shear resistance of a circular voided slab may be calculated in accordance with the formulae below
provided that the following criteria are met:
i.
/b is not greater than 0.8, where is the diameter of the void and b is the distance between void centres.
ii.
/h is no greater than 0.75 where h is the overall depth of the slab.
iii.
The thickness of the compression flange is not be less than 0.35(h-).
The shear capacity of a circular voided slab, Vcv, can then be derived from:
Vcv = K Vc'
A/46
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
where
Vc' is the shear resistance of the solid slab ignoring the presence of voids, calculated in accordance with 5.4.4.2.
K is a variable reduction factor based on the structures geometry and may be taken as:

K = 1 - {0.4(/b) + 0.6(/b)2.5}
Alternatively, the web between the voids may be assessed in accordance with 5.3.3.5.
5.4.4.3A Shear in voided slabs
The BS 5400-4 requirement to include shear due to torsion when checking the flanges has been omitted because the
torsional shear flow in a flange is perpendicular to the flexural shear flow. Alternative methods of checking flanges
for transverse effects, which are based on Vierendeel action, are available (4).
The formulae for the longitudinal shear resistance of a circular voided slab are based on reference (28). Guidance on the
punching of loads through a voided slab as a whole is given in reference (29).
Deflection of slabs. If required by the Overseeing Organisation, deflections may be calculated in
5.4.5
accordance with 4.2.4 and 4.6.
5.4.6
Crack control in slabs. If required by the Overseeing Organisation, flexural crack widths in slabs may be
calculated in accordance with 5.8.8.2.
5.4.7
Torsion in slabs
5.4.7.1 Slab interior. The assessment of interior regions of slabs to resist twisting moments must be in
accordance with 5.4.2.
5.4.7.2 Slab edges. This sub-clause is concerned with slab edge zones of width equal to the overall depth of the
slab.
An edge zone must be capable of resisting a total shear force of (Vtbe + Mnt) when assessed in accordance with
5.3.3, with bw taken as the width of the edge zone (be) which may be assumed to be equal to the slab overall depth
(h). Vt is the flexural shear force per unit width at the edge acting on a vertical plane perpendicular to the edge, and
Mnt is the twisting moment per unit length in the slab adjacent to the edge zone referred to axes perpendicular (n)
and parallel (t) to the edge.
5.5 Columns
5.5.1 General
5.5.1.1 Definitions. A reinforced concrete column is a compression member whose greater lateral dimension is
less than or equal to four times its lesser lateral dimension, and in which the reinforcement is taken into account when
considering its strength.
A column must be considered as short if the ratio le/h in each plane of buckling is less than 12, where:
le
h
is the effective height in the plane of buckling under consideration;

is the depth of the cross-section in the plane of buckling under consideration.
August 2015
A/47
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Otherwise it must be considered as slender.

5.5.1.2 Effective height of column. The effective height, le, in a given plane may be obtained from Table 11
where lo is the clear height between end restraints.
The values given in Table 11 are based on the following assumptions:
(a)
rotational restraint is at least 4(EI)c/lo for cases 1,2 and 4 to 6, and 8(EI)c/lo for case 7, (EI)c being the
flexural rigidity of the column cross-section;
(b)
lateral and rotational rigidity of elastomeric bearings are zero.
Case 4 from Table 11 may be used for columns which are restrained at the base and which have roller bearings at
the top, provided the rollers are equipped with racks or other effective means to maintain them in position.
Where a more accurate evaluation of the effective height is required or where the end stiffness values are less than
those values given in (a), the effective heights must be derived from first principles.
The accommodation of movements and the method of articulation will influence the degree of restraint developed
for columns. These factors must be assessed as accurately as possible using engineering principles based on elastic
theory and taking into account all relevant factors such as foundation flexibility, type of bearings, articulation
system.
5.5.1.2A Effective height of column
The effective heights in Table 11 relate to idealised situations. In design, the designer can compare the actual
bearing condition with the idealised conditions of Table 11 and choose a conservative effective height. This
approach is also applicable to assessment. However, in assessment, it may be necessary to make a more accurate
estimate of the effective height in order to prove the adequacy of a particular column. The assessor should then
consult specialist literature (30-32). Reference should also be made to 5.8.3.2 of BS EN 1992-1-1.
5.5.1.3 Slenderness limits for columns. In each plane of buckling, the ratio le/h must not exceed 60. If this
slenderness limit is exceeded a full non-linear analysis should be undertaken.
5.5.1.3A Slenderness limits for columns
The BS 5400-4 slenderness limit of le/h of 40 was chosen because it was considered to be a practical upper limit(4).
However, the study (33) on which the BS 5400-4 column sub-clauses are based, included le/h values of up to 60.
Hence, the latter limit, which was also in BS 5400-4:1978, has been adopted in the assessment code.
The BS 5400-4 limit on le/h of 30 for a column not restrained in position at one end is intended to control service
load lateral displacements. It has been omitted from the assessment code which is concerned predominantly with
ultimate rather than service load behaviour.
When a full non-linear analysis is required, it may be performed in accordance with the method described in 5.8.6
of BS EN 1992-1-1, using the stress-strain relationships and material properties for concrete and steel defined in
4.3.2, with the effect of creep allowed for by multiplying all strain values in the concrete stress-strain diagram by a
factor of 2.
5.5.1.4 Assessment of strength. Sub-clauses 5.5.2 to 5.5.8 give methods for assessing the strength of columns
at the ultimate limit state, which are based on a number of assumptions. These methods may be used provided
the assumptions are realized for the case being considered and the effective height is determined accurately.
A/48
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Appendix A
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
In addition, for columns subject to applied bending moments, crack widths may need to be calculated at the
serviceability limit state if required by the Overseeing Organisation (see 4.1).
Table
Effective
height,lel,e,for
forcolumns
columns
Table
1111
Effective
height,
5.5.2
Moments and forces in columns. The moments, shear forces and axial forces in a column must be
determined in accordance with 4.4, except that if the column is slender the moments induced by deflection must be
considered. An allowance for these additional moments is made in the assessment requirements for slender columns
which follow, and the bases or other members connected to the ends of such columns must also be capable of
resisting these additional moments.
In columns with end moments it is generally necessary to consider the maximum and minimum ratios of moment to
axial load.
August 2015
Chapter/Page
A/49
Mmmm/yyyy
Appendix A
5.5.3
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Short columns subject to axial load and bending about the minor axis
5.5.3.1 General. A short column must be assessed at the ultimate limit state in accordance with the following
requirements provided that the moment at any cross-section has been increased by that moment caused by the
actual eccentricity of the (assumed) axial load arising from construction tolerances. If the actual eccentricity has not
been determined, the construction tolerance eccentricity must be taken as equal to 0.05 times the overall depth of
the cross-section in the plane of bending, but not more than 20mm.
5.5.3.2 Analysis of sections. When analysing a column cross-section to determine its ultimate resistance to
moment and axial load, the following assumptions must be made:
(a)
The strain distribution in the concrete in compression and the compressive and tensile strains in the
reinforcement are derived from the assumption that plane sections remain plane.
(b)
The stresses in the concrete in compression are either derived from the stress-strain curve in Figure 1 with
the appropriate value of mc from 4.3.3.3, or taken as equal to 0.6 fcu/mc over the whole compression zone
where this is rectangular or circular. In both cases, the concrete strain at the outermost fibre at failure is
taken as 0.0035.
(c)
The tensile strength of the concrete is ignored.
(d)
The stresses in the reinforcement are derived from 4.3.2.2 with the appropriate value of ms from 4.3.3.3.
For rectangular and circular columns the following assessment methods, based on the preceding assumptions, may
be used. For other column shapes, assessment methods must be derived from first principles using the preceding
assumptions.
See comment on 5.3.2.1A regarding the enhancement of concrete strength and failure strain arising from restraining
links or helical binding.
5.5.3.3
Design
Appendix
A charts for rectangular and circular columns. Not applicable to assessment
Volume 3 Section 4
Appendix
A
Volume
Section
Part 14 3BD
44/XX4
5.5.3.4
Assessment
concrete
stress of 0.6
Amendments
to BS formulae
5400-4 for rectangular columns. The following formulae (based
Part on
14 aBD
44/XX
fcu/mc over the whole compression zone and the assumptions in 5.5.3.2) may be used for the analysis of a rectangular
column
havingaxial
longitudinal
in themoment,
two facesM,
parallel
theexceed
axis ofthe
bending,
that M
reinforcement
the ultimate
load, N,reinforcement
and the ultimate
musttonot
valueswhether
of Nu and
u
the
ultimate
axial
load,
N,
and
the
ultimate
moment,
M,
must
not
exceed
the
values
of
N
and
M
u
u
isgiven
symmetrical
or not. Both
the15
ultimate
load, N, and
theof
ultimate
of Nu
by Equations
14 and
for theaxial
appropriate
value
dc. moment, M, must not exceed the values
given
by
Equations
14
and
15
for
the
appropriate
value
of
d
.
and Mu given by Equations 14 and 15 for the appropriate value of cdc.
Nu
Nu
Mu
Mu

=
=
=
=
Equation 14
(0.6 f cu / mc ) bd c + ( f y / ms ) A'sl + f s2 As2
Equation 14 14
(0.6 f cu / mc ) bd c + ( f y / ms ) A'sl + f s2 As2 Equation
h
(0.3 f cu / mc ) bd c (h d c ) + ( f y / ms ) A'sl ( h d ) Equation 15
(0.3 f cu / mc ) bd c (h d c ) + ( f y / ms ) A'sl ( 2 d )
Equation 15
2
Equation 15
h
f s2 A s2 ( h d 2 )
f s2 A s2 ( 2 d 2 )
2
where
where
where
N N
is the
the ultimate
ultimate axial
considered;
is
axialload
loadapplied
appliedononthe
thesection
section
considered;
is
the
ultimate
axial
load
applied
on
the
section
is the moment applied about the axis consideredconsidered;
due to ultimate loads including the
is
the
moment
applied
about
the
axis
considered
due to ultimate loads including the
allowance for construction tolerance (see 5.5.3.1);
allowance
for
construction
tolerance
(see
5.5.3.1);
Nu, Mu are the ultimate axial load and bending capacities of the section for the particular value of
the ultimate axial load and bending capacities of the section for the particular value of
Nu, Mu are
dc assumed;
A/50
August 2015
assumed;
d
c
fcu
is the characteristic, or worst credible, cube strength of the concrete;
fbcu
is the
the characteristic,
or worst credible, cube strength of the concrete;
is
breadth of the section;
b
is the breadth of the section;
N
M
M
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
M
Nu, Mu
fcu
b
dc
A'sl
fs2
As2

h
d'
d2
fy
Appendix A
is the moment applied about the axis considered due to ultimate loads including the allowance for
construction tolerance (see 5.5.3.1);
are the ultimate axial load and bending capacities of the section for the particular value of dc assumed;
is the characteristic, or worst credible, cube strength of the concrete;
is the breadth of the section;
is the depth of concrete in compression assumed subject to a minimum value of 2d';
is the area of compression reinforcement in the more highly compressed face;
is the stress in the reinforcement in the other face, derived from Figure 2 and taken as negative if tensile;
is the area of reinforcement in the other face which may be considered as being:
(1) in compression,
(2) inactive, or
(3) in tension,
as the resultant eccentricity of load increases and dc decreases from h to 2d';
is the overall depth of the section in the plane of bending;
is the depth from the surface to the reinforcement in the more highly compressed face;
is the depth from the surface to the reinforcement in the other face;
is the characteristic or worst credible strength of reinforcement.
5.5.3.5 Simplified design formulae for rectangular columns. Not applicable to assessment
5.5.4
Short columns subject to axial load and either bending about the major axis or biaxial bending. The
moment about each axis due to ultimate loads must be increased by that moment caused by the actual eccentricity
arising from construction tolerances of the (assumed) axial load. If the actual eccentricity has not been determined, the
construction tolerance eccentricity must be taken as equal to 0.03 times the overall depth of the cross-section in the
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
appropriate
Appendixplane
A of bending, but not more than 20mm.
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Appendix
A rectangular columns having a symmetrical arrangement of reinforcement
Volume
3 Section
4 the
For
square and
about
each axis,
Amendments
to BS 5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
section
may be analysed
for
axial
load
and
bending
about
each
axis
in
accordance
with
any
one
of
the
methods
of
n
n
n

n

M
y
assessment
given
or 5.5.3.4.
The following relationship must be satisfied:
x

M
in 5.5.3.2 M
+
Mx
M ux n +
ux
M
M x
+

where M ux
where
1 .0
1 .0
y
M uy n
M
M uyy

M uy
Equation 16
Equation 16
1.0 Equation
Equation1616
where
M
x, M y
where
are the moments about the major x-x axis and minor y-y axis respectively due
are the moments about the major x-x axis and minor y-y axis respectively due
to ultimate loads including the allowance for construction tolerances (see
to ultimate
loads
including
the allowance
for axis
construction
tolerances
(see loads including
MM
,
M
are
the
moments
about
the about
major the
x-x major
axis
and
minor
respectively
to ultimate
preceding
paragraph);
x x, M
y y
are the moments
x-x
axisy-y
and minor
y-y axisdue
respectively
due
preceding
paragraph);
the allowance
for
construction
tolerances
(see
preceding
paragraph);
Mux
is
the
ultimate
moment
capacity
about
the
major
x-x
axis
assuming
an
ultimate
to the
ultimate
loads
including
the allowance
for
construction
tolerancesan(see
is
ultimate
moment
capacity
aboutx-x
theaxis
major
x-x axis
assuming
ultimate
ux
MM
is the ultimate
moment
capacity
the major
an ultimate
axial
load
ux
axial
load
capacity,
Nuabout
, not less
than the
valueassuming
of the ultimate
axial
load,
N;capacity, Nu, not
preceding
paragraph);
axial
load
capacity,
N
,
not
less
than
the
value
of
the
ultimate
axial
load,
N;
u axial load, N;
less
than
the
value
of
the
ultimate
M
is
the
ultimate
moment
capacity
about
the
minor
y-y axis assuming
assuming an
an ultimate
uy
Muy
is the
the ultimate
ultimate moment
moment capacity
capacity about
about the
the minor
major x-x
ux
is
y-y axis
axis
assuming
an ultimate
ultimate
MM
is the ultimate
moment
capacity
about
the
minor
y-y
axis
assuming
an
ultimate
axial
load
capacity, Nu,
uy
axial
load
capacity,
N
less
than
the
value
of
the
ultimate
axial
load,
N;
uu,, not
axial
load
capacity,
N
not
less
than
the
value
of
the
ultimate
axial
load,
N;
axial
load
capacity,
N
,
not
less
than
the
value
of
the
ultimate
axial
load,
N;
not less than the value of the ultimate
axial load, N;
u
is givenisby:
n uy
M
the ultimate moment capacity about the minor y-y axis assuming an ultimate
is
given
by:

is
by:
n
n
axial load capacity, Nu, not less than the value of the ultimate axial load, N;
=
0.67 + 1.66 N / N
but not < 1.0 and not > 2.0
ngiven
is
= by:0.67 + 1.66 N u / N uz
butnot
not< <1.01.0
and
> 2.0
but
and
notnot
> 2.0
n
M x, M y
n
where
where
where n
uz
0.67 + 1.66 N u / N uz
but not < 1.0 and not > 2.0
is the axial loading

allall
bending,
taken
as: as:
NN
is
loadingcapacity
capacityofofa acolumn
columnignoring
ignoring
bending,
taken
uzuz

where
Nuz
Nuz
is the axial loading capacity of a column ignoring all bending, taken as:
Nthe
= (0.675 capacity
f cu / mc )ofAac +
f A ignoring all bending, taken as:
Equation1717
isN
column
uz axial
= loading
(0.675 f cu
/ mc ) Ac +
f yy Ascsc Equation
Equation 17
uz
(0.675
f cu / mc ) Ac + f y Asc
fcu and fyNare
defined
in 5.5.3.4
uz as=
fcu
and fy are
as defined in 5.5.3.4
A
is the area of concrete
Acc
August
2015
is
the total
area of
longitudinal
reinforcement.
A
scand fy are
fcusc
defined
in longitudinal
5.5.3.4
is theas
total
area of
reinforcement.
A
Ac
For
other
assessment reinforcement.
must be in accordance with 5.5.3.2.
is column
the totalsections,
area of longitudinal
A
Equation 17
A/51
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
fcu and fy are as defined in 5.5.3.4

Ac
Asc

is the total area of longitudinal reinforcement.
For other column sections, assessment must be in accordance with 5.5.3.2.

5.5.4A
Short columns subject to axial load and either bending about the major axis or biaxial bending
The expression for n gives the same values as Table 12 of BS 5400-4. It should be noted that the n values are
conservative (4). Hence, a column which is apparently inadequate when using Equation 16 could, possibly, be
shown to be adequate if assessed in accordance with 5.5.3.2.
The BS 5400-4 sub-clause states that Equation 16 is also applicable to circular columns. However, a circular
column subject to biaxial bending can be assessed for the resultant moment about a single axis.
Slender columns
5.5.5
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Amendments to BS
Part 14given
BD for
44/XX
5.5.5.1 General.
The5400-4
cross-section of a slender column may be assessed by the methods
a short column
(see 5.5.3 and 5.5.4) but, in the assessment, account must be taken of the additional moments induced in the column
by its deflection. For slender columns of constant rectangular or circular cross-section having a symmetrical
sufficient tooflimit
the minimum
value ofmust
moment
to not
less than
the allowance
given
in 5.5.3 or
arrangement
reinforcement,
the column
be able
to resist
the ultimate
axial load,
N, together
with the
5.5.4, respectively.
moments
Mtx and Mty derived in accordance with 5.5.5.4. Alternatively, the simplified formulae given in 5.5.5.2 and
5.5.5.3 may be used where appropriate; in this case the moment due to ultimate loads need not be increased by the
5.5.5.1A for construction
General tolerances given in 5.5.3 and 5.5.4; it will be sufficient to limit the minimum value of
allowance
The additional
allowing
fororlateral
column deflection of 5.5.5.2 to
moment
to not lessmoment
than theapproach
allowancetogiven
in 5.5.3
5.5.4, respectively.
5.5.5.4 can be very conservative for certain end restraint conditions (32). Hence, in some cases
5.5.5.1A General
it may be preferable to carry out a full non-linear analysis (32-36), which may be performed in
accordance with the method described in 5.8.6 of BS EN 1992-1-1, using the stress-strain
The
additional moment
approach
to allowing
for lateraland
column
of 5.5.5.2
to 5.5.5.4
can beofvery
relationships
and material
properties
for concrete
steeldeflection
defined in
4.3.2, with
the effect
(32)
. Hence,
in some
casesstress-strain
it may be preferable
conservative
for certain
restraint conditions
creep allowed
for by end
multiplying
all strain values
in the
concrete
diagramtobycarry
a out a full
(32-36), which may be performed in accordance with the method described in 5.8.6 of BS EN
non-linear
analysis
factor of 2. A circular column subject to biaxial bending can be assessed for the resultant
1992-1-1,
stress-strain
moment using
aboutthe
a single
axis. relationships and material properties for concrete and steel defined in 4.3.2, with
the effect of creep allowed for by multiplying all strain values in the concrete stress-strain diagram by a factor of 2.
A circular column subject to biaxial bending can be assessed for the resultant moment about a single axis.
5.5.5.2
Slender columns bent about a minor axis. A slender column of constant crosssection
bent
about
the minor
axisa must
assessed
for its
ultimate
axial load,
N, together
5.5.5.2 Slender columns
benty-y
about
minorbeaxis.
A slender
column
of constant
cross-section
bentwith
about the minor
the
moment
M
given
by:
ty
y-y axis must be assessed for its ultimate axial load, N, together with the moment M given by:
ty
M ty
M iy
0.0035 l e
Nh x l e )
(1
) Equation
Equation
(
1818
1750 h x
hx
where
where
MM
iy
iy
hx
h
le x
le
is the
the initial
initial moment
notnot
less
than
thatthat
corresponding
to the
for
is
momentdue
duetotoultimate
ultimateloads,
loads,but
but
less
than
corresponding
to allowance
the
construction
tolerances
as
given
in
5.5.3;
allowance for construction tolerances as given in 5.5.3;
is the overall depth of the cross-section in the plane of bending M ;
is the overall depth of the cross-section in the plane of bendingiyMiy;
is the effective height either in the plane of bending or in the plane at right-angles, whichever is greater.
is the effective height either in the plane of bending or in the plane at right-angles,
whichever is greater.
For a column fixed in position at both ends where no transverse loads occur in its height the value
of Miy may be reduced to:
A/52
where
M iy
0 .4 M 1 + 0 . 6 M 2
Equation 19
August 2015
allowance
construction
as given
Miy
is the initialfor
moment
due totolerances
ultimate loads,
but in
not5.5.3;
less than that corresponding to the
hx
is
the
overall
depth
of
the
cross-section
in
the
plane
of bending Miy;
allowance for construction tolerances as given in 5.5.3;
is
the
height
in the planeinofthe
bending
or bending
in the plane
hlex
isSection
the effective
overall
depth
of either
the cross-section
plane of
Miy;at right-angles,
Volume
3whichever
4 is greater.
Appendix A
le 14 BD
is the
effective height either in the plane of bending or in the plane at right-angles,
Part
44/15
whichever is greater.
For a column fixed in position at both ends where no transverse loads occur in its height the value
of
may befixed
reducedposition
to:
iycolumn
ForM
at both
ends
where
no transverse
its height
the value
For
a acolumn
fixed in in
position at both
ends
where
no transverse
loadsloads
occuroccur
in its in
height
the value
of Miy may be
of
M
may
be
reduced
to:
iy to:
reduced
Equation 19
M iy = 0.4 M 1 + 0.6M 2
Equation
M iy = 0.4 M 1 + 0.6M 2 Equation

1919
where
where
where
M1
is the smaller initial end moment due to ultimate loads (assumed negative if the column is
is the
theinsmaller
end
loads
(assumed
negative
if the
column
is bent
MM
bent
doubleinitial
curvature):
1
is
smaller
initial
endmoment
momentdue
duetotoultimate
ultimate
loads
(assumed
negative
if the
column
is in double
1
curvature):
M2
is
theinlarger
initial
end moment due to ultimate loads (assumed positive).
bent
double
curvature):
M2
is the larger initial end moment due to ultimate loads (assumed positive).
M2
is the larger initial end moment due to ultimate loads (assumed positive).
Miy must not be taken as less than 0.4 M2 or such that Mty is less than M2.
5.5.5.3 Slender columns bent about a major axis. When the overall depth of its cross-section,
5.5.5.3 Slender columns bent about a major axis. When the overall depth of its cross-section, hy, is less than
Appendix
A three
Volume
3 Section
h
less
than
the width,
a slender
column
major
x-x
axis
be 4 axial
y, istimes
5.5.5.3
Slender
columns
bent
abouthax, major
axis
. Whenbent
the about
overallthe
depth
ofVolume
its cross-section,
for3must
its
ultimate
three
the
htimes
Appendix
A width,
Section
4
x, a slender column bent about the major x-x axis must be assessed
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
for
itsthree
ultimate
axial
with
the moment
Mtx given
by: x-x axis must be
hassessed
less
than
times
the load,
width,
hxtogether
, a by:
slender
column
bent about
the major
load,
together
the
moment
MtxN,
given
y, isN,
Amendments
towith
BS 5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
assessed for its ultimate axial load, N, together with the moment Mtx given by:
2
0.0035 l e
Nh y l e
where
)
) Equation
Equation
(
2020
2 (1
where M tx = M ix + 1750
0.0035
Nh y hl ex
h
x le

= M ix +
( ) (1
)
Equation 20
M txas defined
le, hx are
in 5.5.5.2;
1750 h x
h
x
lM
are
as initial
defined
in 5.5.5.2;
e, hx
is the
moment
due to ultimate loads, but not less than that corresponding to the
where
ix
is
the
initial
moment
due totolerances
ultimate loads,
but in
not5.5.4;
less than that corresponding to the
Mix
allowance for construction
as given
fordepth
construction
tolerances asingiven
in 5.5.4;
arethe
as overall
defined
in
5.5.5.2;
leh, yhx allowance
is
of the cross-section
the plane
of bending Mix.
h
is
the
overall
depth
of
the
cross-section
in
the
plane
bending
Mix.
y
Mix
is the initial moment due to ultimate loads, but not lessofthan
that corresponding
to the allowance for
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
tolerances as given in 5.5.4;
Where hconstruction
y is equal to or greater than three times hx, the column must be considered as bi-axially
Chapter/Page
hisy is
to or
greater
than
three timesinhthe
column
must be
asMmmm/yyyy
bi-axially
hWhere
theequal
overall
depth
of the
cross-section
plane
of bending
M considered
.
x, the
y
ix
loaded with the moment about the minor axis equal to that due to construction
tolerances (see
loaded
with
the
moment
about
the
minor
axis
equal
to
that
due
to
construction
tolerances
(see
5.5.3).
Where
5.5.3).hy is equal to or greater than three times hx, the column must be considered as bi-axially loaded with the
moment about the minor axis equal to that due to construction tolerances (see 5.5.3).
5.5.5.4 Slender columns bent about both axes. A slender column bent about both axes must be
5.5.5.4
columnsaxial
bentload,
about
both
axeswith
. A slender
column
bent
about both axes must be
assessedSlender
for its ultimate
N,
together
the column
moments
Mabout
tx about its major axis and Mty
5.5.5.4
Slender
columns
bent
about
both
axes.
A
slender
bent
both
must
beand
assessed
assessed
for
its ultimate
axial
load, N, together with the moments Mtx about
itsaxes
major
axis
Mty for its
about its
minor
axis,
given
by:
about
its
major
axis
and
M
about
its
minor
axis,
given by:
ultimate
axial
load,
N,
together
with
the
moments
M
tx
ty
about its minor axis, given by:
2
M tx
M tx
=
=
M ty =
M ty =
0.0035 l ex
Nh y l ex 2
Equation2121
M ix + Nh y ( l ex ) (1 0.0035 l ex ) Equation
)
Equation 21
hy
M ix + 1750 ( h y ) (1
1750 h y 2
hy
0.0035 l ey
Nh x l ey 2
Equation 22
M iy + Nh x ( l ey ) (1 0.0035 l ey )
) Equation
Equation2222
hx
M iy + 1750 ( h x ) (1
1750 h x
hx
where
where
where
h ,h
are as defined in 5.5.5.2 and 5.5.5.3 respectively;
ley
is the effective height in respect of bending about the minor axis.
x y
are as
as defined
defined in
and 5.5.5.3
hh
x,xh
,ixyh y are
in5.5.5.2
5.5.5.2
5.5.5.3respectively;
respectively;
M
is
the
initial moment
moment
dueand
toultimate
ultimate
loads about
the
x-x
axis,
including
the
allowance
for
MM
is
the
initial
due
to
loads
thethe
x-xx-x
axis,
including
the the
allowance
for construction
ix ix
is
the
initial
moment
due
to
ultimate
loadsabout
about
axis,
including
allowance
for
construction
tolerances
(see
5.5.4);
tolerances (see
5.5.4); (see 5.5.4);
construction
tolerances
Miy
is
the
initial moment
moment
duetotoultimate
ultimateloads
loads about
the
y-y
axis,
including
the
allowance
for
MM
is
the
initial
due
thethe
y-yy-y
axis,
including
the the
allowance
for construction
iy
is
the initial moment
due(see
to ultimate
loadsabout
about
axis,
including
allowance
for
iy
construction
tolerances
5.5.4);
tolerances (see 5.5.4);
construction
tolerances
5.5.4);
lex
is
effective
heightinin(see
respect
bending
about
major
axis;
is the
the effective
height
respect
ofofbending
about
thethe
major
axis;
lex
llex
is
the
effective
height
in
respect
of
bending
about
the
major
axis;
is
the
effective
height
in
respect
of
bending
about
the
minor
axis.
ley ey
is the effective height in respect of bending about the minor axis.
5.5.6 Shear resistance of columns. A column subject to uniaxial shear due to ultimate loads
5.5.6
resistance
of columns
. A column
uniaxialshear
shearstress,
due tosultimate
loads
must beShear
assessed
in accordance
with 5.3.3
exceptsubject
that thetoultimate
vc, may be
must
be
assessed
in
accordance
with
5.3.3
except
that
the
ultimate
shear
stress,
v
,
may
be
s c
multiplied by:
multiplied by:
August 2015
0.15 N
1 + 0.15 N
1 +
Ac
A/53
Miy
M
iy
is the
the initial
initial moment
moment due
due to
to ultimate
ultimate loads
loads about
about the
the y-y
y-y axis,
axis, including
including the
the allowance
allowance for
for
is
construction
tolerances
(see
5.5.4);
construction tolerances (see 5.5.4);
l
isAthe
the effective
effective height
height in
in respect
respect of
of bending
bending about
about the
the major
major axis;
axis;
ex
l
is
ex
Appendix
Volume 3 Section 4
l
is
the
effective
height
in
respect
of
bending
about
the
minor
ey
ley
is thetoeffective
height in respect of bending about the minor axis.
axis.
Amendments
BS 5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/15
5.5.6
5.5.6 Shear
Shear resistance
resistance of
of columns
columns.. A
A column
column subject
subject to
to uniaxial
uniaxial shear
shear due
due to
to ultimate
ultimate loads
loads
must
be
assessed
in
accordance
with
5.3.3
except
that
the
ultimate
shear
stress,
v
,
may
be
s
c
must
be
assessed
in
accordance
with
5.3.3
except
that
the
ultimate
shear
stress,
v
,
may
be
5.5.6
Shear resistance of columns. A column subject to uniaxial shear due to ultimate
s c loads must be assessed
multiplied
by:
inmultiplied
accordanceby:
with 5.3.3 except that the ultimate shear stress, svc, may be multiplied by:
0.15 N
+ 0.15 N
11 +
A
Acc

where
where
where
N
N
N
A
Ac
Ac c
is
cu A
is the
the ultimate
ultimate axial
axial load
load (in
(in Newtons)
Newtons) <
< 0.11f
0.11fcu
Acc
A
is
the
ultimate
axial
load
(in
Newtons)
<
0.11f
cu c
is
the
area
of
the
entire
concrete
section
(in
mm)
is the area of the entire concrete section (in mm)
is the area of the entire concrete section (in mm)
A column subjected to biaxial shear due to ultimate loads must satisfy the expression:
columnsubjected
subjected
biaxial
shear
to ultimate
loads
satisfy
the expression:
AAcolumn
to to
biaxial
shear
duedue
to ultimate
loads
mustmust
satisfy
the expression:
V
V xx
V yy
V
+
+
V ux
V
V
V uy
ux
uy

1.0
1.0
where Vx and Vy are the applied shears due to ultimate loads for the x-x axis and y-y axis respectively, and Vux and
Vuy are the corresponding ultimate shear capacities of the concrete and link reinforcement for the x-x and y-y axis
respectively, derived allowing for the enhancement factor given in this clause.
In calculating the ultimate shear capacity of a circular column, the area of longitudinal reinforcement As to be
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
used
to calculate vc must be taken as the area of reinforcement which is in the half of the column
opposite the
extreme compression fibre. The effective depth must be taken as the distance from the extreme fibre with maximum
compression to the centroid of this reinforcement. The web width must be taken as the column diameter.
5.5.6A
Shear resistance of columns
The shear strength enhancement factor to allow for the axial load is that adopted in BS EN 1992-1-1 and is less
conservative than the BS 5400-4 factor. The requirements for calculating the shear capacity of a circular column are
based on those in reference (37).
5.5.7
Crack control in columns. When required, a column subjected to bending must be considered as a beam
for the purpose of calculating flexural crack widths (see 5.8.8.2).
5.5.8
Bearing on columns. Bearing stresses due to ultimate loads of a purely local nature, as at girder bearings,
must be limited in accordance with 7.2.3.3.
5.6
Reinforced concrete walls
5.6.1 General
5.6.1.1 Definition. A reinforced wall is a vertical load-bearing concrete member whose greater lateral dimension
is more than four times its lesser lateral dimension, and in which the reinforcement is taken into account when
considering its strength.
Retaining walls, wing walls, abutments, piers and other similar elements subjected principally to bending
moments, and where the ultimate axial load is less than 0.1 fcu Ac, may be treated as cantilever slabs and assessed in
accordance with 5.4. In other cases, this sub-clause applies.
A reinforced wall must be considered as either short or slender. In a similar manner to columns, a wall must be
considered as short where the ratio of its effective height to its thickness does not exceed 12. It must otherwise be
considered as slender.
A/54
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
5.6.1.2 Limits to slenderness. The slenderness ratio is the ratio of the effective height of the wall to its thickness.
The effective height must be obtained from Table 11. When the wall is restrained in position at both ends and the
reinforcement complies with the requirements of 5.8.4, the slenderness ratio must not exceed 40 unless more than 1%
of vertical reinforcement is provided, when the slenderness ratio may be up to 45.
When the wall is not restrained in position at one end the slenderness ratio must not exceed 30.
5.6.1.2A Limits to slenderness
See comments in 5.5.1.2A and 5.5.1.3A.
Forces and moments in reinforced concrete walls. Forces and moments must be calculated in accordance
5.6.2
with 4.4 except that, if the wall is slender, the moments induced by deflection must also be considered. The distribution
of axial and horizontal forces along a wall from the loads on the superstructure must be determined by analysis and
their points of application decided by the nature and location of the bearings. For walls fixed to the deck, the moments
must similarly be determined by elastic analysis.
Unless the actual eccentricity of load is determined, the moment per unit length in the direction at right-angles
to a wall must be taken as not less than 0.05 nwh, where nw is the ultimate axial load per unit length and h is the
thickness of the wall. Moments in the plane of a wall can be calculated from statics for the most severe positioning
of the relevant loads.
Where the axial load is non-uniform, consideration must be given to deep beam effects and the distribution of
axial loads per unit length of wall. It will generally be necessary to consider the maximum and minimum ratios of
moment to axial load in assessing a wall.
Short reinforced walls resisting moments and axial forces. Each cross-section of the wall must be capable
5.6.3
of resisting the appropriate ultimate axial load and the transverse moment per unit length calculated in accordance
with 5.6.2. The assumptions made when analysing beam sections (see 5.3.2.1) apply, also when the wall is subject to
significant bending only in the plane of the wall.
When the wall is subjected to significant bending both in the plane of the wall and at right-angles to it,
consideration must be given first to bending in the plane of the wall in order to establish a distribution of tension
and compression along the length of the wall. The resulting tension and compression must then be combined with
the compression due to the ultimate axial load to determine the combined axial load per unit length of wall. This
may be done by an elastic analysis assuming a linear distribution along the wall.
The bending moment at right-angles to the wall must then be considered and the section checked for this moment
and the resulting compression or tension per unit length at various points along the wall length, using the
assumptions of 5.3.2.1.
5.6.4
Slender reinforced walls. The distribution of axial load along a slender reinforced wall must be determined
as for a short wall. The critical portion of wall must then be considered as a slender column of unit width and assessed
as such in accordance with 5.5.5.
5.6.4A Slender reinforced walls
See comment in 5.5.5.1A.
Shear resistance of reinforced walls. A wall subject to uniaxial shear due to ultimate loads must be assessed
5.6.5
in accordance with 5.4.4.1 except that the ultimate shear stress, svc, may be multiplied by:
August 2015
A/55
See comment in 5.5.5.1A.
5.6.5 Shear
resistance of reinforced walls. A wall subject to uniaxial shear due to ultimate
Appendix
A
Volume 3 Section 4
Amendments
to assessed
BS 5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/15
loads must be
in accordance with 5.4.4.1 except that the ultimate shear stress, svc, may
be multiplied by:
1 +
0.15 N
Ac
Appendix A
where
where
N
N
c
AA
c
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
is
load(in
(inNewtons)
Newtons)<<0.11f
0.11fcu
Ac;
is the
the ultimate
ultimate load
cu Ac;
is
of entire
entireconcrete
concretesection
section(in(inmm).
mm).
is the
the area
area of
wallsubject
subject
biaxial
shear
to ultimate
loads
satisfy
the expression:
AAwall
to to
biaxial
shear
duedue
to ultimate
loads
mustmust
satisfy
the expression:
Mmmm/yyyy
Vy
Vx
+
V ux
V uy
Chapter/Page
1.0
where
where
Vx and Vy are the applied shears due to ultimate loads for the x-x axis and y-y axis respectively;
Vx and Vy are the applied shears due to ultimate loads for the x-x axis and y-y axis respectively;
ux and Vuy are the corresponding ultimate shear capacities of the concrete and link reinforcement
VV
ux and Vuy are the corresponding ultimate shear capacities of the concrete and link reinforcement for the x-x axis
for
the axis
x-x respectively,
axis and y-y derived
axis respectively,
allowing for
the given
enhancement
factor given in
and y-y
allowing forderived
the enhancement
factor
in this clause.
this clause.
5.6.5A
Shear resistance of reinforced walls
5.6.5A Shear resistance of reinforced walls
See
onon
5.5.6.
Seecomment
comment
5.5.6.
5.6.6
5.6.6
Deflection of
walls.
of walls
needneed
not be
calculated.
Deflection
ofreinforced
reinforced
wallsDeflections
. Deflections
of walls
not
be calculated.
5.6.7
Crack control
walls.
If.required,
flexural
crackcrack
widths
in walls
to bending
5.6.7 Crack
controlininreinforced
reinforced
walls
If required,
flexural
widths
in subject
walls subject
to must be
calculated in accordance with 5.8.8.2.
bending must be calculated in accordance with 5.8.8.2.
5.7 Bases
5.7
Bases
5.7.1 General. Where pockets have been left for precast members allowance must be made, when calculating the
5.7.1 and
General
. Whereofpockets
have been
lefteffects
for precast
allowance
mustbeen
be made,
flexural
shear strength
base sections,
for the
of thesemembers
pockets unless
they have
grouted up using a
when
calculating
the
flexural
and
shear
strength
of
base
sections,
for
the
effects
of
these
pockets
cement mortar of compressive strength not less than that of the concrete in the base.
unless they have been grouted up using a cement mortar of compressive strength not less than
that of the
concreteand
in forces
the base.
5.7.2
Moments
in bases. Except where the reactions to the applied loads and moments are derived
by more accurate methods, e.g. an elastic analysis of a pile group or the application of established principles of soil
mechanics,
the following
must. be
made:where the reactions to the applied loads and
5.7.2 Moments
and assumptions
forces in bases
Except
moments are derived by more accurate methods, e.g. an elastic analysis of a pile group or the
(a)
Where
the base is axially
loaded,
the mechanics,
reactions to ultimate
loads are
uniformlymust
distributed
per unit area or
application
of established
principles
of soil
the following
assumptions
be made:
per pile.
(a)
Where the base is axially loaded, the reactions to ultimate loads are uniformly distributed
per unit Where
area orthe
perbase
pile.is eccentrically loaded, the reactions vary linearly across the base. For columns and walls
(b)
restrained in direction at the base, the moment transferred to the base must be obtained from 5.5.
(b) critical
Where
theinbase
is eccentrically
reactions
vary linearly
across
thecolumn
base. For
The
section
the assessment
of anloaded,
isolatedthe
base
may be taken
as the face
of the
or wall.
columns and walls restrained in direction at the base, the moment transferred to the base must be
obtained
from
5.5.vertical section passing completely across a base must be taken as that due to all external
The
moment
at any
ultimate loads and reactions on one side of that section. No redistribution of moments must be made.
The critical section in the assessment of an isolated base may be taken as the face of the column
or wall.
The moment at any vertical section passing completely across a base must be taken as that due to
all external ultimate loads and reactions on one side of that section. No redistribution of moments
A/56
August 2015
must be made.
5.7.3
Assessment of bases
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
5.7.3
Appendix A
Assessment of bases
5.7.3.1 Resistance to bending. Bases must be assessed in accordance with 5.4, and must be capable of resisting the
total moments and shears at the sections considered.
Where the width of the section considered is less than or equal to 1.5 (bcol+3d), where bcol is the width of the
column and d is the effective depth to the tension reinforcement of the base, all reinforcement crossing the section
may be considered to be effective in resisting bending. For greater widths, all reinforcement within a band of width
(bcol+3d) centred on the column may be considered to be effective and the area of effective reinforcement outside
this band should be taken as the lesser of:
(a)
the actual area of reinforcement outside the band, and
(b)
50 % of the area of reinforcement within the band.
Pile caps may be assessed either by bending theory or by truss analogy with strut and tie systems taking the apex
of the truss at the centre of the loaded area and the corners of the base of the truss at the intersections of the centrelines of the piles with the tensile reinforcement.
Pile caps may only be assessed as beams if the reinforcement is uniformly distributed across the section under
consideration.
In pile caps assessed by truss analogy, the effective area of reinforcement at a section must be taken as the lesser of
(a) the total area at the section and (b) 1.25 times the area of reinforcement in the strips linking the pile heads.
An alternative method of analysis for a slab base is yield line theory.
5.7.3.1A Resistance to bending
When assessing pile caps by truss analogy using strut and tie systems, further guidance on sizing of struts, ties and
nodes can be found in BS EN 1992-1-1.
5.7.3.2 Shear. The assessment shear force is the algebraic sum of all ultimate vertical loads acting on one side
of or outside the periphery of the critical section. The shear strength of bases in the vicinity of concentrated loads is
governed by the more severe of the following two conditions:
(a)
Shear along a vertical section extending across the full width of the base, at a distance equal to the
effective depth from the face of the loaded area, where the requirements of 5.4.4.1 apply.
(b)
Punching shear around the loaded area, where the requirements of 5.4.4.2 apply.
The shear strength of pile caps is governed by the more severe of the following two conditions:
(1)
Shear along any vertical section extending across the full width of the cap. The requirements of 5.4.4.1
apply, except that the enhancement of the shear resistance for sections close to supports (see 5.3.3.3) must
be applied only to strips of width not greater than twice the pile diameter centred on each pile. Where av
is taken as the distance between the face of the column or wall and the nearer edge of the piles, it must
be increased by 20% of the pile diameter. In applying 5.4.4.1, the allowable ultimate shear stress must be
taken as the average over the whole section.
(2)
Punching shear around loaded areas, where the requirements of 5.4.4.2 apply. When considering case (c)(ii)
of Figure 5, the allowable ultimate shear stress may be enhanced in accordance with 5.3.3.3, over a width
August 2015
A/57
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
not greater than twice the pile diameter centred on the corner pile. The short shear span enhancement factor
permitted for punching shear in 5.4.4.2 will often be beneficial when assessing pile caps.
5.7.3.2A Shear
With reference to the note (1) on the shear strength of pile caps, the short shear span enhancement factor is greater
than the BS 5400-4 value (see comment on 5.3.3.3). BS 8110-1 allows shear enhancement over a much greater
width than BS 5400-4. This rule is a relaxation of the BS 5400-4 rule but is still more conservative than BS 8110-1.
Difficulties can arise in applying 5.4.4.2 and Figure 5 to the assessment of certain pile caps (e.g. circular pile caps
with circumferential and radial bars). It is not possible to give general recommendations to cover all such situations,
and it is necessary to consider the actual punching shear failure surfaces which could occur. Useful information is
given in references (9), (27) and (38).
5.7.3.3 Bond and anchorage. The requirements of 5.8.6 apply to reinforcement in bases.
5.7.3.3A Bond and anchorage
The local bond sub-clause of BS 5400-4 is not relevant: see 5.8.6.2.
5.7.4
Deflection of bases. The deflection of bases need not be considered.
5.7.5
Crack control in bases. If required, crack widths may be calculated in accordance with 5.8.8.2 taking into
account the type of base and treatment of assessment (see 5.7.3.1).
5.8
Considerations of details
5.8.1
Constructional details
5.8.1.1 Size of members. Not applicable to assessment

5.8.1.2 Accuracy of position of reinforcement. When the reduced material partial safety factor for steel of 1.05
given in 4.3.3.3 is adopted for the worst credible strengths of steel reinforcement other than grade 460, then covers and
effective depths must be measured.
5.8.1.2A Accuracy of position of reinforcement
Guidance on the measurement of the location of reinforcement can be found in reference (39).
5.8.1.3 Construction joints. Not applicable to assessment
5.8.1.4 Movement joints. Not applicable to assessment
5.8.2
Concrete cover to reinforcement. Nominal cover is that dimension used in design and indicated on
the drawings. In accordance with the provisions of BS 5400-4, the actual cover may be up to 5mm less than the
nominal cover.
The nominal cover indicated on the drawings should be not less than the size of the bar or maximum aggregate size,
plus 5mm; in the case of a bundle of bars (see 5.8.3.1 and 5.8.8.1), it should be equal to or greater than the size of a
single bar of equivalent area plus 5mm.
A/58
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
Where surface treatment such as bush hammering has cut into the face of the concrete, the depth of treatment must
not be considered as contributing to the cover.
If the nominal cover is less than the values defined above, the bond strength of the reinforcing steel could be
reduced and the assessor must exercise appropriate engineering judgment in evaluating its contribution to the load
capacity.
5.8.2A
Concrete cover to reinforcement
Adequate cover to reinforcement should ideally be present in all concrete structures designed to standards
containing appropriate provisions for durability, and the cover generally varies with the concrete grade and with the
particular condition of exposure. When the cover is less than the size of the bar, bond strength could be reduced (40),
and reinforcement corrosion is most likely to occur. Guidance on the assessment of concrete structures affected by steel
corrosion and with low cover is given in BA 51 (DMRB 3.4.13).
5.8.3
Reinforcement: general considerations
5.8.3.1 Groups of bars. Subject to the reductions in bond stress, bars arranged as pairs in contact or in groups of
three or four bars bundled in contact must be considered as effective only if the following conditions are satisfied:
(1)
the bundle is restrained by links;
(2)
the bars in a bundle terminate at different points spaced at least 40 times the bar size apart except for
bundles stopping at a support;
(3)
bars in pairs or bundles of three may be lapped one bar at a time, but the laps must be so staggered that in
any cross-section there are no more than four bars in a bundle.
5.8.3.2 Bar schedule dimensions. Not applicable to assessment

5.8.4
Minimum area of reinforcement in members
5.8.4.1 Minimum area of main reinforcement. Not applicable to assessment

5.8.4.1A Minimum area of main reinforcement
The minimum areas of tension reinforcement in a beam or slab specified in BS 5400-4 are intended to ensure that
the reinforcement does not yield as soon as cracking occurs, and wide cracks are thereby avoided. This may also
be achieved by ensuring that the area of tension reinforcement is not less than 0.167 bad(ft/fy) (4) where ft is the
flexural tensile strength of the concrete, which may, in the absence of other information, be taken as 0.556 fcu. The
BS 5400-4 values can be obtained from this expression by assuming a value of 50 N/mm2 for fcu. Although it is
not considered necessary to impose a minimum steel area in a beam or slab for assessment purposes, the assessor
should be aware that if a section has less reinforcement than the specified minimum it may have adequate strength
but could develop wide cracks.
The minimum number of longitudinal bars present in a column should be four in rectangular columns and six
in circular columns. The BS 5400-4 minimum bar diameter of 12mm is intended to ensure a rigid cage for
construction. This requirement is not relevant to assessment. The BS 5400-4 minimum steel areas for columns
ensure that reinforcement yield does not occur under service load conditions (4). Although it is not considered
necessary to impose a minimum steel area for assessment purposes, the assessor should be aware that high service
load stresses can occur in columns having less than the BS 5400-4 minimum steel areas.
August 2015
A/59
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
A wall should not be considered as a reinforced concrete wall unless the percentage of vertical reinforcement
provided is at least 0.4% of the gross cross-sectional area of the concrete. This vertical reinforcement may be in one
or two layers. Failure to comply with the above requirement may result in large cracks developing.
5.8.4.2 Minimum area of secondary reinforcement
In a solid slab or wall, the main reinforcement may be considered able to resist compression if the area of
secondary reinforcement restraining the main reinforcement is at least 0.12% of btd in the case of high strength
reinforcement and 0.15% of btd in the case of mild steel reinforcement. The diameter of the secondary bars should
not be less than one-quarter of the size of the main bars and the spacing should not exceed 300mm.
When there is less secondary reinforcement than the specified minimum, the compressive strength of the bars must
be reduced in proportion to the ratio of the actual to specified minimum secondary steel areas, or alternatively the
reinforcement acting in compression omitted altogether from the respective strength calculations.
5.8.4.2A Minimum area of secondary reinforcement
Wide cracks may develop if the following minimum amounts of reinforcement are not present:
(1)
In the predominantly tensile area of a solid slab or wall, the minimum area of secondary reinforcement
should be not less than that given in the first paragraph of 5.8.4.1A.
(2)
In beams where the depth of the side face exceeds 600mm, longitudinal reinforcement should be present
having an area of at least 0.05% of bt d on each face with a spacing not exceeding 300mm, where:
bt is the breadth of the section at the level of tension reinforcement;

d is the effective depth to tension reinforcement.
(3)
In a voided slab, the amount of transverse reinforcement, expressed as a percentage of the minimum
flange cross-sectional area, should be at least 0.6% in the case of high strength steel and 1% in the case of
mild steel. These minimum areas are intended to prevent the first crack from immediately passing through
the flange thickness (4) whereas the minimum areas given in 5.8.4.1 merely ensure that the steel will not
yield at first cracking (41).
The purpose of the minimum amount of secondary steel in beams and slabs with compression reinforcement is to
restrain the latter reinforcement so that its full compressive strength can be developed. It should be noted that the
secondary reinforcement has to be arranged outside the main reinforcement for it to be considered as having the
potential to restrain the main reinforcement effectively.
The BS 5400-4 reference to early shrinkage and thermal cracking is not relevant to assessment.
5.8.4.3 Minimum area of links
When, in a beam or column, part or all of the main reinforcement is required to resist compression, links or ties at
least one-quarter the size of the largest compression bar should be present at a maximum spacing of 12 times the
size of the smallest compression bar. Links should be so arranged that every corner and alternate bar or group in an
outer layer of reinforcement is supported by a link passing round the bar and having an included angle of not more
than 135. All other bars or groups within a compression zone should be within 150mm of a restrained bar in order
to be considered effective in resisting compression.
For circular columns, where the longitudinal reinforcement is located round the periphery of a circle, adequate
lateral support is provided by a circular tie passing round the bars or groups.
A/60
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
When the percentage of reinforcement required to resist compression in the compression face of a wall or slab
exceeds 1%, links at least 6 mm or one-quarter of the size of the largest compression bar, whichever is the greater,
should be present through the thickness of the member. The spacing of these links should not exceed twice the
member thickness in either of the two principal directions of the member and be not greater than 16 times the bar
size in the direction of the compressive force.
When in a beam, column, wall or slab there is less link reinforcement than that specified in the above paragraphs,
the compressive strength of the bars must be reduced in proportion to the ratio of the actual to specified minimum
link areas, or alternatively the reinforcement acting in compression omitted altogether from the respective strength
calculations.
5.8.4.3A Minimum area of links
These minimum link requirements are intended to ensure restraint of compression bars so that their full
compressive strength can be developed.
As discussed in 5.3.3.2 and 5.3.3.2A, for links to be effective in a beam their spacing should not exceed the
effective depth of the beam, nor should the lateral spacing of the individual legs of the links exceed this value.
5.8.5
Maximum areas of reinforcement in members. Not applicable to assessment
5.8.5A Maximum areas of reinforcement in members

Maximum steel areas are specified in BS 5400-4 to ensure that concrete can be placed and compacted easily. These
maxima are not directly relevant to assessment. However where the steel areas exceed the BS 5400-4 maxima (4%
in beams, slab and walls, and 6% to 10% in columns) the concrete could be poorly compacted.
5.8.6
Bond, anchorage and bearing
5.8.6.1 Geometrical classification of deformed bars. For the purposes of this Standard there are two types of
deformed bars, as follows:
Type 1 A plain square twisted bar or a plain chamfered square twisted bar, each with a pitch of twist not greater
than 18 times the nominal size of the bar.
Type 2 A bar with transverse ribs with a substantial uniform spacing not greater than 0.8 f (and continuous helical ribs
where present), having a mean area of ribs (per unit length) above the core of the bar projected on a plane normal to the
axis of the bar, of not less than 0.15 mm/mm where f is the size (nominal diameter) of the bar.
5.8.6.2 Local bond. Not applicable to assessment
5.8.6.2A Local bond
Local bond stress is not considered applicable in assessment provided that at both sides of any cross section, the
force in each bar is developed by an appropriate embedment length or other end anchorage. Hence only anchorage
bond need to be considered.
5.8.6.3 Anchorage bond. To prevent bond failure the tension or compression in any bar at any section due to
ultimate loads must be developed on each side of the section by an appropriate embedment length or other end
anchorage. The anchorage bond stress, assumed to be constant over the effective anchorage length, taken as the force
August 2015
A/61
end anchorage. Hence only anchorage bond need to be considered.

Appendix
A
Volume
Section 4
5.8.6.3
Anchorage bond. To prevent bond failure the tension or compression
in any3bar
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/15
at any section due to ultimate loads must be developed on each side of the section by an
appropriate embedment length or other end anchorage. The anchorage bond stress, assumed to be
constant over the effective anchorage length, taken as the force in the bar divided by the product
in the bar
by theanchorage
product oflength
the effective
and the
effective
the(see
bar or group of
of divided
the effective
and theanchorage
effectivelength
perimeter
of the
bar orperimeter
group of of
bars
bars (see
5.8.6.4),must
mustnot
notexceed
exceedthe
thevalue
value f cu / mb where:
where:
5.8.6.4),

fcu
mb
is a coefficient dependent on bar type, and given in Table 15;

is a coefficient dependent on bar type, and given in Table 15;
fcu
is the characteristic, or worst credible, concrete cube strength;
is the characteristic, or worst credible, concrete cube strength;
mbis a partial
is a partial
safety factor equal to 1.4, unless the worst credible concrete strength is used, in
safety factor equal to 1.4, unless the worst credible concrete strength is used, in which case it is
which
case
it is equal to 1.25.
equal to 1.25.
Bar type
Plain bars
Bond coefficient
Bar type
Type 1: deformed bars

Fabric
Bars in tension
Bars
Bond coefficient
in compression
0.39
0.56 Bars in
tension
0.70
0.91
Plain bars
0.39
Type 1: deformed
bars
0.56
Table 15 Values of bond coefficient
0.70
5.8.6.3A AnchorageFabric
bond
0.91
0.49
0.70 in
Bars
compression
0.88
1.13
0.49
0.70
0.88
1.13
The allowable ultimate anchorage bond stress expression is that given in BS 8110-1 and gives values almost
identical to the BS 5400-4 Table 15 values. It should be noted that values have been included for fabric.
BS 8110-1 specifies a partial safety factor on the bond stress of 1.4. This partial safety factor allows for variations
in both Chapter/Page
concrete strength and bond strength (when the concrete strength is constant). If the worstMmmm/yyyy
credible concrete
strength is used it is reasonable to reduce the partial safety factor (see 4.3.3.3A). If it is assumed that mb can be
expressed as (mc mbs), where mc allows for the variation in concrete strength and mbs allows for the variation
in bond strength, then with mc and mb equal to their design values of 1.5 and 1.4, respectively, mbs = 1.31.
Hence, if mc is equal to its assessment value of 1.20 when using the worst credible concrete strength (see 4.3.3.3),
mb=(1.20 x 1.31) = 1.25.
The BS 5400-4 allowable ultimate anchorage bond stresses in Table 15 are functions of only concrete strength, bar
type and whether the bar is in tension or compression. Hence, the bond failure mechanism is grossly simplified by
BS 5400-4 because it is assumed that the codes covers, nominal link requirements and detailing sub-clauses will
be satisfied. In an assessment these various sub-clauses are often not satisfied and it may be necessary to express
allowable ultimate anchorage bond stresses in terms of the additional variables of cover, bar diameter and spacing,
quantity and arrangement of restraining reinforcement, lateral pressure applied by external loads or reactions and
location of bar within the member. Further guidance on these aspects can be obtained from references (40) and (42-48).
Reference should also be made to 8.4, 8.5 and 8.6 of BS EN 1992-1-1. Methods of analysis to evaluate the post-slip
behaviour of partially anchored bars should be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.
5.8.6.4 Effective perimeter of a bar or group of bars. The effective perimeter of a bar may be taken as 3.14 times
the nominal size. The effective perimeter of a group of bars (see 5.8.3.1) must be taken as the sum of the effective
perimeters of the individual bars multiplied by (1.2-0.2N), where N ( 4) is the number of bars in the group.
5.8.6.4A Effective perimeter of a bar or group of bars
The multiplier (1.2-0.2N) gives the same values as Table 16 of BS 5400-4. Test data do not appear to be available
for more than 4 bars in a group.
A/62
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
5.8.6.5 Anchorage of links. A link may be considered to be fully anchored if it passes round another bar through an
angle of 90 and continues beyond for a minimum length of eight times its own size, or through 150 and continues for
a minimum length of four times its own size. Where full anchorage of links is not achieved, its effective size must be
taken as the equivalent bar diameter that the anchorage provides.
5.8.6.6 Laps and joints. Continuity of reinforcement may be achieved by a connection using any of the following
jointing methods:
(a)
lapping bars;
(b)
butt welding (see 4.7);
(c)
sleeving (see 7.3.2.2);
(d)
threading of bars (see 7.3.2.3).
The strength of joints using the methods given in (c) and (d) and any other method not listed must be verified by
test evidence (see 7.3.2.1).
5.8.6.7 Lap lengths. When bars are lapped, the strength of the lap must be derived from 5.8.6.3 from the
anchorage bond of the smaller of the two bars lapped. The lap strength as calculated above must be reduced for bars
in tension by a factor of 1.4 if any of the following conditions apply:
(a)
the cover to the lapped bars from the top of the section as cast is less than twice the bar size;
(b)
the clear distance between the lap and another pair of lapped bars is less than 150 mm;
(c)
a corner bar is lapped and the cover to either face is less than twice the bar size.
Where conditions (a) and (b) or conditions (a) and (c) apply the lap strength must be reduced by a factor of 2.0.
The minimum lap length for bar reinforcement under any condition must not be less than 15 times the size of the
smaller of the two bars lapped. Where the minimum lap length is not achieved the effective size of the smaller bar
at the section must be determined as being l/15 where l is the lap length provided.
The factors of 1.4 and 2.0 should be applied only to the calculated lap strengths of bars in tension.
5.8.6.8 Hooks and bends. Hooks, bends and other reinforcement anchorages should be of such form, dimension and
arrangement as to avoid overstressing the concrete.
The effective anchorage length of a hook or bend must be measured from the start of the bend to a point four times
the bar size beyond the end of the bend, and may be taken as the lesser of 24 times the bar size or:
(a)
for a hook, eight times the internal radius of the hook;
(b)
for a 90 bend, four times the internal radius of the bend.
The radius of the bend must not be less than twice the radius of the test bend guaranteed by the manufacturer of the
bar. However, it will be sufficient to ensure that the bearing stress at the mid-point of the curve does not exceed the
value given in 5.8.6.9.
August 2015
A/63
Appendix
AA
Appendix
Amendments
toto
BSBS
5400-4
Amendments
5400-4
Volume43 Section 4
Volume 3 Section
Part 14 BD 44/15
Part 14 BD 44/XX
The
effective
length
a hook or
whichofdoes
not satisfy
paragraphs
3 and
4 of
For
a hooked
baranchorage
to be effective
at of
a support,
thebend
beginning
the hook
must be
at least four
times
the bar size
inside
the face of must
the support.
this sub-clause
be taken as not greater than the actual length of bar from the start of the bend
to a point four times the bar size beyond the end of the bend.
The effective anchorage length of a hook or bend which does not satisfy paragraphs 3 and 4 of this sub-clause must
be5.8.6.8A
taken as not greater
than
thebends
actual length of bar from the start of the bend to a point four times the bar size
Hooks
and
beyond
the
end
of
the
bend.
An additional paragraph has been added to the BS 5400-4 sub-clause to clarify the anchorage
value of hooks and bends which do not satisfy the BS 5400-4 requirements.
5.8.6.8A Hooks and bends
5.8.6.9
Bearing stress inside bends. The bearing stress inside a bend, in a bar which
An additional paragraph has been added to the BS 5400-4 sub-clause to clarify the anchorage value of hooks and
does which
not extend
is not the
assumed
to berequirements.
stressed beyond a point four times the bar size past the
bends
do notorsatisfy
BS 5400-4
end of the bend, need not be checked.
5.8.6.9 Bearing stress inside bends. The bearing stress inside a bend, in a bar which does not extend or is not
The bearing
inside
a bend
in any
be past
calculated
the
equation:
assumed
to be stress
stressed
beyond
a point
fourother
timesbar
the must
bar size
the endfrom
of the
bend,
need not be checked.
The bearing
stress stress
inside =a F
bend
in any other bar must be calculated from the equation:
Bearing
bt/(r)
where Bearing stress = Fbt/(rf)
where
F
is the tensile force due to ultimate loads in a bar or group of bars;
Fbt
r
r
f
is the internal radius of the bend;
bt
is the tensile force due to ultimate loads in a bar or group of bars;

is the internal radius of the bend;
is the size of the bar or, in a bundle, the size of a bar of equivalent area.
is the size of the bar or, in a bundle, the size of a bar of equivalent area.
The stress must not exceed
The stress must not exceed

1/3
5.63 ab
l
( )
( ) f cu
ll
mc

where
where
aba
l1
l
for aa particular
must
bebe
taken
as the
centre-to-centre
distance between bars
for
particularbar
barororgroup
groupofofbars
barsinincontact
contact
must
taken
as the
centre-to-centre
or
groups
of
bars
perpendicular
to
the
plane
of
the
bend;
for
a
bar
or
group
of
bars
adjacent
distance between bars or groups of bars perpendicular to the plane of the bend; for a barto the face of
the member, ab must be taken as the cover plus f. The ratio of ab/f must not exceed 8.
or group of bars
adjacent to the face of the member, ab must be taken as the cover plus .
is the length of the bar measured inside the bend and bearing
on to the concrete.
The
of ab/ofmust
not exceed
is theratio
thickness
concrete
member8.in the plane of the bend, but not greater than 3l .
1
l1
length
of the
bar measured
inside
the bend and bearing on to the concrete.
in 4.3.3.3.
Values
of is
thethe
partial
safety
factor
mc are given
l
is
the thickness
of concrete
5.8.6.9A
Bearing
stress inside
bends member in the plane of the bend, but not greater than 3l1.
(49) which show the BS 5400-4 requirement to be
The
allowable
based
onintests
Values
of thebearing
partial stress
safetyexpression
factor mc isare
given
4.3.3.3.
conservative. The maximum values of l = 3li and ab/f = 8 represent the limits of the test evidence available.
5.8.6.9A
Bearing stress inside bends
(49)
5.8.7
Curtailment
andstress
anchorage
of reinforcement.
Curtailment
lengths
and
of bars must be
The allowable
bearing
expression
is based on tests
which
show
theanchorages
BS 5400-4
assessed by rigorous analysis at the curtailment or anchorage point for the worst load case in accordance with
requirement to be conservative. The maximum values of l = 3li and ab/ = 8 represent the
5.8.6.3. Where the actual anchorage length of a bar is less than the full anchorage length required from 5.8.6.3, its
limits of the test evidence available.
effective area may be reduced in proportion to the ratio between the actual anchorage length and the full anchorage
length.
5.8.7
Curtailment and anchorage of reinforcement. Curtailment lengths and
anchorages of bars must be assessed either by rigorous analysis at the curtailment or anchorage
A/64
Mmmm/yyyy
August 2015
Chapter/Page
bar is less than the full anchorage length required from 5.8.6.3, its effective area may be reduced
in proportion to the ratio between the actual anchorage length and the full anchorage length.
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14
BD 44/15
5.8.7A
Curtailment and anchorage of reinforcement
Appendix A
The assessment is based on a rigorous analysis of the forces at the curtailment point for the
worst load case. In carrying out such an analysis the actual bending moment distributions
5.8.7A
and anchorage
reinforcement
needCurtailment
to be considered,
and it isofalso
essential to take account of the fact that the tension
reinforcement has to resist tensile forces which arise from both the bending moment and the
(4, 50-51)
The assessment
is based
a rigorous
of the forces
at the
curtailment
point for
the worst
loadthe
case. In
shear force
at the on
section
underanalysis
consideration
. This
is particularly
relevant
when
carrying out such an analysis the actual bending moment distributions need to be considered, and it is also essential
alternative approach of 5.3.3.5 based on BS EN 1992-1-1 is used.
to take account of the fact that the tension reinforcement has to resist tensile forces which arise from both the
bending moment and the shear force at the section under consideration (4, 50-51). This is particularly relevant when
5.8.8 Spacing of reinforcement
the alternative approach of 5.3.3.5 based on BS EN 1992-1-1 is used.
Minimum distance between bars. "Not applicable to assessment"

Spacing of reinforcement
5.8.8 5.8.8.1
5.8.8.1A
Minimum
distance
bars to assessment
Minimum distance
between
bars.between
5.8.8.1
Not applicable
Minimum bar spacings are specified in BS 5400-4 to aid placing and compacting of concrete.
Minimum
between relevant
bars
5.8.8.1A
These
minimadistance
are not directly
to assessment. However, in sections where the bar
spacings are less than the BS 5400-4 minima, the concrete could be poorly compacted and
Minimum
bar spacings
are should
specifiedbeingiven
BS 5400-4
to aid placing
andsections.
compacting of concrete. These minima are not
particular
attention
to inspection
of such
directly relevant to assessment. However, in sections where the bar spacings are less than the BS 5400-4 minima,
the concrete
compacted
and between
particular bars
attention
should.be
givenrequired
to inspection
such sections.
5.8.8.2could be poorly
Maximum
distance
in tension
When
by theofOverseeing
Organisation as part of serviceability limit state checks, crack widths under the specified loads
5.8.8.2 Maximum distance between bars in tension. When required by the Overseeing Organisation as part of
must be calculated in accordance with the following:
serviceability limit state checks, crack widths under the specified loads must be calculated in accordance with the
following:
(a)
(a)
For solid rectangular sections, stems of T beams and other solid sections shaped without
angles, sections,
the crackstems
widths
the surface
(or, where
the cover
to the
outermost
bar angles,
Forre-entrant
solid rectangular
of at
T beams
and other
solid sections
shaped
without
re-entrant
greater
thanatcthe
on a surface
at a distance
from
the outermost
bar) must
nom,surface
nom
theiscrack
widths
(or, where
the covercto
the
outermost
bar is greater
than cbe
nom, on a surface
calculated
from
the
following
equation:
at a distance cnom from the outermost bar) must be calculated from the following equation:
Crack

Crack width
width =
3 a cr m
Equation 2424
Equation
1 + 2( acr - c)/(h - d c )
where
where
acr
is the distance from the point (crack) considered to the surface of the nearest bar which controls the crack
acr width;
is the distance from the point (crack) considered to the surface of the nearest bar which
crack
width;
cnom
is thecontrols
nominalthe
cover
to the
outermost reinforcement (see 5.8.2);
c
is
the
nominal
cover
to
the outermostwhich
reinforcement
(see
5.8.2);
nom
c
is the effective cover to the reinforcement
controls the
width
of the cracks under consideration and
c mustisbethe
effective
reinforcement
which
controls theand
width
of the cracks under
taken
as the cover
lesser to
of the
(a) actual
cover to this
reinforcement
(b) perpendicular
distance from
consideration to
and
must beattaken
as thecnom
lesser
ofthe
(a)outermost
actual cover
to this reinforcement and
this reinforcement
a surface
a distance
from
bars;
perpendicular
distance
from this reinforcement
to a surface
at a distance
cnom using
from the
dc
is the(b)
depth
of the concrete
in compression
(if dc = 0 the crack
widths must
be calculated
Equation
26); outermost bars;
Aisoverall
Volume
4
h Appendix
depth
section;in compression (if dc = 0 the crack widths
dc is the
the depth
of of
thethe
concrete
must3beSection
calculated
Amendments
to BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
m
is theusing
calculated
strain
at
the
level
where
cracking
is
being
considered,
allowing
for
the
stiffening
effect of
Equation 26);
in the depth
tensionofzone;
a negative value of m indicates that the section is uncracked. The value
h the concrete
is the overall
the section;
of
must
be
obtained
from
the
equation:
m the calculated strain at the
m
is
level where cracking is being considered, allowing for the
stiffening effect of the concrete in the tension zone; a negative value of m indicates that

3.8bt h(a dThe
M q must_ 9 be
c ) value
obtained from the
equation:
= section
) 10 Equation
Equation
25 25
1 - is uncracked.
m the
(1 of m

(h

)
d

A
M
s
g
s
c

but not greater than 1.

Chapter/Page
where
Mmmm/yyyy
is the calculated strain at the level where cracking is being considered, ignoring the
stiffening effect of the concrete in the tension zone;
bt
is the width of the section at the level of the centroid of the tension steel;
a'
is
the distance from the compression face to the point at which the crack width is being
August 2015
calculated;
Mg
is the moment at the section considered due to permanent loads;
A/65

where
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
is the calculated strain at the level where cracking is being considered, ignoring the
stiffening effect of the concrete in the tension zone;
bwhere
is the width of the section at the level of the centroid of the tension steel;
t
a'
is the distance from the compression face to the point at which the crack width is being
is the calculated strain at the level where cracking is being considered, ignoring the stiffening effect of the
1
calculated;
in theattension
zone;considered due to permanent loads;
Mg
isconcrete
the moment
the section
themoment
width ofatthe
at considered
the level of due
the centroid
of the tension steel;
bt q
isisthe
thesection
section
to live loads;
M
is
the
distance
from
the
compression
face
to
the
point
at which
the the
crack
width is effect
being of
calculated;
a'
s
is the calculated strain at the centroid of reinforcement,
ignoring
stiffening
Mg
is
the
moment
at
the
section
considered
due
to
permanent
loads;
the concrete in the tension zone;
thearea
moment
at the reinforcement.
section considered due to live loads;
M
q
As
isisthe
of tension
s
is the calculated strain at the centroid of reinforcement, ignoring the stiffening effect of the concrete in the
tension zone;
Where the axis of the moment and the direction of the tensile reinforcement resisting that
As
is the area of tension reinforcement.
moment are not normal to each other (e.g. in a skew slab), As must be taken as:
Where the axis of the moment

and the direction of the tensile reinforcement resisting that moment are not normal to
4
As (e.g.
= (A
1slab),
)
each other
int acos
skew
As must be taken as:
where
As = S(At cos4 1)
where
A
is the area of reinforcement in a particular direction;
t
is the angle between the normal to the axis of the moment and the direction of the tensile
1
is the area
of reinforcement
in a particular direction;
At
reinforcement,
At, resisting
that moment.
1
(b)
(b)
is the angle between the normal to the axis of the moment and the direction of the tensile reinforcement,
that moment.
t, resisting
ForAflanges
in overall
tension, including tensile zones of box beams, rectangular voided
slabs and, when subjected to longitudinal bending, circular voided slabs, the crack width at
For flanges in overall tension, including tensile zones of box beams, rectangular voided slabs and, when
the surface (or at a distance cnom from the outermost bar) must be calculated from the
subjected to longitudinal bending, circular voided slabs, the crack width at the surface (or at a distance
following equation:
cnom from the outermost bar) must be calculated from the following equation:
Crack
Equation 26
26
Crackwidth
width == 33 aacr m Equation
cr
where
obtainedfrom
from
Equation
Equation
25.25.
where mmisisobtained
For flanges
flangesof
ofcircular
circularvoided
voidedslabs
slabssubjected
subjected
transverse
bending,
crack
width
the surface
to to
transverse
bending,
the the
crack
width
at theatsurface
(or at a distance
the outermost
bar)the
must
be calculated
from be
thecalculated
following equation:
cnomatfrom
(or
a distance
cnom from
outermost
bar) must
from the following equation:

1.2 m ( h f / net ) (c/ ) Equation

Equation 26A 26A
Crack
Crackwidth
width =
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
is the minimum flange thickness;
hf
hf
is the minimum flange thickness;
net
is the area of transverse reinforcement in the flange as a percentage of the minimum flange area;
f net
isis
of transverse
reinforcement
in the
flange as a percentage of the minimum
the
diameter
of the
theoutermost
outermost
transverse
bar;
isthe
thearea
diameter
of
transverse
bar;
where
where
flange area;
m

3.8 bt h f
Mq
) 10-9 Equation
Equation 25A 25A
(1
Mg
s As

1
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
be obtained
(c)
Whereglobal
globaland
andlocal
local effects
effects are
are calculated
ofof
mmay
(c) Where
calculatedseparately
separately(see
(see4.8.3)
4.8.3)the
thevalue
value
m may be
by
algebraic
addition
of
the
strains
calculated
separately.
The
crack
width
must
then
be
calculated
in
obtained by algebraic addition of the strains calculated separately. The crack width must
accordance
with
(b)
but
may,
in
the
case
of
deck
slab
where
a
global
compression
is
being
combined
with
then be calculated in accordance with (b) but may, in the case of deck slab where a global
a local moment, be obtained using (a), calculating dc on the basis of the local moment only.
compression is being combined with a local moment, be obtained using (a), calculating dc
on the basis of the local moment only.
5.8.8.2A
Maximum distance between bars in tension
The main reason for limiting maximum bar spacings in design is to control crack widths.
A/66
August 2015
Assessment sub-clause 5.8.8.2 is very similar to the BS 5400-4 sub-clause but has been
rearranged as a "crack width calculation" sub-clause. The general spacing of 300mm and the
limit for voided slabs in (d) of the BS 5400-4 sub-clause have been omitted because they are
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
5.8.8.2A Maximum distance between bars in tension

The main reason for limiting maximum bar spacings in design is to control crack widths. Assessment sub-clause
5.8.8.2 is very similar to the BS 5400-4 sub-clause but has been rearranged as a crack width calculation subclause. The general spacing of 300mm and the limit for voided slabs in (d) of the BS 5400-4 sub-clause have been
omitted because they are not directly relevant to assessment.
In (b), Equation 26 is not appropriate for calculating crack widths in voided slabs subjected to transverse bending.
An additional Equation, 26A, has been added for these situations, which is based on (41). Similarly, a more
appropriate tension stiffening formula has been added (52, 53).
The approaches given in (c) are conservative. A more accurate method is to base calculations on the strains due to
the combined global and local effects.
5.8.9
Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement. Not applicable to assessment
5.8.10
Arrangement of reinforcement in skew slabs. Not applicable to assessment
5.8.10A Arrangement of reinforcement in skew slabs

Many existing skew slab bridges have very small amounts of transverse reinforcement compared with the amounts
required to comply with current design standards. However, a small amount of transverse reinforcement does not
necessarily imply that the bridge is inadequate. When required, yield line theory can often be used to demonstrate
that such a bridge has adequate strength, although such decks may suffer from serviceability problems due to
premature yielding of the transverse reinforcement, and may warrant more frequent inspection and maintenance. In
using yield line theory it is not always possible to state in advance which will be the critical collapse mechanism,
particularly for continuous decks. Hence, the assessing engineer will need to consult specialist literature. Guidance
on the application of yield line methods of analysis for concrete slabs is given in references (5) and (26).
5.9
Additional considerations in the use of lightweight aggregate concrete
5.9.1 General. Lightweight aggregate concrete may generally be assessed in accordance with the requirements
of clause 4 and of 5.1 to 5.8. Sub-clauses 5.9.2 to 5.9.11 relate specifically to reinforced lightweight aggregate
concrete of strength 25 N/mm or above. Only the requirements of 7.5 (plain concrete walls) apply to concretes
below a strength of 25 N/mm.
For lightweight aggregate concrete, the properties for any particular type of aggregate can be established far more
accurately than for most naturally occurring materials and, when the aggregate type can be identified, specific data
must be obtained from the aggregate producer.
All the properties of lightweight aggregate concrete to be used in assessment must be supported by appropriate test
data.
5.9.2 Durability. Not applicable to assessment
5.9.3
Strength of concrete. See 5.1.4.2.
5.9.4
Shear resistance of beams. The shear resistance of lightweight aggregate concrete beams must be
established in accordance with 5.3.3.1 to 5.3.3.3 except that the value of vc calculated from the expression given in
5.3.3.2 must be multiplied by 0.9 and the maximum allowable value of v referred to in 5.3.3.1 and 5.3.3.3 must be
multiplied by 0.8.
August 2015
A/67
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
5.9.4A Shear resistance of beams

BS 5400-4 applies a reduction factor of 0.8 to vc for lightweight aggregate concrete. The higher values in this
Standard are consistent with test data (54).
Torsional resistance of beams. The torsional resistance of lightweight aggregate concrete beams must be
5.9.5
established in accordance with 5.3.4 except that the values of vtmin and vtu calculated from the expressions given in
5.3.4.3 must be multiplied by 0.8.
5.9.6
Deflection of beams. Where required, deflection of lightweight aggregate concrete beams may be
calculated using a value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete as described in 4.3.2.1.
5.9.7
Shear resistance of slabs. The shear resistance of lightweight aggregate concrete slabs must be
established in accordance with 5.4.4, except that vc and the maximum allowable value of v must be modified in
5.9.8
Deflection of slabs. Where required, deflection of lightweight aggregate concrete slabs may be calculated
using a value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete as described in 4.3.2.1.
5.9.9 Columns
5.9.9.1 General. The requirements of 5.5 apply to lightweight aggregate concrete columns subject to the
conditions in 5.9.9.2 and 5.9.9.3.
5.9.9.2 Short columns. In 5.5.1.1, the ratio of effective height, le, to thickness, h, for a short column must not
exceed 10.
5.9.9.3 Slender columns. In 5.5.5, the divisor 1750 in Equations 18, 20, 21 and 22 must be replaced by the
divisor 1200.
5.9.10 Local bond, anchorage bond and laps. Anchorage bond stresses and lap lengths in reinforcement for
lightweight aggregate concrete members must be assessed in accordance with 5.8.6 except that the bond stresses
must not exceed 80% of those given in 5.8.6.3.
In lightweight aggregate concrete members containing foamed slag however, bond stresses must not exceed 50% of
those given in 5.8.6.3 for reinforcement that was in a horizontal position during casting.
5.9.10A Local bond, anchorage bond and laps
Anchorage bond stresses for mild steel bars embedded in lightweight aggregate concrete have been increased from
50% to 80% of those for normal weight aggregate concrete (see BS 8110-2).
5.9.11 Bearing stress inside bends. The requirements of 5.8.6.9 apply to lightweight aggregate concrete, except
that the bearing stress must not exceed two-thirds of the allowable value given by the expression in 5.8.6.9.
A/68
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
6.
Appendix A
ASSESSMENT: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
6.1 General
6.1.1 Introduction. This clause gives methods of assessment which will in general assure that, for prestressed
concrete construction, the requirements set out in 4.1 are met. In certain cases the assumptions made in this clause
may be inappropriate and the assessor may adopt, with the approval of the Overseeing Organisation, a more
suitable method having regard to the nature of the structure in question.
Assessment criteria for post-tensioned structures where inadequately grouted ducts and/or tendon corrosion is
encountered must be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.
This clause covers prestressed concrete construction using external and/or unbonded tendons. It does not cover
prestressed concrete construction using lightweight aggregate concrete.
6.1.1A Introduction
Bonded prestressing is prestressing where, in the finished structure, continuous bond is provided between the
prestressing elements and the concrete section. This is always the case in pre-tensioned structures, except for zones
where debonding sleeves are present. In post-tensioned structures, bond between the prestressing elements and
the concrete is generally provided by the provision of grout in ducts after stressing. Where no continuous bond is
provided the prestressing is termed unbonded. The term external prestressing is applied to that class of unbonded
prestressed structures where some or all of the prestressing is unbonded and outside the concrete section, and where
the load is transferred to the concrete through end anchorages and deviators. Unbonded internal prestressing is
where unbonded prestressing elements are used in ducts which lie within the concrete section.
When tendon corrosion is encountered in an assessment (which is often associated with the ingress of de-icing salts
through inadequately grouted ducts), the normal rules for prestressed concrete should be modified by taking into
account the following:
i)
Local failure of wires or strands may occur when the tendon strength is reduced to the prestressing force.
Hence, wires which have suffered sectional loss which has resulted in them being unable to sustain their
prestress force (typically a 40% section loss) should be considered ineffective. The strength of a section at
the ultimate limit state should be based on the remaining cross-sectional area of the effective wires only.
ii)
In bonded post-tensioning, tendons, strands or wires which are ineffective locally can re-anchor and
become fully effective elsewhere. The anchorage length will depend on the quality of the grouting in the
ducts. Where the grouting is good and where nominal links to BS 5400-4 are provided, the re-anchorage
length may be taken as the transmission length given in 6.7.4 multiplied by the square root of the number
of strands in the tendon.
iii)
Where there is evidence of extensive inadequate grouting or where the BS5400-4 minimum link
requirement is not met, assessments which depend on re-anchorage of tendons should not be undertaken
without special investigation. Where in the opinion of the assessor the grouting is too poor to allow reanchorage of tendons, the member should be treated as unbonded and assessed accordingly.
iv)
In external and/or unbonded prestressing, failure of a tendon at any position makes it ineffective over
its entire length. Hence structures with unbonded prestressing may be vulnerable to a disproportionate
collapse, which is particularly true for continuous bridge decks where localised failure in one span could
result in progressive collapse of the spans. Structures with external and/or unbonded prestressing should
be checked to ensure that failure of either any two tendons or 25% of those at one section, whichever has
the more onerous effect, would not lead to collapse at the ultimate limit states under permanent loads.
August 2015
A/69
Appendix A
v)
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
In assessing the strength of a structure with corroded tendons, there is a need to consider the possibility
of further deterioration. Management strategies for keeping damaged, deteriorating and substandard
structures in service will need information on sensitivity of the load assessment to further loss of
prestress. Information on possible failure modes is essential for the design of monitoring schemes.
Further guidance in assessing structures with tendon corrosion is given in BA 51 (DMRB 3.4.13).
If the extent of tendon corrosion cannot be directly measured by observing damage to steel, overall levels of
prestress in a member can be determined from concrete stress measurements. Before adopting this approach, the
agreement of the Overseeing Organisation should be obtained. Specialist advice should also be sought. As there is
a possibility of significant errors in determining the level of prestress, spot checks on levels of remaining prestress
in individual tendons should also be made. In calculations, it will always be necessary to assume a value of
effective prestress to a greater accuracy than is actually known. Calculations should therefore be performed using
an upper and lower bound to the estimated effective prestress. In practice, the lower bound will normally be critical
for assessments. Having estimated the effective level of prestress in a structure, the flexural, shear and torsional
strength can be assessed.
Additional requirements and modifications to the BS 5400-4 provisions are introduced throughout clause 6
specifically for the assessment of prestressed concrete structures with external and/or unbonded tendons. Specialist
literature on this topic may also need to be consulted (55, 56).
Guidance on prestressed lightweight concrete can be found in reference (57).
6.1.2
Limit state assessment of prestressed concrete
6.1.2.1 Basis of assessment. Clause 6 follows the limit state philosophy set out in 3.1B to 3.6B.
6.1.2.2 Durability. Not applicable to assessment
6.1.2.3 Other limit states and considerations. Clause 6 does not specify special requirements for vibration or
other limit states.
6.1.3 Loads. In clause 6 the assessment load effects (see 2.1) for the ultimate and serviceability limit states are
referred to as ultimate loads and service loads respectively.
The values of the ultimate loads and service loads to be used in assessment are derived from 4.2.
In clause 6, when analysing sections, the terms strength, resistance and capacity are used to describe the
assessment resistance of the section (see BD 21, DMRB 3.4.3).
Consideration must be given, at both ultimate and serviceability limit states as appropriate, to the construction
sequence and to the secondary effects due to prestress.
6.1.4
Strength of materials
6.1.4.1 Definition of strength. In clause 6 the symbol fcu represents either the characteristic or the worst credible
cube strength of the concrete; and the symbol fpu represents either the characteristic or the worst credible tendon
strength.
The assessment strengths of concrete and prestressing tendons are given by fcu/mc and fpu/ms, respectively, where
mc and ms are the appropriate material partial safety factors given in 4.3.3.3.
A/70
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
6.1.4.2 Strength of concrete. Assessment may be based on either the specified characteristic cube strength, or the
worst credible cube strength determined in accordance with 2.4B to 2.11B. For structures designed to codes prior to
the adoption of the term characteristic strength, the concrete strength was specified in terms of the minimum 28day
works cube strength. For the purpose of assessment, the characteristic strength of concrete may be taken as the
minimum 28 day works cube strength.
Appendix
A
Volume 33 Section
Appendix
A
Section 44 strength,
6.1.4.3 Strength
of5400-4
prestressing tendons. Assessment may be based on either theVolume
specified
characteristic
Amendments
to
BS
Part
14
BD
44/XX
Amendments
to BS 5400-4
Part
14 BD For
44/XX
or the worst credible
strength assessed from tests on tendon samples extracted from the
structure.
structures
designed to codes prior to the adoption of the term characteristic strength, the tendon strength was specified in
terms ofStructures
minimum ultimate
strength. For the purpose of assessment, the characteristic strength of tendons may be
6.2
6.2
Structures and
and structural
structural frames
frames
taken as the minimum ultimate strength.
6.2.1
Analysis
of structures
.. Complete
6.2.1
Analysis
structures
Complete structures
structures and
and complete
complete structural
structural frames
frames may
may
Structures
andof
structural
frames
6.2
be
analysed
in
accordance
with
the
requirements
of
4.4
but,
when
appropriate,
the
methods
be analysed in accordance with the requirements of 4.4 but, when appropriate, the methods given
given
in
in 6.3
6.3 may
may be
be used
used for
for the
the assessment
assessment of
of individual
individual members.
members.
6.2.1
Analysis of structures. Complete structures and complete structural frames may be analysed in
accordance with the requirements of 4.4 but, when appropriate, the methods given in 6.3 may be used for the
The
relative
stiffness
of
must be based on the concrete section as described in 4.4.2.1.
The
relativeof
stiffness
of members
members
assessment
individual
members.must be based on the concrete section as described in 4.4.2.1.
6.2.2
Redistribution
moments
.. Redistribution
of
moments
obtained
by
rigorous
The relative stiffness
of membersof
be based
on the concrete
as described
6.2.2
Redistribution
ofmust
moments
Redistribution
ofsection
moments
obtained in
by4.4.2.1.
rigorous
elastic
analysis
under
the
ultimate
limit
state
may
be
carried
out
provided
the
following
elastic analysis under the ultimate limit state may be carried out provided the following
conditions
are
6.2.2
Redistribution
of moments. Redistribution of moments obtained by rigorous elastic analysis under the
conditions
are met:
met:
ultimate limit state may be carried out provided the following conditions are met:
(a)
Appropriate
(a)
Appropriate checks
checks are
are made
made to
to ensure
ensure that
that adequate
adequate rotation
rotation capacity
capacity exists
exists at
at sections
sections
(a) moments
Appropriate
checks are
madereference
to ensure to
that
adequate rotation
capacity
exists at sections
where moments
where
are
reduced,
making
appropriate
test
data.
For
structures
where moments are reduced, making reference to appropriate test data. For structures which
which do
do
are
reduced,
making
reference
to
appropriate
test
data.
For
structures
which
do
not
contain
external and/or
not
not contain
contain external
external and/or
and/or unbonded
unbonded tendons,
tendons, in
in the
the absence
absence of
of aa special
special investigation
investigation the
the plastic
plastic
unbonded tendons,
in thethe
absence ofof:
a special investigation the plastic rotation capacity may be taken as
rotation
rotation capacity
capacity may
may be
be taken
taken as
as the lesser
lesser of:
the lesser of:
dd c
(1)
0.008
+ 0.035
0.035 (0.5
(0.5
(1)
0.008 +
d c ))
(1)
d ee
or
or
or
10
dd
dd c
10
(2)
(2)
(2)
but not
less than0 0
but
but not
not less
less than
than 0
where
where
where
d
is the calculated depth of concrete in compression at the ultimate limit state (in mm);
c
is
calculated
depth
of
in
compression
at
limit
state
mm);
ddc
is the
the
of concrete
concrete
compression
at the
the ultimate
ultimate
state (in
(in
de calculated
is thedepth
effective
depth forin
a solid
slab or rectangular
beam,limit
otherwise
themm);
overall depth of the
c
is
the
effective
depth
for
a
solid
slab
or
rectangular
beam,
otherwise
the
overall
depth
dde
compression
mm);
is the effective
depth forflange
a solid(inslab
or rectangular beam, otherwise the overall depth of
of
e
the
compression
flange
(in
mm);
d
is the(in
effective
the compression
flange
mm); depth to tension reinforcement (in mm).
dd
is
is the
the effective
effective depth
depth to
to tension
reinforcement (in
(in mm)
mm)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(c)
Proper account is taken of changes in transverse moments and transverse shears consequent on
Proper
account
of
in
redistribution
longitudinal
moments.
Proper
account is
isoftaken
taken
of changes
changes
in transverse
transverse moments
moments and
and transverse
transverse shears
shears
consequent
consequent on
on redistribution
redistribution of
of longitudinal
longitudinal moments
moments
Shears and reactions used in assessment are taken as those calculated either prior to or after redistribution,
whichever
are the greater.
Shears
and reactions
used in assessment are taken as those calculated either prior to or
(c)
(c)
Shears and reactions used in assessment are taken as those calculated either prior to or
after
redistribution,
after redistribution, whichever
whichever are
are the
the greater.
greater.
6.2.2A
Redistribution
6.2.2A
Redistribution of
of moments
moments
When
aa linear
analysis
is
performed,
both
When
linear
analysis
is
performed,
both primary
primary and
and secondary
secondary effects
effects of
of prestressing
prestressing
August 2015
should
be
applied
before
any
redistribution
of
moments
is
calculated.
should be applied before any redistribution of moments is calculated.
Item (2) in 6.2.2 was derived from the ultimate elongation and gauge length specified in
A/71
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15

When a linear analysis is performed, both primary and secondary effects of prestressing should be applied before
any redistribution of moments is calculated.
Item (2) in 6.2.2 was derived from the ultimate elongation and gauge length specified in British Standards for
various types of prestressing steels and from data provided by manufacturers of prestressing steels. For tendons
installed before the 1970s or for tendons not specified to British Standards, information should be obtained on the
tendons ductility from past records.
6.3 Beams
6.3.1 General
6.3.1.1 Definitions. The definitions and limitations of the geometric properties for prestressed beams are as given
for reinforced concrete beams in 5.3.1.
6.3.1.2 Slender beams. Not applicable to assessment
6.3.2
Serviceability Limit State: flexure. The tensile stress calculated on the gross concrete section under the
loading given in 4.2 must be checked against the class 2 values from BS 5400-4, i.e. it must not exceed the design
flexural tensile strength of (0.56/mc) (fcu)1/2. The compressive stress must be limited to 0.5(fcu/mc). The calculated
tensile stress at unreinforced contact joints in segmental structures with precast elements must not exceed 0.0 N/
mm2, i.e. no tensile stress is allowed, except for cement mortar joints, where the stress must be in compression
throughout and not less than 1.5 N/mm2. The values of the partial factors must be taken from 4.3.3.2. In the stress
analysis it may be assumed that plane sections remain plane and elastic behaviour exists for the concrete up to the
compressive and tensile stress limits given above.
In situations where, subject to the agreement of the Overseeing Organisation, serviceability limit state cracking
checks are undertaken against the class 3 values of BS 5400-4, elastic behaviour is deemed to exist up to the
compressive stress of 0.5(fcu/mc) and the hypothetical tensile stress at the maximum size of cracks defined in
4.1.1.1 of BS 5400-4, and the cracking checks must be performed in accordance with 6.3.2.4 a) 3) of BS 5400-4.
However, prestressed structures containing external and/or unbonded prestressing must be treated as reinforced
concrete sections in which the axial force and moment due to prestress is considered as an applied load, and the
maximum crack widths, calculated as for reinforced concrete columns (see 4.2.2), must be less than the crack
widths given in Table 1 of BS 5400-4.
When assessment is required for other serviceability conditions, the necessary criteria must be agreed with the
Overseeing Organisation.
6.3.2A Serviceability Limit State: flexure
The partial safety factors to be taken are those from Table 4 of BS 5400-4, where distinction is made between pretensioned and post-tensioned members in tension. Note that 4.3.3.2 allows a reduction of 10% for mc when worst
credible strengths are used, with the caveat that mc is not to be taken as less than unity.
For prestressed concrete, class 2 stress limit (as defined by 4.1.1.1 of BS 5400-4) aims to avoid cracking and is
dependent on the tensile strength of concrete. Failure to comply with serviceability criteria will not always require
remedial action, and further consideration by the assessor should be given to the actual consequences of SLS check
failures before this is recommended. In particular, it is unlikely to be justified to take remedial action for noncompliance with class 2 tensile stress limits if there are no signs of distress and the class 3 tensile stress limits are
complied with.
A/72
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
6.3.3
Appendix A
Ultimate Limit State: flexure
6.3.3.1 Section analysis. When analysing a cross-section to determine its ultimate strength the following
assumptions must be made:
(a)
The strain distribution in the concrete in compression is derived from the assumption that plane sections
remain plane.
(b)
The stresses in the concrete in compression are derived either from the stress-strain curve given in
Figure1 with the appropriate value of mc given in 4.3.3.3 or, in the case of rectangular sections or flanged
sections with the neutral axis in the flange, the compressive stress may be taken as equal to 0.6 fcu/mc
over the whole compression zone; in both cases the strain at the outermost compression fibre is taken as
0.0035.
(c)
The tensile strength of concrete is ignored.
(d)
The strains in bonded prestressing tendons and in any additional reinforcement, whether in tension or
compression, are derived from the assumption that plane sections remain plane. In addition, the tendon
will have an initial strain due to prestress after all losses. When unbonded prestressing is used, the initial
strain of the tendons due to prestress after all losses must be multiplied by the appropriate value of fL
given in 4.2.3.
(e)
The stresses in bonded prestressing tendons, whether initially tensioned or untensioned, and in
additional reinforcement, are derived either from the appropriate stress-strain curve in Figures 2, 3 and
4 or, when available, manufacturers stress-strain curves. The values of ms are given in 4.3.3.3. An
empirical approach for obtaining the stress in the tendons at failure for structures containing only bonded
prestressing is given in 6.3.3.3.
(f)
The strain in unbonded tendons must be assumed not to increase above the initial value due to prestress
after all losses including fL except that either:
In slabs and beams, the strain in the mid-span region of cables which are within 0.1d of the soffit at
(i)
mid-span and which do not extend beyond the supports may be taken to increase by 0.0005, with
no additional calculation;

(ii) The strain in the tendons at failure may be calculated from a non-linear analysis of the structure.
If this is done checks must be made to ensure that conventional conservative assumptions, such
ignoring the tensile strength of concrete, do not have the effect of increasing the tendon strain and
hence the ultimate strength.
(g)
In structures with unbonded tendons, tendons and reinforcing bars which are anchored within a distance
equal to h/2 of the section being considered must be ignored. However, within h/2 of a simply supported
end, all prestress which is anchored beyond the centre line of the support and all reinforcement which is
positively assessed as being anchored in accordance with 5.8.7 may be considered effective.
6.3.3.1A Section analysis

The concrete stress strain curve in Figure 1 and the failure strain of 0.0035 are appropriate to unbound concrete.
Higher failure stresses and strains are achieved when the concrete is laterally restrained by helical binding or, to
a lesser extent, by conventional links. If the ultimate strength of a member is governed by failure of the concrete
compression zone and if the member marginally fails an assessment using the unbound stress-strain curve, it would
August 2015
A/73
can be obtained from references
and
. See also comment 5.3.2.1A.
As the ultimate strength of structures with unbonded prestressing is dependant on the
Appendix
Volume
prestressAforce, allowance has to be made for the actual prestress force present being less
than 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
which is assumed in design. This may be, for instance, a result of the jacking force being less
than intended or the prestress loss being greater than calculated. A partial safety factor fL of
0.87 is therefore applied to the prestress force due to the unbonded tendons.
be advisable to allow for the enhancing effects of links or helical binding. Appropriate guidance can be obtained
from references (13) and (14). See also comment 5.3.2.1A.
Since the strain in unbonded tendons at the ultimate limit state is unlikely to be sufficient to
cause
yield, failure
is of
likely
to be with
through
crushing
of the concrete.
However,
the overall
As
the ultimate
strength
structures
unbonded
prestressing
is dependant
on the prestress
force, allowance
behaviour
of
the
structure
should
remain
ductile
with
extensive
cracking
and
excessive
has to be made for the actual prestress force present being less than which is assumed in design. This may be, for
deflections
being
apparent
yield.less than intended or the prestress loss being greater than calculated.
instance,
a result
of the
jackingbefore
force being
Apartial safety factor fL of 0.87 is therefore applied to the prestress force due to the unbonded tendons.
In bonded prestressed construction plane sections, including their prestressing tendons,

remain
This
assumption
depends
on the tendons
to the concrete
and failure is
Since
the plane.
strain in
unbonded
tendons
at the ultimate
limit stateremaining
is unlikelybonded
to be sufficient
to cause yield,
is therefore
not valid
with of
unbonded
prestressing.
increase
in steelofstrain
in unbonded
likely
to be through
crushing
the concrete.
However, The
the overall
behaviour
the structure
should remain ductile
with
extensive at
cracking
excessive
deflections
apparent
before yield.
prestressing
failureand
is less
than for
bonded being
tendons
and usually
not sufficient to reach yield.
Sub-clause 6.3.3.1(f) introduces a simple but conservative rule to estimate the steel strain, and
Inhence
bonded
construction
sections,a including
their prestressing
theprestressed
stress at failure.
As anplane
alternative
more rigorous
non-linear tendons,
analysisremain
may beplane.
used.This
assumption depends on the tendons remaining bonded to the concrete and is therefore not valid with unbonded
prestressing. The increase in steel strain in unbonded prestressing at failure is less than for bonded tendons and
usually
to reach
yield.
Sub-clause
6.3.3.1(f)
introduces a simple but conservative rule to estimate the
6.3.3.2not sufficient
Design
charts
. Not
applicable
in assessment
steel strain, and hence the stress at failure. As an alternative a more rigorous non-linear analysis may be used.
6.3.3.3
Assessment formula. For structures containing only bonded prestressing, in the
absence of an analysis based on the assumptions given in 6.3.3.1, the resistance moment of a
rectangular
beam, orformula.
of a flanged
beam in which
the neutral
axis lies
within theinflange,
may be
Assessment
6.3.3.3
For structures
containing
only bonded
prestressing,
the absence
of an analysis
obtained
from
Equationgiven
27 in 6.3.3.1, the resistance moment of a rectangular beam, or of a flanged beam in
based
on the
assumptions
6.3.3.2 Design charts. Not applicable in assessment
which the neutral axis lies within the flange, may be obtained from Equation 27:
Mu = fpb Aps (d - 0.5x)
Equation 27
Mu = fpb Aps (d - 0.5x) Equation 27
where
where
Mu
Mfpb
u
fpb
x
x d
d
Aps
Aps
is the ultimate moment of resistance of the section;

is the
the tensile
ultimatestress
moment
of resistance
the section;
is
in the
tendons atoffailure;
is
the
tensile
stress
in
the
tendons
at
failure;
is the neutral axis depth;
is the
the effective
neutral axis
depth;
is
depth
to tension reinforcement;
is the effective depth to tension reinforcement;
is the area of the prestressing tendons in the tension zone.
is the area of the prestressing tendons in the tension zone.
Thetensile
tensilestress,
stress,
, may
calculated
from:
be be
calculated
from:
The
fpbf,pbmay
pb
/[
pu
ms
] = (
A ps
)
f cu bd
pu
but
1.01.0
butnot
notgreater
greaterthan
than
where
pre-tensioning,
andand
1.15
for for
post-tensioning
withwith
effective
bond;bond;
and ms
is the
partial
where isis1.3
1.3forfor
pre-tensioning,
1.15
post-tensioning
effective
and
the safety
ms is
Appendix
A
Volume
3
Section
4
factor
for
the
tendons
given
in
4.3.3.3.
partial safety factor for the tendons given in 4.3.3.3.
Part 14 BD 44/XX
The
neutral
axis
depth,
x,
may
be
calculated
from:
The neutral axis depth, x, may be calculated from:

A ps mc
0.6 f cu b
pb
where
mc
safety
factor
forfor
concrete
given
in 4.3.3.3.
Chapter/Page
where
mcisisthethepartial
partial
safety
factor
concrete
given
in 4.3.3.3.
Mmmm/yyyy
Prestressing tendons and additional reinforcement in the compression zone are ignored in strength calculations
Prestressing tendons and additional reinforcement in the compression zone are ignored in
when using this method.
strength calculations when using this method.
6.3.3.3A
Assessment formula
A/74
The tabulated values of fpb and x given in Table 27 of BS 5400-4 have been replaced by two August 2015
equations which give the same numerical values as Table 27 when the BS 5400-4 design
values of mc and ms are adopted.
wheremc
mcisisthe
thepartial
partialsafety
safetyfactor
factorfor
forconcrete
concretegiven
giveninin4.3.3.3.
4.3.3.3.
where
Prestressingtendons
tendonsand
andadditional
additionalreinforcement
reinforcementininthe
thecompression
compressionzone
zoneare
areignored
ignoredinin
Prestressing
Volume 3 Section 4
Appendix A
strength
calculations
whenusing
usingthis
thismethod.
method.
strength
calculations
when
Part
14 BD
44/15
6.3.3.3A
Assessmentformula
formula
6.3.3.3A
Assessment
The
tabulated
values
of
f
and
givenininTable
Table2727ofofBS
BS5400-4
5400-4have
havebeen
beenreplaced
replacedbybytwo
two
The
tabulated
valuesformula
of fpbpband x xgiven
6.3.3.3A
Assessment
equationswhich
whichgive
givethe
thesame
samenumerical
numericalvalues
valuesasasTable
Table2727when
whenthe
theBS
BS5400-4
5400-4design
design
equations
values
of
and
are
adopted.
values
of mcmcand
msof
are
ms
and x given in Table 27 of BS 5400-4 have been replaced by two equations which give
The tabulated
values
fpb adopted.
the same numerical values as Table 27 when the BS 5400-4 design values of mc and ms are adopted.
6.3.3.4
Non-rectangularsections
sections
. Non-rectangularbeams
beamsmust
mustbebeanalysed
analysedusing
usingthe
the
6.3.3.4
Non-rectangular
. Non-rectangular
Non-rectangular
6.3.3.4
sections. Non-rectangular beams must be analysed using the assumptions given in
assumptions
giveninin6.3.3.1.
6.3.3.1.
assumptions
given
6.3.3.1.
6.3.4 Shear
Shearresistance
resistanceofofbeams
beams
6.3.4
6.3.4
Shear resistance of beams
6.3.4.1
General
. Calculationsfor
forshear
shearare
areonly
onlyrequired
requiredfor
forthe
theultimate
ultimatelimit
limitstate.
state.AtAt
6.3.4.1
General
. Calculations
6.3.4.1 General.
Calculations
for
shear
are
only
required
for
the
ultimate
limit
state.
At
any
section
the ultimate
anysection
sectionthe
theultimate
ultimateshear
shearresistance
resistanceisisthe
thesum
sumofofthe
theresistances
resistancesofofthe
theconcrete
concretealone
alone
any
VVc
shear resistance is the sum of the resistances of the concrete alone Vc (see 6.3.4.2 and 6.3.4.3) andc of the shear
(see6.3.4.2
6.3.4.2and
and6.3.4.3)
6.3.4.3)and
andofofthe
theshear
shearreinforcement
reinforcementVV
6.3.4.4).
(see
6.3.4.4).
s (see
s (see
reinforcement Vs (see 6.3.4.4).
structurescontaining
containing
only
bonded
prestressing,
forvertical
vertical
links
effective
thetensile
tensile
In
containing
only
bonded
prestressing,
links
totoeffective
bebeeffective
the
InInstructures
structures
only
bonded
prestressing,
forfor
vertical
links
to be
the tensile
capacity of the
capacity
of
the
longitudinal
steel
at
a
section
must
be
greater
than
capacity
of
the
longitudinal
steel
at
a
section
must
be
greater
than
longitudinal steel at a section must be greater than
(V(V svscvbcwbdw d) )
MM

22
zz
where
MMand
V
are
the
co-existent
bending
moment
andand
shear
force
duedue
to
ultimate
loads
at theatat
section
whereM
and
are
the
co-existent
bending
moment
and
shear
force
due
ultimate
loads
the under
where
and
VV
are
the
co-existent
bending
moment
shear
force
totoultimate
loads
the
consideration,
z consideration,
is the lever arm
may
bearm
taken
as may
0.9d,
and
s, vcas
, as
b0.9d,
and and
dand
aresas
in d5.3.3.2.
The
, wbwand
and
d
sectionunder
underconsideration,
isthe
thelever
leverarm
which
maybe
betaken
taken
, sv,defined
w 0.9d,
section
z ziswhich
which
cv, cb
tensile
capacity
of
the
longitudinal
steel
is:
areasasdefined
definedinin5.3.3.2.
5.3.3.2.The
Thetensile
tensilecapacity
capacityofofthe
thelongitudinal
longitudinalsteel
steelis:is:
are
AA
ff
pu(t)
s(t)s(t) pu(t)
s(u)fyL(u)
fyL(u) / / ms
ms
s(u)
++ AA
where
,, ff,pu(t)
,,AA
and
fyL(u)
are
asasdefined
in in
6.3.4.3
andand
and
the
partial
safety
factor
for the
tendons
whereAA
fpu(t)
, s(u)
A
and
fyL(u)
are
asdefined
defined
in6.3.4.3
6.3.4.3
ms
thepartial
partial
safety
factor
for
the given
where
and
fyL(u)
are
isisthe
safety
factor
for
the
s(u)
s(t)s(t)
pu(t)
s(u)
ms
s(t)
msis
intendons
4.3.3.3.
However
withinHowever
an
individual
sagging
or hogging
region,oror
such
longitudinal
force
given
4.3.3.3.
However
within
individual
sagging
hogging
region,
suchmust not be taken as
tendons
given
inin4.3.3.3.
within
ananindividual
sagging
hogging
region,
such
more
than
M
/z
where
M
is
the
maximum
ultimate
moment
within
that
region.
longitudinal
force
must
not
be
taken
as
more
than
M
/z
where
M
is
the
maximum
ultimate
longitudinal max
force must notmaxbe taken as more than Mmax
/z where Mmax
is the maximum ultimate
max
max
momentwithin
withinthat
thatregion.
region.
moment
In structures containing unbonded prestressing, compliance with the requirements of 6.3.3.1(g) will ensure that
vertical
links atcontaining
the sectionunbonded
under consideration
are effective.
In structures
prestressing,
compliance with the requirements of 6.3.3.1(g)
In structures containing unbonded prestressing, compliance with the requirements of 6.3.3.1(g)

willensure
ensurethat
thatvertical
verticallinks
linksatatthe
thesection
sectionunder
underconsideration
considerationare
areeffective.
effective.
will
At a section at which the applied moment, M, does not exceed the cracking moment, Mcr, calculated in accordance
with 6.3.4.2, Vc may be taken as equal to the uncracked value, Vco, (see 6.3.4.2). In all other cases Vc must be taken
Ata asection
sectionatatwhich
whichthe
theapplied
appliedmoment,
moment, M,does
does notexceed
exceedthe
thecracking
cracking moment,MM
At
cr,cr,
6.3.4.2) not
and the cracked
value, Vcrmoment,
, (see 6.3.4.3).
as the
lesser of the uncracked
value, Vco, (seeM,
calculatedininaccordance
accordancewith
with6.3.4.2,
6.3.4.2,VV
takenasasequal
equaltotothe
theuncracked
uncrackedvalue,
value,VV
, (see
calculated
bebetaken
, (see
c may
c may
coco
must
be
taken
as
the
lesser
of
the
uncracked
value,
V
,
(see
6.3.4.2)
6.3.4.2).
In
all
other
cases
V
be
taken as the
lesser
ofco-existent
the uncracked
value,
Vcoco
, (see
6.3.4.2).
In allsection
other cases
Vc must
c
For a cracked
the conditions
of maximum
shear
with
bending
moment
and 6.3.4.2)
maximum bending
and
the
cracked
value,
V
,
(see
6.3.4.3).
and
the
cracked
value,
V
,
(see
6.3.4.3).
cr
cr
moment with co-existent shear
must both be considered.
Fora acracked
cracked
sectionthe
the
conditions
maximum
shear
with
co-existent
bending
moment
and must be taken
For
section
conditions
ofofmaximum
shear
with
co-existent
bending
moment
and
Within
the transmission
length
of pre-tensioned
members
(see
6.7.4),
the shear
resistance
of a section
maximum
bending
moment
with
co-existent
shear
must
both
be
considered.
as the greater
of the moment
values calculated
from: shear must both be considered.
maximum
bending
with co-existent
5.3.3 except that in determining the area As, the area of tendons must be ignored unless the tendons are
rigid bars; and
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
(b)
6.3.4.2 to 6.3.4.4, using the appropriate value of prestress at the section considered, assuming a linear
variation of prestress over the transmission length.
(a)
August 2015
A/75
In a haunched beam, the component of the flange forces perpendicular to the longitudinal
Appendix
Volume 3 Section 4
centroidalA axis of the beam calculated from an elastic section analysis under the relevant load
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part 14 BD 44/15
case may be subtracted algebraically from the applied shear force.
6.3.4.1A
General
InThe
a haunched
beam,for
theshear
component
of the
flange
perpendicular
to the longitudinal
centroidal
axis of the
design rules
in beams
given
in forces
BS 5400-4
are empirical
and based on
test results
(58)under the relevant load case may be subtracted algebraically from
beam
calculated
from
an
elastic
section
analysis
on bonded tendons. Research has shown
that they can also be safely be used to calculate
the
applied
shear
force.
the shear strength of prestressed concrete beams with unbonded or external tendons.
6.3.4.1A General
The design for shear is based on a 45 degrees truss analogy and thus implies a greater force in
thedesign
tension
chord
begiven
expected
simple
theory.
Theon
limit
the shear
The
rules
for than
shear would
in beams
in BSby
5400-4
arebending
empirical
and based
teston
results
on bonded tendons.
resistance
for
bonded
prestressing
is
related
to
the
area
of
longitudinal
reinforcement
in
(58)
that they can also be safely be used to calculate the shear strength of prestressed concrete
Research has shown
excesswith
of that
required
to resisttendons.
bending. However, in the case of unbonded prestressing it is
beams
unbonded
or external
necessary to ensure that the tendon force rather then tendon strength is available, and this is
guaranteed
checking
that
sufficiently
beyond
sectionforce
at which
The
design forby
shear
is based
on the
a 45tendons
degrees extend
truss analogy
and thus
impliesthe
a greater
in the they
tension chord
are
required.
than would be expected by simple bending theory. The limit on the shear resistance for bonded prestressing is
related to the area of longitudinal reinforcement in excess of that required to resist bending. However, in the case
ofThe
unbonded
prestressing
it is necessary
to V
ensure
tendon
rather
tendon
strengthdoes
is available, and
assessment
sub-clause
states that
be the
taken
as Vforce
thethen
applied
moment
c maythat
co when
guaranteed
checking
that the
sufficiently
beyond
the section
whichthe
theyVare
this
notisexceed
Mcr.by
This
is because
thetendons
sectionextend
will not
be flexurally
cracked
and,athence,
cr required.
calculation is not appropriate.
The assessment sub-clause states that Vc may be taken as Vco when the applied moment does not exceed Mcr. This
isWhen
because
the section
will not be
cracked
and, hence, thezone,
Vcr calculation
not tendons
appropriate.
using
the provisions
in flexurally
5.3.3 within
the transmission
the area ofis bar
may
be included in As, because their rigidity enables them to contribute to the shear resistance
When using the provisions in 5.3.3 within the transmission zone, the area of bar tendons may be included in As,
component due to dowel action.
because their rigidity enables them to contribute to the shear resistance component due to dowel action.
Thesub-clauses
sub-clauses
in BS
5400-4
are written
for prismatic
are generally
conservative
The
in BS
5400-4
are written
for prismatic
beamsbeams
and areand
generally
conservative
for haunched
for haunched
ones. allows
This sub-clause
allows
advantage
to be taken
of theofvertical
component
ones.
advantage to
be taken
of the vertical
component
flange forces
in these.ofIf three
This sub-clause
flange
forces
in
these.
If
three
dimensional
finite
element
models
are
used
for
box
beams,
will already
dimensional finite element models are used for box beams, the web shears from the computer modelthe
web
shears
from
the
computer
model
will
already
have
the
flange
forces
subtracted.
have the flange forces subtracted.
6.3.4.2 SectionsSections
uncracked
inAflexure
section
may betoassumed
to beinuncracked
in applied
6.3.4.2
section. A
may
be assumed
be uncracked
flexure if the
uncracked
in flexure.
: cracking moment, Mcr:
moment
exceedmoment
the cracking
Mcrthe
flexure does
if thenot
applied
does moment,
not exceed
= (0.49 f cu / mc + f pt )I/y
Appendix
MA
A
Volume 33 Section
Section 44
cr
Appendix
Volume
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
Appendix
A
Part 14 BD 44/XX
where
f
is
the
stress
due
to
prestress
only
at
the
tensile
fibre
distance
y
from
the
centroid
of
the
concrete
Amendments
to BS 5400-4
whereptfpt is the stress due to prestress only at the tensile fibre distance
y from the centroid
of the section
which has a second moment of area I; the value of fpt must be derived from the prestressing force after all losses
concrete section which has a second moment of area I; the value of fpt must be derived from the
have occurred, multiplied by the appropriate value of fL (see 4.2.3). Values of the partial safety factor mc are given
prestressing
force after
have
occurred,
multiplied
by theuncracked
appropriate
value ofV
fL (see
It4.3.3.3.
may be
be assumed
assumed
that all
thelosses
ultimate
shear
resistance
of aa section
section
in flexure,
flexure,
inIt
may
that
the
ultimate
shear
resistance
of
uncracked in
V co,,
co
4.2.3).
Values
partial safety
mc are
given intensile
4.3.3.3.
corresponds
toof
thethe
occurrence
of aa factor
maximum
principal
stressItof
ofmay
section
equal to
tothat
= the ultimate shear resistanc
be assumed
corresponds
to
the
occurrence
of
maximum
principal
tensile stress
section
equal
fftt =
,
corresponds
It0.32
may bef assumed
that
the
ultimate
shear
resistance
of
a
section
uncracked
in
flexure,
V
corresponds to cothe occurrencetoofthe
a maximum princ
mc
cu //
0.32 f cu
mc
occurrence of a maximum principal tensile stress of section equal to ft = 0.32 f cu / mc
The value
value of V
Vco at
at the height
height of the
the cross
cross section
section where
where fft is
is maximum
maximum is
is given by:
by: Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
The
co
t
The
value ofofVco
at thethe
height of of
the cross
section where
ft is maximum
is givengiven
by:
The value of Vco at the height of the cross section w
Ib
= Ib ff 2t2 +
+ cpb ff t
Equation 28
28
V co
co
=
Equation
28
V
cpb t Equation
Ib
t
S
2
S

f t + cpb f t
V co =
S
where
where
where
where
is
0.32 ff cu // mc ,,taken
takenasaspositive;
positive;
is 0.32
ft fft
is
t
mc taken as positive;
cu
is
0.32
, taken as positive;
ft
f cu / mc
cpb is
is the
the total
total direct
direct stress
stress at
at the
the location
location of
of the
the section
section being
being checked,
checked,
due
to bending
bending
and

due
to
and
cpb
axial load
load effects
effects after
after all
all losses
losses have
have occurred,
occurred, taken
taken as
as positive
positive
in compression
compression
and stress at the location of the
cpb in
is the total direct
axial
and
multiplied
by
the
appropriate
value
of
(see
4.2.3);
fL
axial
load
effects
after all losses have occur
multiplied by the appropriate value of fL (see 4.2.3);
b
is
the
breadth
of
the
member
at
the
location
of
the
section
being
checked,
allowing
for
the
multiplied
by the
value of fL (s
b
is the breadth of the member at the location of the section being checked,
allowing
forappropriate
the
presence
of
the
ducts
(where
the
position
of
a
duct
coincides
with
the
position
of
b
is
the
breadth
of
the
member
at
the location
presence of the ducts (where the position of a duct coincides with the position of
A/76
August 2015
maximum
principal
tensile
stress,
e.g.
at
or
near
the
junction
of
flange
and
web
near
a
presence
of near
the ducts
maximum principal tensile stress, e.g. at or near the junction of flange
and web
a (where the position of
support,
the
value
of
b
must
be
reduced
by
the
full
diameter
of
the
duct
if
ungrouted
andtensile stress, e.g. at or
maximum
principal
support, the value of b must be reduced by the full diameter of the duct if ungrouted and
by half of the diameter if grouted);
support, the value of b must be reduced by
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
scpb
b
I
S
Appendix A
is the total direct stress at the location of the section being checked, due to bending and axial load effects
after all losses have occurred, taken as positive in compression and multiplied by the appropriate value of
fL (see 4.2.3);
is the breadth of the member at the location of the section being checked, allowing for the presence of the
ducts (where the position of a duct coincides with the position of maximum principal tensile stress, e.g. at
or near the junction of flange and web near a support, the value of b must be reduced by the full diameter
of the duct if ungrouted and by half of the diameter if grouted);
is the second moment of area;
is the first moment of area of the part of the section excluding any area below the location being checked,
calculated about the centroidal axis of the whole section.
In many cases the maximum principal stress occurs at the level of the centroidal axis. However, when this is not the
case (i.e. cross sections where the width varies over the height) the minimum value of the shear resistance Vco must
be found by calculating it at various axis positions in the cross section.
For a section uncracked in flexure with inclined tendons, the component of prestressing force (multiplied by the
appropriate value of fL) normal to the longitudinal axis of the member must be algebraically added to Vco. This
component must be taken as positive where the shear resistance of the section is increased.
6.3.4.2A Sections uncracked in flexure
The equation for the cracking moment has been included in 6.3.4.2. The terms 0.49(fcu/mc) and 0.32(fcu/mc)
replace the BS 5400-4 terms 0.37fcu and 0.24fcu, respectively. The latter values include a partial safety factor of
1.5 applied to fcu, which has been replaced in the assessment code by the general value, mc. The BS 5400-4 values
also include an additional safety factor of 1.25 to allow for strength reductions caused by shrinkage cracking,
repeated loading and variations in concrete quality (59). This factor has been reduced to 1.15 in the assessment code
because variations in concrete quality are allowed for in mc.
Appendix
Volume
Appendix A
A
Volume 33 Section
Section 44
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
Amendments
to BS
5400-4
Part 14
BD 44/XX
44/XX
6.3.4.3
Sections
cracked
in flexure. The ultimate shear resistance of a section cracked
in flexure,
Vcr, must be
calculated using Equation 29 when the factored effective prestress, fpe, exceeds 0.6 fpu. When fpe is less than 0.6 fpu,
the shear strength must be calculated using Equation 29 or Equation 30, whichever is greater.
V crcr
V
=
=
0.045bd ff cu // mc +
+ M cr /(M/V
/(M/V
d/2)
d/2)
0.045bd
M cr
mc
cu
Equation
Equation2929
29
Equation
but

0.12
bd
/
f

but 0.12 bd f cu / mc
cu

where
V crcr
V
=
=
mc
(1
0.55 ff pe // ff pu )) vc bd s +
+ M o /(M/V
/(M/V
/2)
(1
0.55
dd ss /2)
Mo
pe
pu v c bd s

but
ff cu // mc
s
but
0.12
0.12 bd
bd s
mc
cu
Equation
Equation
Equation3030
30
where
where
d
is
the distance
from
the
extreme
compression
fibre to
the
of the
at
is
distancefrom
fromthe
theextreme
extreme
compression
the centroid
centroid
the tendons
tendons
at the
the considered;
d d
is the
the distance
compression
fibrefibre
to thetocentroid
of theof
tendons
at the section
section
considered;
section
considered;
is the partial
safety factor for concrete given in 4.3.3.3;
mc
is
safety
factor
for
given
mc
is
the partial
partial
safety
factor
for concrete
concrete
given in
in 4.3.3.3;
4.3.3.3;
Mcr
is the
cracking
moment
defined
in 6.3.4.2;
mc
M
is
the
cracking
moment
defined
in
6.3.4.2;
cr
V,MM
are
the
shear
force
and
bending
moment
(both
taken
as positive) at the section considered due to ultimate
is the cracking moment defined in 6.3.4.2;
cr
V,
M
are
the
shear
force
and
bending
moment
(both
taken
loads;
V, M are
the shear force and bending moment (both taken as
as positive)
positive) at
at the
the section
section considered
considered
due
to
ultimate
loads;
Mo
is
the
moment
necessary
to
produce
zero
stress
in
the
concrete
at
the
depth
d,
which
is
equal to Mo = fpt I/y
due to ultimate loads;
M
is
the
moment
necessary
to
produce
zero
stress
in
the
concrete
at
the
depth
d,
which
o
but
not
greater
than
M
in
which
f
is
the
stress
due
to
prestress
only
at
the
depth
d,
distance
cr,
pt
Mo
is the moment necessary
to produce
zero stress in the concrete at the depth d, which is
is y from the
equal
to
M
=
f
I/y
but
not
greater
than
M
in
which
f
is
the
stress
due
to
prestress
centroid
of oothe
whichthan
hasM
a second
moment
of area I; the value of fpt must be derived
pt I/y butsection
cr, in which
equal
to M
= fconcrete
not greater
fpt
pt
cr,
pt is the stress due to prestress
only
at
the
depth
d,
distance
y
from
the
centroid
of
the
concrete
which
aa of fL
from
the
prestressing
forces
after
all
losses
have
occurred,
multiplied
by the appropriate
only at the depth d, distance y from the centroid of the concrete section
section
which has
hasvalue
(see4.2.3):
second
moment
of
area
I;
the
value
of
f
must
be
derived
from
the
prestressing
forces
second moment of area I; the value of fpt
pt must be derived from the prestressing forces
after
(see 4.2.3):
after all
all losses
losses have
have occurred,
occurred, multiplied
multiplied by
by the
the appropriate
appropriate value
value of
of fL
fL (see 4.2.3):
ffpe
is
the
factored
effective
prestress
which
is
equal
to
the
effective
prestress
after
is the factored effective prestress which is equal to the effective prestress after all
all losses
losses
pe
(see 4.2.3);
have
August 2015
A/77
have occurred,
occurred, multiplied
multiplied by
by the
the appropriate
appropriate value
value of
of fL
fL (see 4.2.3);
vvc
is
obtained
from
5.3.3.2;
it
may
be
adjusted
to
allow
for
short
shear
span
enhancement
in
is obtained from 5.3.3.2; it may be adjusted to allow for short shear span enhancement in
c
accordance
accordance with
with 5.3.3.3.
5.3.3.3.
Mo
is the moment necessary to produce zero stress in the concrete at the depth d, which is
equal to Mo = fpt I/y but not greater than Mcr, in which fpt is the stress due to prestress
Appendixonly
A at the depth d, distance y from the centroid of the concrete section which has
Volume
a 3 Section 4
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
second moment of area I; the value of fpt must be derived from the prestressing forces 14 BD 44/15
after all losses have occurred, multiplied by the appropriate value of fL (see 4.2.3):
fpe
is the factored effective prestress which is equal to the effective prestress after all losses
fpe
is theoccurred,
factored effective
prestress
is equalvalue
to theofeffective
4.2.3); after all losses have occurred,
have
multiplied
by thewhich
appropriate
fL (see prestress
multiplied
by
the
appropriate
value
of
(see
4.2.3);
fL
vc
is obtained from 5.3.3.2; it may be adjusted
to allow for short shear span enhancement in
vc
is obtained from
accordance
with5.3.3.2;
5.3.3.3.it may be adjusted to allow for short shear span enhancement in accordance with
5.3.3.3. to obtain v ) must be taken as the actual area of steel in the tension zone,
As
(required
c
(required to obtain vc) must be taken as the actual area of steel in the tension zone, irrespective of its
As
irrespective of its characteristic
strength;
characteristic strength;
ds
is the distance from the compression face to the centroid of the steel area, As.
ds
is the distance from the compression face to the centroid of the steel area, As.
Forcases
caseswhere
where
both
tensioned
untensioned
are contained
, fpe
/fpube
may
be taken
, fpeA/fspu
may
taken
as: as:
For
both
tensioned
andand
untensioned
steelsteel
are contained
in Asin
As(t) f
pu(t)
Pf
+ As(u) f yL(u)
where
where
f
PP
f
s(t)
AA
s(t)
A
s(u)
As(u)
fpu(t)
fpu(t)
fyL(u)
fyL(u)
is
effectiveprestressing
prestressing
force
after
all losses;
is the
the effective
force
after
all losses;
is
areaofoftensioned
tensionedsteel;
steel;
is the
the area
is
the
area
of
untensioned
steel;
is the area of untensioned steel;
is
characteristicstrength
strength
worst
credible
strength
the tensioned
is the
the characteristic
or or
thethe
worst
credible
strength
of theoftensioned
steel; steel;
is
the
characteristic
strength
or
the
worst
credible
strength
of
the
untensioned
is the characteristic strength or the worst credible strength of the untensioned steel. steel.
For
in in
flexure
andand
with
inclined
tendons,
the component
of prestressing
force normal
Forsections
sectionscracked
cracked
flexure
with
inclined
tendons,
the component
of prestressing
force to the
longitudinal
axis
of
the
member
must
be
ignored.
However,
in
a
haunched
section
the
component
of prestressing
normal to the longitudinal axis of the member must be ignored. However, in a haunched section
to appropriate
the (inclined)value
longitudinal
centroidal
axis of the member
force
(multiplied of
by prestressing
the appropriate
value
of fL) normal
the component
force
(multiplied
by the
of fL) normal
to the
may
be
considered.
This
component
should
not
be
taken
as
greater
than
it
would
be
if
the
tendons
were parallel to
(inclined) longitudinal centroidal axis of the member may be considered. This component should
the
flange
which
is
the
tension
flange
ignoring
the
effect
of
prestress.
not be taken as greater than it would be if the tendons were parallel to the flange which is the
tension flange ignoring the effect of prestress.
6.3.4.3A Sections cracked in flexure
6.3.4.3A
Sections cracked in flexure
BS 5400-4 gives different design equations for classes 1 and 2 (Equation 29) and class 3 (Equation 30). However, it
is actually the fpe/fpu ratio which determines which equation should be used (60).
The BS 5400-4 Equation 29 and the lower limiting values for Vcr contain a partial safety factor of 1.5 applied to fcu.
Chapter/Page
The
equivalent terms in the assessment code have been modified and fcu replaced by fcu/mcMmmm/yyyy
. This has led to some
anomalies in assessment since simplifications made in the equations result in there being a step change between
the values given by the two equations and the value of fpe is not accurately known. Since there is no reason why
Equation 29 should be unsafe for lower fpe/fpu ratios, the use of either equation is allowed.
Equations 29 and 30 have been further modified by including the d/2 term. This term was conservatively omitted
from the BS 5400-4 equations (60). M0 (used in Equation 30) is the moment for zero stress at tendon level whereas
Mcr (used in Equation 29) is the moment for cracking at the tension face allowing for some tensile strength of
concrete. In the derivation (60) it was assumed d was not much less than h. For sections with the tendon remote from
the tension face, M0 can be very large leading to unsafe results. A maximum of Mcr is imposed to avoid this.
Equation 30 was originally based on an interpolation between a modified Equation 29 and the expressions used for
reinforced concrete. The short shear span enhancement is now allowed for the latter.
Although it may seem illogical to ignore the vertical component of inclined tendons in cracked sections, the rules
are empirical. They were derived for sections with horizontal tendons and tests suggest they could be unsafe if the
vertical component of prestress is included when they are applied to sections with inclined tendons. However, it is
safe to include the component of prestress perpendicular to the longitudinal centroidal axis when this results form
haunching rather than from draped cables.
A/78
August 2015
included when they are applied to sections with inclined tendons. However, it is safe to
include the component of prestress perpendicular to the longitudinal centroidal axis when this
Volume
Section
4
Appendix A
results3form
haunching
rather than from draped cables.
Part 14 BD 44/15
6.3.4.4
Shear reinforcement. Types of shear reinforcement and the criterion for the
amount of shear reinforcement required to be considered effective are defined in 6.3.4.1 and
6.3.4.4
Shear reinforcement. Types of shear reinforcement and the criterion for the amount of shear
5.3.3.2.
reinforcement required to be considered effective are defined in 6.3.4.1 and 5.3.3.2.
Vertical prestress may be treated as prestrained reinforcement, with a design force not greater
Vertical prestress may be treated as prestrained reinforcement, with a design force not greater than that
than that corresponding to a total strain of:
corresponding to a total strain of:
0.0041
+ (estimated prestrain after all losses)/1.15
0.0041 + (estimated prestrain after all losses)/1.15
Linksmust
mustbebeconsidered
considered
effective
only
if their
spacing
a beam
and laterally
does
as as
effective
only
if their
spacing
bothboth
alongalong
a beam
and laterally
does not
exceed dt, nor
Links
not
exceed
d
,
nor
four
times
the
web
thickness
for
flanged
beams,
where
d
is
defined
below.
t
four times the tweb thickness for flanged beams, where dt is defined below.
Whenthe
theabove
above
criteria
met,
shear
resistance
of vertical
When
criteria
areare
met,
thethe
shear
resistance
of vertical
linkslinks
is: is:
Vs
Asv ( f yv / ms ) d t / s v
where
where
is the depth from the extreme compression fibre either to the centroid of the tendons or to the longitudinal
bars, tendons, or groups of tendons in the tension zone around which the links are anchored in accordance
with 5.8.6.5, whichever is greater.
fyv
Is the yield strength of the shear reinforcement. This must be taken as not greater than 500N/mm2 unless
it is prestressed in which case the stress in the steel may be taken as the appropriate value from Figure
3 at a concrete strain of 0.0045, that is a steel strain of 0.0045 greater than the prestrain
after all losses
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
including allowance for gfp of 0.87.
dt
All other terms in the equation for Vs are defined in 5.3.3.2.

In general, sections within a distance d from the support need not be assessed for shear provided the shear
reinforcement calculated for the section at a distance d is continued up to the support.
Inclined links or bent-up bars must be assumed to form the tension members of lattice girders as described in
5.3.3.2.
6.3.4.4A Shear reinforcement
Most of the comments on 5.3.3.2 are also applicable to 6.3.4.4.
BS 5400-4 does not give rules for vertical prestress. It has largely gone out of favour but bridges with vertical
prestress exist. Vertical prestress can be considered either as controlling the maximum principal tensile stress or as
acting as prestrained reinforcement. The former approach can only be used in the uncracked in flexure check whist
the latter generally gives a greater strength. Hence, only the latter approach is given here. The rule limits the strain
in addition to the prestrain to that corresponding to the strain required according to the code to reach yield in the
highest grade unstressed reinforcement it allows.
The BS 5400-4 requires the link spacing to be reduced when the shear force is large. This requirement has been
omitted from the assessment code because there is no logical reason to justify its inclusion. It is understood that the
requirement to limit the link spacing to four times the web thickness is related to web buckling. If the web cannot
buckle (because, for example, it is surrounded by in-situ infill concrete) then this spacing requirement may be
relaxed.
The expression for Vs is not valid for a link spacing in excess of dt. In such cases an analysis would need to be
performed which considers various possible shear failure planes. The requirement to limit spacing to four times the
August 2015
A/79
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
web thickness is considered to be related to web stability of flanged beams. Where greater link spacings occur, it is
advisable to ignore the Vs term, or carry out non-linear analysis of the web.
The requirement to relate shear capacity to the area of longitudinal reinforcement or prestressing steel has been
moved to 6.3.4.1.
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
6.3.4.5 Maximum shear force. The shear force, V, due to ultimate loads, must not exceed the stress 0.36
(0.7-fcu/250)fcu/mc, multiplied by bds, where b is as defined in 6.3.4.2, ds is as defined in 6.3.4.3 and mc is the
partial
safety factor
given
4.3.3.3.
appropriate
valuefor
of concrete
) normal
tointhe
longitudinal axis of the member increases the shear
fL
resistance of the section due to the presence of inclined tendons, it may be subtracted from the
Where the section is uncracked in flexure according to 6.3.4.2, ds may be taken as equal to dt as defined in
applied shear force V.
6.3.4.4 and, where the component of the prestressing force (multiplied by the appropriate value of fL) normal to
the longitudinal axis of the member increases the shear resistance of the section due to the presence of inclined
In haunched beams the component of flange force perpendicular to the longitudinal centroidal
tendons, it may be subtracted from the applied shear force V.
axis may be subtracted from the flange force.
In haunched beams the component of flange force perpendicular to the longitudinal centroidal axis may be
6.3.4.5A from the
Maximum
shear force
subtracted
flange force.
The upper limit to shear stress in BS 5400-4 is known to be conservative and the increased
(5)
limit here
is based shear
on plasticity
6.3.4.5A
Maximum
force theory , which is the basis of the varying angle truss
approach of BS EN 1992-1-1 given as an alternative method given in 5.3.3.5/6.3.4.7.
The
upper limit
shear stress
in BS
5400-4
known
to be
the increased limit here is based
However,
the to
maximum
shear
limit
of 0is.36
( 0 .7
f cu conservative
/ 250) f cu / and
mc is more conservative
on plasticity theory (5), which is the basis of the varying angle truss approach of BS EN 1992-1-1 given as an
than that in 6.3.4.7, so sections which do not satisfy this maximum to 6.3.4.5 may still have
alternative method given in 5.3.3.5/6.3.4.7. However, the maximum shear limit of 0.36 (0.7 f cu / 250) f cu / mc
adequate strength to 6.3.4.7 if they have sufficient transverse and longitudinal reinforcement.
is more conservative than that in 6.3.4.7, so sections which do not satisfy this maximum to 6.3.4.5 may still have
adequate strength to 6.3.4.7 if they have sufficient transverse and longitudinal reinforcement.
The definition of d used has been changed from BS 5400-4 because this is over-conservative
fordefinition
sections with
the tendons
face. this is over-conservative for sections with the
The
of d used
has been remote
changedfrom
fromthe
BS tension
5400-4 because
tendons remote from the tension face.
The rule is known to be conservative for some cases and higher forces may be allowed by use
of 6.3.4.7.
The
rule is known to be conservative for some cases and higher forces may be allowed by use of 6.3.4.7.
construction.
6.3.4.6
The shear. checks
for post-tensioned
segmental structures
are generally
6.3.4.6 Segmental
Segmental
construction
The shear
checks for post-tensioned
segmental
performed
in
the
same
way
as
for
non-segmental
structures
except
that,
at
joints
with
cast
in
situ
concrete, dry-pack
structures are generally performed in the same way as for non-segmental structures except
mortar
orjoints
grout joint
shear
force duedry-pack
to ultimate
loads or
must
not joint
be greater
that, at
withfiller
cast the
in situ
concrete,
mortar
grout
fillerthan:
the shear force

due to ultimate loads must not be greater than:

0.7 fL P h tan 2
where
where
fL
Ph fL
2 Ph
is the partial safety factor for the prestressing force, to be taken as 0.87;
is
partial safety
factor for
force,after
to bealltaken
as 0.87;
is the
the horizontal
component
of the
the prestressing
prestressing force
losses;
is
horizontal
component
of theThe
prestressing
force
afterbeall
losses;
is the
the angle
of friction
at the joint.
value for tan
2 can
taken
as 0.7 for a smooth interface and 1.4
is
the
angle
of
friction
at
the
joint.
The
value
for
tan
can
be
taken the
as 0.7
smooth tan 2 must
2
for a roughened or castellated interface. If there is any doubt
regarding
typefor
ofainterface,
interface
and
1.4 for a roughened or castellated interface. If there is any doubt regarding
be taken as
0.7.
the type of interface, tan 2 must be taken as 0.7.
In the case of segmental construction with precast elements and unbonded prestressing only, the shear resistance
thecase
vertical
links within
a distance hwith
bothelements
edges of the
(but notprestressing
greater thanonly,
the segment
length)
VIn
the
of segmental
construction
precast
andjoint
unbonded
the
s of
red from
must
be
calculated
with
the
formula
for
V
in
6.3.4.4
by
either
using
d
or
h
,
whichever
the
lesser,
where
h
shear resistance Vs of the vertical linkss within a distance hred fromt bothrededges of the joint (but not
red may
begreater
taken as
thethe
depth
of concrete
in must
compression
under the
ultimate
loads, for
but V
not
less than 0.5h, with h being the
than
segment
length)
be calculated
with
the formula
s in 6.3.4.4 by either
overall
section
depth.
using dt or hred, whichever the lesser, where hred may be taken as the depth of concrete in
compression under the ultimate loads, but not less than 0.5h, with h being the overall section
The
method of assessment of match cast joints with shear keys must be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.
depth.
The method of assessment of match cast joints with shear keys must be agreed with the
A/80
6.3.4.6A
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
6.3.4.6A Segmental construction

For segmental construction with no bonded prestressing, in accordance with 6.2.3 of BS EN 1992-2 it is assumed
that, as the applied load increases, the joint opens and the force in the tension chord remains unchanged, so the
depth of concrete section available for the flow of the web compression field is reduced to a value of hred, which can
be taken as the depth of concrete in compression under the ultimate loads, in accordance with PD 6687-2.
6.3.4.7 Alternative method. As an alternative to the method given in 6.3.4.1 to 6.3.4.5, beams may be assessed
using the varying angle truss approach described in 5.3.3.5. In this case the vertical component of prestress may be
deducted algebraically from the applied shear force and acw may be taken equal to:

1 + 2 scp/fcu
for 0 < scp < 0.125 fcu
1.25
for 0.125 fcu < scp < 0.25 fcu
2.5 (1 - 2 scp/fcu) for scp > 0.25 fcu
where scp is the mean compressive stress in the concrete due to the prestressing and axial loading, obtained
by averaging it over the concrete section taking account of the reinforcement. The value of scp need not to be
calculated at a distance less than 0.5dcotq from the edge of the support. In the case of straight tendons, a high level
of prestress (scp/fcu > 0.25) and thin webs, if the tension and the compression chords are able to carry the whole
prestressing force and blocks are provided at the extremity of beams to disperse the prestressing force, it may be
assumed that the prestressing force is distributed between the chords. In these circumstances, the compression field
due to shear only should be considered in the web (acw=1).
In the case of segmental construction with precast elements and unbonded prestressing only, the shear resistance
from the varying angle truss approach in 5.3.3.5 within a distance hred cotq from both edges of the joint (but not
greater than the segment length) must be evaluated by assuming a value of the angle q derived from the residual
depth hred, in accordance with the provisions of 6.2.3 of BS EN 1992-2, where hred is taken as the depth of concrete
in compression under the ultimate loads, but not less than 0.5h, with h being the overall section depth.
6.3.4.7A Alternative method
As the BD 44 approach to link design in prestressed sections is relatively economic, the varying angle truss
approach is less likely to be advantageous in terms of assessing the adequacy of links. However, it can be
advantageous when the link area is relatively large. It can also give significant increases in web crushing strength
compared with the normal BD 44 limit in 6.3.4.5.
6.3.4.8 Other approaches. With the approval of the Overseeing Organisation, methods employing plasticity
theory may be used for the assessment of the shear capacity of concrete beams.
6.3.4.8A Other approaches
The ultimate shear capacity of prestressed concrete structures can be assessed by analytical methods based on the
lower bound and upper bound models of plasticity theory, which may prove very useful in situations not explicitly
covered by codes. However, these methods should be applied with care and under the supervision of the Overseeing
Organisation. See also 5.3.3.7A. An upper bound model for assessing the shear capacity of prestressed concrete
bridge beams post-tensioned transversely together to form a deck is presented in references (7) and (8).
August 2015
A/81
Appendix A
6.3.5
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Torsional resistance of beams
6.3.5.1 General. In some members, the maximum torsional moment does not occur under the same loading as
the maximum flexural moment. In such circumstances reinforcement and prestress in excess of that required for
flexure and shear may be used in torsion.
6.3.5.2 Stresses and reinforcement. Calculations of torsion are only required for the ultimate limit state and the
torsional shear stresses must be calculated assuming a plastic shear stress distribution.
Calculations for torsion must be in accordance with 5.3.4 with the following modifications. When prestressing steel
is used as transverse torsional steel, or as longitudinal torsional steel, the stress assumed in assessment must be the
lesser of (fpe+ 460/ms) or fpu/ms, where ms is the partial safety factor for steel given in 4.3.3.3.
The compressive stress in the concrete due to prestress must be taken into account separately in accordance with
5.3.4.5.
In calculating (v + vt) for comparison with vtu (see 5.3.4.3), v must be calculated from Equation 8 of 5.3.3.1
regardless of whether 6.3.4.2 or 6.3.4.3 is critical in shear.
The BS 5400-4 increase in vtu for concrete grades above 40 is already allowed for in the expression for vtu
(see5.3.4.3A).
6.3.5.3 Segmental construction. Not applicable to assessment
6.3.5.4 Other assessment methods. Alternative methods of assessing members subjected to combined bending,
shear and torsion may be used provided that it can be shown that they satisfy the ultimate limit state requirements.
Box sections may be assessed by checking webs and flanges in accordance with 6.3.4 for the sum of shear forces
calculated for direct shear and torsion.
6.3.5.4A Other assessment methods
This sub-clause permits the consideration of strength at various points rather than the consideration of crosssectional strength. Possible methods for box girders are presented in references (61) and (62).
6.3.6
Longitudinal shear. For flanged beams, the longitudinal shear resistance across vertical sections of the
flange which may be critical must be checked in accordance with 7.4.2.3.
Deflection of beam. If required by the Overseeing Organisation, deflections may be calculated in
6.3.7
accordance with 4.2.4 and 4.6 taking appropriately into account the level of prestress.
6.3.7A Deflection of beam
The deflection of a beam which is uncracked under the assessment service load may be determined using an elastic
analysis based on the concrete section properties and a modulus of elasticity which allows for creep, if appropriate.
Beams with low levels of prestress may be cracked under the assessment service load, and the deflections of such
beams may be determined using moment curvature relationships (63).
6.4 Slabs. The analysis of prestressed slabs must be in accordance with 5.4.1 provided that due allowance is
made for moments due to prestress. The assessment must generally be in accordance with 6.3.
A/82
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
6.4
Slabs. The analysis of prestressed slabs must be in accordance
Appendix
A
due allowance is made for moments due to prestress.
The assessment
m
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
accordance with 6.3.
The assessment of shear must be in accordance with 6.3.4. In the treatm
The assessment of shear must be in accordance withunder

6.3.4. concentrated
In the treatment
of shear
stresses under
loads,
the ultimate
shear concentrated
resistance of a section unc
loads, the ultimate shear resistance of a section uncracked
in
flexure,
V
,
may
be
taken
as
corresponding
to the
co
be taken as corresponding
to the occurrence of a maximum
principal te
atthe
thecentroidal
centroidalaxis
axisaround
aroundthethe
critical section w
occurrence of a maximum principal tensile stress of f t = 0.32 f cu / mc at
critical
section which is assumed as a perimeter h/2 from theperimeter
loaded area.
The
shear
resistance
of
any
shear
reinforcement,
h/2 from the loaded area. The shear resistance of any shear r
Vs, must be assessed in accordance with 6.3.4.4.
assessed in accordance with 6.3.4.4.
6.4A Slabs
6.4A Slabs
See
See 6.3.4.2A for the explanation of the expression for
f . 6.3.4.2A for the explanation of the expression for ft.
t
6.5
Columns
Prestressed concrete columns, where the mean stress in the concrete se
is less than
2.5imposed
N/mm, by
may
assessed
as reinforced
column
Prestressed concrete columns, where the mean stresstendons
in the concrete
section
thebetendons
is less
than
2.5N/mm, may be assessed as reinforced columns in
accordance
otherwise
the full effects
prestress
otherwise
thewith
full 5.5,
effects
of the prestress
must of
bethe
considered.
6.5 Columns
must be considered.
6.6
Tension members
The tensile strength of tension members must be based on the assessm
prestressing tendons and the strength developed by any additional rein
The tensile strength of tension members must be based on the assessment strength (fpu/ms) of the prestressing
reinforcement may usually be assumed to be acting at its assessment st
tendons and the strength developed by any additional reinforcement. The additional reinforcement may usually be
cases it may be necessary to check the stress in the reinforcement usin
6.6
Tension members
assumed to be acting at its assessment stress (fy/ms); in special cases it may be necessary to check the stress in the
reinforcement using strain compatibility.
6.7
6.7
Prestressing requirements
6.7.2
Loss of prestress, other than friction losses

6.7.2
Prestressing requirements
6.7.1 Maximum initial prestress. The initial prestress must be assess

drawings,
sitefrom
data contract
or original
design
calculations. In the abs
6.7.1
Maximum initial prestress. The initial prestress mustavailable
be assessed
record
drawings,
nominal
of the initial
prestress
must
be assessed
from t
available site data or original design calculations. Inthe
the likely
absence
of suchvalue
information,
the likely
nominal
value
of
timecurrent
of the at
design.
the initial prestress must be assessed from the standards
the time of the design.
Loss of prestress, other than friction losses
6.7.2.1 General. Allowance must be made when calculating

in tendons
for themust
appropriate
losses
of calculating th
6.7.2.1 the forces
General
. Allowance
be made
when
prestress resulting from:
appropriate losses of prestress resulting from:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
relaxation of the steel comprising the tendons;
(a)
relaxation of the steel comprising the tendons;
(b)
the creep
elastic
the elastic deformation and subsequent shrinkage and
ofdeformation
the concrete; and subsequent shrinkage and creep
(c)
slip or movement of tendons at anchorages during anchoring
(d)
causes in special circumstances, eg. when steam curing
slip or movement of tendons at anchorages during other
anchoring;
tensioning.
other causes in special circumstances, eg. when steam curing has been used with pre-tensioning.
If experimental evidence on performance is not available, account mus
If experimental evidence on performance is not available,

must
be taken
of the
properties
of thethe
steel
and of prestress
of the account
steel and
of the
concrete
when
calculating
losses
of the concrete when calculating the losses of prestress from these causes. For a wide range of structures, the simple
requirements given in this sub-clause must be used; it should be recognised, however, that these requirements are
necessarily general and approximate.
6.7.2.2 Loss of prestress due to relaxation of steel. The loss of force in the tendon allowed for in the assessment
Chapter/Page
must be the maximum relaxation after 1000h duration, for a jacking force equal to that which is estimated was
imposed at transfer, as given by the appropriate standard current at the time of design or manufacturers data.
August 2015
A/83
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
In special cases, such as tendons at high temperature or subjected to large lateral loads (eg. deflected tendons),
greater relaxation losses will occur and specialist literature must be consulted.
6.7.2.3 Loss of prestress due to elastic deformation of the concrete. Calculation of the immediate loss of force
in the tendons due to elastic deformation of the concrete at transfer may be based on the values for the modulus of
elasticity of the concrete given in 4.3.2.1. The modulus of elasticity of the tendons may be obtained from 4.3.2.2.
For pre-tensioning, the loss of prestress in the tendons at transfer must be calculated on a modular ratio basis using
the stress in the adjacent concrete.
For members with post-tensioning tendons that were not stressed simultaneously, there would have been a
progressive loss of prestress during transfer due to the gradual application of the prestressing force. The resulting
loss of prestress in the tendons may be calculated on the basis of half the product of the modular ratio and the
stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, averaged along their length; alternatively, the loss of prestress may be
computed exactly based on the sequence of tensioning when it is known.
In making these calculations, it may usually be assumed that the tendons are located at their centroid.
6.7.2.4 Loss of prestress due to shrinkage of the concrete. The loss of prestress in the tendons due to shrinkage
of the concrete may be calculated from the modulus of elasticity for the tendons given in 4.3.2.2, assuming the
values for shrinkage per unit length given in Table 29. For other ages of concrete at transfer, for other conditions of
exposure, or for massive structures, some adjustment to these figures will be necessary, in which case reference can
be made to Appendix C of BS 5400-4 or specialist literature.
Shrinkage per unit length
System
Humid exposure (90% r.h.)
Normal exposure (70% r.h.)
Pre-tensioning: transfer at between 3 days and

5 days after concreting
100 x 10-6
300 x 10-6
Post-tensioning: transfer at between 7 days and

14 days after concreting
70 x 10-6
200 x 10-6
Table 29 Shrinkage of concrete

6.7.2.4A Loss of prestress due to shrinkage of the concrete
The age factors of BS5400-4 are not considered relevant to assessment.
6.7.2.5 Loss of prestress due to creep of the concrete. The loss of prestress in the bonded tendons due to creep
of the concrete must be calculated on the assumption that creep is proportional to stress in the concrete for stress of
up to one-third of the cube strength at transfer. The loss of prestress in unbonded tendons must be calculated from
the creep movement between anchors or other fixed points in the tendons. The loss of prestress is obtained from
the product of the modulus of elasticity of the tendons (see 4.3.2.2) and the creep of the concrete adjacent to the
tendons. Usually it is sufficient to assume, in calculating this loss, that the tendons are located at their centroid.
For pre-tensioning at between 3 days and 5 days after concreting and for humid or dry conditions of exposure
where the cube strength at transfer was greater than 40 N/mm, the creep of the concrete per unit length must be
taken as 48 x 10-6 per N/mm. For lower values of cube strength at transfer the creep per unit length must be taken
as 48 x 10-6 x40/fci per N/mm, where fci is the concrete strength at transfer, see 6.7.4.
A/84
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
For post-tensioning at between 7 days and 14 days after concreting and for humid or dry conditions of exposure
where the cube strength at transfer was greater than 40N/mm, the creep of the concrete per unit length must be
taken as 36 x 10-6 per N/mm. For lower values of cube strength at transfer the creep per unit length must be taken
as 36 x 10-6 x 40/fci per N/mm; where fci is the concrete strength at transfer, see 6.7.4.
Where the maximum stress anywhere in the section at transfer exceeded one-third of the cube strength of the
concrete at transfer, the value of the creep per unit length used in calculations must be increased. When the
maximum stress at transfer was half the cube strength at transfer, the values for creep are 1.25 times those given in
the preceding paragraphs; at intermediate stresses, the values must be interpolated linearly.
In applying these requirements, which are necessarily general, reference must be made to Appendix C of BS 5400:
Part 4 or specialist literature for more detailed information on the factors affecting creep.
6.7.2.5A Loss of prestress due to creep of the concrete
The age factors of BS 5400-4 are not considered relevant to assessment. In unbonded tendons, although the lack of
bond will not alter the average loss due to creep, as the creep losses are constant over the length of a beam, losses
at critical sections are likely to be smaller than with bonded construction. This may be significant in shorter spans
where the permanent compressive stresses for live load are high.
6.7.2.6 Loss of prestress during anchorage. In post-tensioning systems allowance must be made for any
movement of the tendon at the anchorage which would have occurred when the prestressing force was transferred
from the tensioning equipment to the anchorage.
6.7.2.7 Losses of prestress due to steam curing. Where steam curing was employed in the manufacture of
prestressed concrete units, changes in the behaviour of the material at higher than normal temperatures will need to
be considered. In addition, where the long-line method of pre-tensioning was used there may be additional losses
as a result of bond developed between the tendon and the concrete when the tendon was hot and relaxed. Since the
actual losses of prestress due to steam curing are a function of the techniques used by the various manufacturers,
specialist advice must be sought.
6.7.3
Loss of prestress due to friction
6.7.3.1 General. In post-tensioning systems there will have been movement of the greater part of the tendon
relative to the surrounding duct during the tensioning operation, and if the tendon were in contact with either the
duct or any spacers provided, friction would have caused a reduction in the prestressing force as the distance from
the jack increased. In addition, a certain amount of friction would have developed in the jack itself and in the
anchorage through which the tendon passed.
In the absence of site data, the stress variation likely to be expected along the tendon profile must be assessed in
accordance with 6.7.3.2 to 6.7.3.5 in order to obtain the prestressing force at the critical sections considered in
assessment.
6.7.3.2 Friction in the jack and anchorage. Jacks are generally calibrated to give a specified force at the duct
side of the anchorage. Hence, the friction loss in the jack and anchorage should not be of concern in assessment.
6.7.3.3 Friction in the duct due to unintentional variation from the specified profile. Whether the desired
duct profile was straight or curved or a combination of both, there will have been slight variations in the actual line
of the duct, which may have caused additional points of contact between the tendon and the sides of the duct, and
so produced friction, resulting in wobble losses. The prestressing force, Px, at any distance x from the jack may be
calculated from:
August 2015
A/85
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Px = Po e-Kx Equation 31
and where Kx 0.2, e-Kx may be taken as 1-Kx
where
Po
e
K
is the prestressing force in the tendon at the jacking end;

is the base of Napierian logarithms (2.718);
is the constant depending on the type of duct, or sheath employed, the nature of its inside surface, the
method of forming it and the degree of vibration employed in placing the concrete.
The value of K per metre length in Equation 31 must generally be taken as not less than 33 x 10-4, but where strong
rigid sheaths or duct formers were used closely supported so that they would not have been displaced during the
concreting operation, the value of K may be taken as 17 x 10-4. Other values may be used provided they have been
established by tests to the satisfaction of the assessor.
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
The effect
may
be ignored in sections of unbonded tendon which are free to move
laterally
at the time
Appendix
A
Volume
33 Section
44 they are
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
Appendix A
Volume
Section
stressed.
Amendments
Part
Amendments to
to BS
BS 5400-4
5400-4
Part 14
14 BD
BD 44/XX
44/XX
6.7.3.3A unbonded
Friction inprestressing
the duct duewobble
to unintentional
from the specified profile
With external
losses arevariation
eliminated.
With
external
unbonded
prestressing
wobble
losses
are
eliminated.
With external unbonded prestressing wobble losses are eliminated.
unbonded prestressing wobble losses are eliminated.
6.7.3.4With external
Friction
in the duct due to curvature of the tendon. When a tendon is curved,
in
duct
due
to
of
the
..When
aatendon
isiscurved,
the6.7.3.4
loss of tensionFriction
due to friction
is
dependent
on
the angle
turned
through
and the
coefficient
of
6.7.3.4
Friction
inthe
the
duct
due
tocurvature
curvature
oftendon.
thetendon
tendon
When
tendon
curved,
Friction
in
the
duct
due
to
curvature
6.7.3.4
of
the
When
a
tendon
is
curved,
the loss
of tension due
the
loss
of
tension
due
to
friction
is
dependent
on
the
angle
turned
through
and
the
coefficient
of
friction,
between
the
tendon
andthe
itsangle
supports.
the to
loss
of tension
due to friction
is dependent
on theand
angle
turned
through
and thebetween
coefficient
of
friction
is
dependent
on
turned
through
the
coefficient
of
friction,
the
tendon
and its
friction,
between
friction,
betweenthe
thetendon
tendonand
andits
itssupports.
supports.
supports.
The prestressing force, Px, at any distance x along the curve from the tangent point may be
The
prestressing
PPxx,P
any
calculated
from: force,
TheThe
prestressing
force,
,at
at
anydistance
distancexxalong
alongthe
thecurve
curvefrom
fromthe
thetangent
tangentpoint
pointmay
maybe
be
prestressing
force,
x, at any distance x along the curve from the tangent point may be calculated from:
calculated
from:
calculated from:
- x/
Equation 32
32

P x = P0 e - r x/ps Equation
r ps
x/

=
P
Equation
r
ps
PPxx = P00 ee
Equation32
32
wherewhere
Powhere
whereis the prestressing force in the tendon at the tangent point near the jacking end;
is the
prestressingforce
force in the
the tendon atatthe
tangent point
near thethe
jacking end;end;
prestressing
the
radius
of curvature
rpsPPoo Po is is
isthe
the
prestressing
forcein
in thetendon
tendon atthe
thetangent
tangentpoint
pointnear
near thejacking
jacking end;
r
is
the
radius
of
curvature
rrpsps ps isisthe
theradius
radiusof
ofcurvature
curvature
In the In
above
equation:
the above
equation:
- x/ r ps
In
the
above
equation:
In thewhere
abovex/r
equation:
may be taken as 1 - x/rps.
ps 0.2, e
- x/ r ps
- x/ r ps may be taken as 1 - x/rps.

0.2,
where
x/r
ps
e
maybebetaken
takenasas
- x/r
.
where
0.2, e
may
1 -1x/r

wherex/r
x/rpsps0.2,
ps. ps
-(Kx + x/ r ps )
may be taken as 1 - (Kx + x/rps).
where (Kx + x/rps) 0.2, e
-(Kx + x/ r ps )
-(Kx + x/ r ps )may
)

0.2,
may
taken
--(Kx
++x/r
).
(Kx
+
x/r
ps
e
)
0.2,
asas
1 -11(Kx
+ x/r
where
where
(Kx
+
x/r
maybebe
betaken
taken
as
(Kx
x/r
where (Kx + x/rpsps) 0.2, e
ps). ps
ps).
Values of for internal tendons may be taken as:
Values
for
internal
tendonsmay
maybe
betaken
taken as:
Values
of
internal
tendons
Values
ofof
for
for
internal
tendons
may
be
taken
as:
0.55 for steel moving on concrete;
0.55
0.55
forsteel
steelmoving
movingon
on concrete;
concrete;
0.30
forfor
steel
moving
onon
steel;
0.55
for
steel
moving
concrete;
0.30
0.30
for
steel
moving
on
steel;
for
steel
moving
on
steel;
0.25
for
steel
moving
on
lead;
0.30
for
steel
moving
on
steel;
0.25
0.25
forsteel
steelmoving
movingon
on lead;
lead;
for
forfor
greased
coated
monostrands
moving
0.25
moving
onmonostrands
lead;
0.05
0.05
forsteel
greased
coated
movingon
onplastic
plastic sheats
sheats
0.05
0.05for
forgreased
greasedcoated
coatedmonostrands
monostrandsmoving
movingon
onplastic
plasticsheats
sheats
For external tendons, in the absence of more exact data, the values of may be taken from the
For
tendons,
following
Ttable:
Forexternal
external
tendons,in
inthe
theabsence
absenceof
ofmore
moreexact
exactdata,
data,the
thevalues
valuesof
ofmay
maybe
betaken
takenfrom
fromthe
the
following
Ttable:
following Ttable:
COEFFICIENT
STEEL HDPE
COEFFICIENT
STEEL
HDPE
OFCOEFFICIENT
FRICTION
DUCT
STEEL DUCT
HDPE
OF
FRICTION
DUCT
DUCT
Lubricated
strand
0.18
0.12
OF FRICTION
DUCT
DUCT
A/86
August 2015
Lubricated
strand
0.18
0.12
Lubricated
wire
0.20
0.14
Lubricated
strand
0.18
0.12
Lubricated
0.20
0.14
Non-lubricated
strand
0.25
0.15
Lubricatedwire
wire
0.20
0.14
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
For external tendons, in the absence of more exact data, the values of may be taken from the following table:
COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION
STEEL DUCT
HDPE DUCT
Lubricated strand
0.18
0.12
Lubricated wire
0.20
0.14
Non-lubricated strand
0.25
0.15
Non-lubricated wire
0.27
0.17
Appendix
Volume
Section
4 to justify
The
value ofA may be reduced where special precautions have been taken and where
results 3are
available
Amendments
to BS
Part 14
the
value assumed.
For5400-4
example, a value of = 0.10 has been observed for strand moving
on BD
rigid44/XX
steel spacers
coated with molybdenum disulphide. Such reduced values must be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.
6.7.3.5 FrictionFriction
in circular
construction
. Where
6.7.3.4A
in the duct
due to curvature
of the
tendoncircumferential tendons have been
tensioned by means of jacks the losses due to friction may be calculated from the formula in
6.7.3.4,
the value
of may
be taken
as:
The
use ofbut
unducted
systems
or ducts
with greased
or waxed strands means that prestressing systems used in
external and unbonded prestressing have lower coefficients of friction than bonded systems.
0.45 for steel moving in smooth concrete;

6.7.3.5 0.25
Friction
in circular
Where
circumferential
tendons have been tensioned by means of jacks
for steel
movingconstruction.
on steel bearers
fixed
to the concrete;
the losses0.10
due to
may be on
calculated
from the formula in 6.7.3.4, but the value of may be taken as:
forfriction
steel moving
steel rollers.
6.7.3.6 0.45 forLubricants
steel moving. Where
in smooth
concrete;
lubricants
were specified and lower values of than those
for
steel
moving
on
steel
bearers
fixed
the agreed
concrete;
given in0.25
6.7.3.4 and 6.7.3.5 were obtained by trialstoand
with Overseeing Organisations,

0.10 for steel moving on steel rollers.
the lower values may be used for assessment.
6.7.3.6 Lubricants. Where lubricants were specified and lower values of than those given in 6.7.3.4 and 6.7.3.5
6.7.4obtained
Transmission
length
inwith
pre-tensioned
. Thethe
transmission
is defined
were
by trials and
agreed
Overseeing members
Organisations,
lower valueslength
may be
used for as
assessment.
the length over which a tendon is bonded to concrete to transmit the initial prestressing force in a
tendon to
the concrete.length in pre-tensioned members. The transmission length is defined as the length over
6.7.4
Transmission
which a tendon is bonded to concrete to transmit the initial prestressing force in a tendon to the concrete.
Where the initial prestressing force was not greater than 75% of the characteristic strength of the
tendontheand
where
the concrete
transfer
was
notofless
30 N/mm,
the transmission
initial
prestressing
forcestrength
was notatgreater
than
75%
thethan
characteristic
strength
of the tendon and where
Where
the
concrete
strength
at transfer
was not less than 30 N/mm, the transmission length, lt, may be taken as follows:
length,
lt, may
be taken
as follows:
lt
kt /
f ci
where
where
fci
is the concrete strength at transfer (in N/mm) which must be assessed from contract record drawings,
fci
is the concrete strength at transfer (in N/mm) which must be assessed from contract
available site data or original design calculations. In the absence of such information, the likely nominal
record drawings,
sitefrom
datathe
orstandards
original current
design at
calculations.
In the
absence of such
value mustavailable
be assessed
the time of the
design:
information,
the
likely
nominal
value
must
be
assessed
from
the
standards
current at the time
lt
is the transmission length (in mm);
f of the design:
is the nominal diameter of the tendon (in mm);
kt
lt

kt
is a coefficient dependent on the type of tendon, to be taken as:
is
thefortransmission
length
(in mm);wire with a total wave height less than 0.15 f;
600
plain, indented
and crimped
400 for crimped wire with a total wave height greater than or equal to 0.15 f;
is
thefornominal
diameterand
of super
the tendon
240
7-wire standard
strand;(in mm);
360 for 7-wire drawn or compacted strand.
is a coefficient dependent on the type of tendon, to be taken as:

600 for plain, indented and crimped wire with a total wave height less than 0.15;
400 for crimped wire with a total wave height greater than or equal to 0.15;
240 for 7-wire standard and super strand;
360
August 2015 for 7-wire drawn or compacted strand.
The development of stress from the end of the unit to the point of maximum stress must be
A/87
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
The development of stress from the end of the unit to the point of maximum stress must be assumed to be linear
over the transmission length.
If the tendons have been prevented from bonding to the concrete near the ends of the unit by the use of sleeves or
tape, the transmission lengths must be taken from the ends of the de-bonded portions.
6.7.4A Transmission length in pre-tensioned members
The transmission length depends on a number of variables, the most important being:
(a)
the degree of compaction of the concrete;
(b)
the strength of the concrete;
(c)
the size and type of tendon;
(d)
the deformation (eg. crimp) of the tendon;
(e)
the stress in the tendon; and
(f)
the surface condition of the tendon.
The transmission lengths of the tendons towards the top of a unit may be greater than those at the bottom.
Thesudden release of tendons may also cause a considerable increase in the transmission lengths.
It is emphasised that data are not available on transmission lengths in weak concretes less than 28 N/mm2. Hence,
caution is advised if the concrete has deteriorated below 28 N/mm2, even if the strength at transfer was in excess of
this value.
End blocks and deviators. The end block (also known as the anchor block or end zone) is defined as
6.7.5
the highly stressed zone of concrete around the termination points of a pre or post-tensioned prestressing tendon.
It extends from the point of application of prestress (i.e. the end of the bonded part of the tendon in pre-tensioned
construction or the anchorage in post-tensioned construction) to that section of the member at which linear
distribution of stress is assumed to occur over the whole cross-section.
For unbonded construction, end blocks, anchors and deviators must be assessed at the ultimate limit state for a load
equal to the characteristic strength of the tendon. If serviceability checks are required, as for flexural cracking in
deviator beams, the design load in the tendons must be taken as the tendon load before long term losses.
For bonded construction, the critical condition for end blocks normally arises during construction. Hence, if there
are no signs of distress, it will not normally be necessary to assess the end blocks.
When it is necessary to consider the strength of end blocks, the following aspects must be considered:
(a)
bursting forces around individual anchorages;
(b)
overall equilibrium of the end block;
(c)
spalling of the concrete from the loaded face around anchorages.
A/88
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
In considering each of these aspects, particular attention must be given to factors such as the following:
(1)
shape, dimensions and position of anchor plates relative to the cross-section of the end block;
(2)
the magnitude of the prestressing forces and the sequence of prestressing;
(3)
shape of the end block relative to the general shape of the member;
(4)
layout of anchorages including asymmetry, group effects and edge distances;
(5)
influence of the support reaction;
(6)
forces due to curved or divergent tendons.
The following requirements are appropriate to a circular, square or rectangular anchor plate, symmetrically
positioned on the end face of a square or rectangular post-tensioned member; these requirements are followed by
some guidance on other aspects.
The bursting tensile forces in the end blocks, or end regions of bonded post-tensioned members must be assessed
on the basis of the load in the tendon at the ultimate limit state.
The bursting tensile force, Fbst, existing in an individual square end block loaded by a symmetrically placed square
anchorage or bearing plate, may be derived from:
Fbst = Pk (0.32 - 0.3ypo/yo)
where
Pk
yo
ypo
is the load in the tendon;

is half the side of end block;
is half the side of loaded area.
The force, Fbst, is distributed in a region extending from 0.2yo to 2yo from the loaded face of the end block.
Reinforcement present may be assumed to sustain the bursting tensile force with a stress of fy/ms.
In rectangular end blocks, the bursting tensile forces in the two principal directions must be assessed from the
above expression for Fbst.
When circular anchorage or bearing plates are present, the side of the equivalent square area must be derived.
Where groups of anchorages or bearing plates occur, the end blocks must be divided into a series of symmetrically
loaded prisms and each prism treated in the preceding manner. When assessing the end block as a whole, it is
necessary to check that the groups of anchorages are appropriately tied together by reinforcement.
Special attention must be paid to end blocks having a cross-section different in shape from that of the general crosssection of the beam; reference must be made to the specialist literature.
Compliance with the preceding requirements will generally ensure that bursting tensile forces along the load axis
can be sustained. Alternative methods of assessment which use higher values of Fbst/Pk and allow for the tensile
strength of concrete may be more appropriate in some cases, particularly where large concentrated tendon forces
are involved.
August 2015
A/89
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Consideration must also be given to the spalling tensile stresses that occur in end blocks where the anchorage or
bearing plates are highly eccentric; these reach a maximum at the loaded face.
6.7.5A End blocks and deviators
The strength of structures with unbonded prestressing is dependent on the anchors and, where they are used, the
deviators. This is particularly significant as the failure mode of anchors and deviators may be brittle. Although
members with unbonded prestressing are conservatively designed on the basis of a lower bound estimate of tendon
force, anchors and deviators should be conservatively be assessed for the unfactored tendon strength.
Tendon jacking loads which have to be considered in end block design are not relevant to assessment.
The equation for Fbst gives the same values as Table 30 of BS 5400-4.
The restriction on the stress in anti-bursting reinforcement to that corresponding to a strain of 0.001 in BS 5400-4 is
a serviceability criterion which has been omitted.
Detailed information on end block strength is given in (64), whilst (65) deals with end blocks in which the concrete is
assumed to resist tension.
6.8
Considerations of details
6.8.1 General. The considerations in 6.8.2 to 6.8.6 are intended to supplement those for reinforced concrete
given in 5.8.
6.8.2
Cover to prestressing tendons
6.8.2.1 General. The requirements given in 6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.3 concerning cover to reinforcement, other than those
for curved ducts, are those which are currently considered to be necessary for the safe transmission of bond forces.
6.8.2.1A General
Adequate cover to reinforcement should ideally be present in all concrete structures designed to standards
containing appropriate provisions for durability, and the cover generally varies with the concrete grade and with
the particular condition of exposure. When the cover is less than the values resulting from the requirements in 6.8.2.2
and 6.8.2.3, bond strength could be reduced and reinforcement corrosion is most likely to occur. Guidance on the
assessment of concrete structures affected by steel corrosion and with low cover is given in BA 51 (DMRB 3.4.13).
Reference may also be made to the provisions in 4.4.1.2 of BS EN 1992-1-1 for the minimum cover required for bond.
6.8.2.2 Pre-tensioned tendons. The requirements of 5.8.2 concerning cover to reinforcement may be taken to be
applicable, except that the nominal cover should not be less than one and a half the size of the tendon or maximum
aggregate size, plus 5mm. The ends of individual pre-tensioned tendons do not normally require concrete cover.
6.8.2.3 Tendons in ducts. The cover to any duct should be not less than 50mm. Requirements for the cover to
curved tendons in ducts are given in Appendix D of BS 5400-4.
6.8.3
Spacing of prestressing tendons
6.8.3.1 General. Not applicable to assessment

6.8.3.2 Pre-tensioned tendons. Not applicable to assessment
A/90
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
6.8.3.3 Tendons in ducts. Requirements for the spacing of curved tendons in ducts are given in Appendix D of
BS 5400-4.
6.8.4
Longitudinal reinforcement in prestressed concrete beams
Reinforcement in prestressed concrete members may be considered to enhance the strength of the sections.
6.8.5
Links in prestressed concrete beams. Links present in a beam may be considered as shear reinforcement
(see 6.3.4) or to resist bursting tensile stresses in the end zones of post-tensioned members (see 6.3.4 and 6.7.4).
6.8.6
Shock loading. Not applicable to assessment
6.8.7
Deflected tendons. Not applicable to assessment
6.8.8
External tendons. To avoid second order effects due to beam deflections between points where tendons
are fixed, it must be checked that external tendons are restrained transversely relative to the concrete section at
centres not exceeding 12 times the minimum depth of the beam between the fixing points. If the spacing between
points where the tendons are held in position laterally exceeds 12 metres, check must be made to ensure that the
first natural frequency of the tendons vibrating between fixing points is not in the range 0.8 to 1.2 times that of the
bridge.
6.8.8A External tendons
If external tendons are not adequately restrained within the concrete section, the deformation of the concrete
between deviators can have a significant effect on the moment applied by the tendon to the concrete section. In
addition, inadequately restrained tendons may vibrate excessively and be susceptible to fatigue failure. Compliance
with the requirements of 6.8.8 ensures that tendons are adequately restrained and no second order effect need to be
accounted for.
7.
ASSESSMENT: PRECAST, COMPOSITE AND PLAIN CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
7.1 General
7.1.1 Introduction. This clause is concerned with the additional considerations that arise in assessment when
precast members or precast components are incorporated into a structure or when a structure in its entirety is of
precast concrete construction. It also covers the assessment of plain concrete walls and abutments.
Criteria for assessment of bridges containing shear key decks or Freyssinet hinges must be agreed with the
7.1.1A Introduction
Guidance on shear key decks and Freyssinet concrete hinges in bridges is given in BE 23 (DMRB 1.3) and BE 5
(DMRB 1.3), respectively.
7.1.2
Limit state assessment
7.1.2.1 Basis of assessment. The limit state philosophy set out in clause 4 applies equally to precast and in-situ
construction and therefore, in general, the relevant methods of assessment for reinforced concrete given in clause 5
and those for prestressed concrete given in clause 6 apply also to precast and composite construction. Sub-clauses
in clause 5 or 6 which do not apply are either specifically worded for in-situ construction or are modified by this
clause.
August 2015
A/91
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
7.1.2.2 Handling stresses. Not applicable to assessment

7.1.2.3 Connections and joints. The strength of connections is of fundamental importance in precast
construction and must be carefully considered in assessment.
In the assessment of beam and slab ends on corbels and nibs, particular attention must be given to the detailing
of overlaps and anchorages and all reinforcement adjacent to the contact faces. The detailing must be assessed in
7.1.2.3A Connections and joints
No reference is made to movement joints in the assessment code. However, it should be remembered that the lack
of adequate joints can lead to concentrated cracking.
7.2
Precast concrete construction
7.2.1
Framed structures and continuous beams. When the continuity of reinforcement or tendons through
the connections and/or the interaction between members is such that the structure behaves as a frame, or other
rigidly interconnected system, the analysis, re-distribution of moments and the assessment of individual members,
may all be in accordance with clause 5 or 6, as appropriate.
7.2.2
Other precast members. All other precast concrete members must be assessed in accordance with the
appropriate requirements of clauses 5, 6 or 7.5 and connections must be assessed in accordance with 7.3.
7.2.3
Supports for precast members
7.2.3.1 Concrete corbels. A corbel is a short cantilever beam in which the principal load is applied such that
the distance av between the line of action of the load and the face of the supporting member does not exceed the
effective depth and the depth at the outer edge of the bearing is not less than one-half of the depth at the face of the
supporting member.
The adequacy of the main tension reinforcement in a corbel must be assessed on the assumption that the corbel
behaves as a simple strut and tie system; with due allowance made for horizontal forces. The tensile force which
the main reinforcement can develop may be limited by any one of the following: the yield of the reinforcement; the
anchorage of the reinforcement in the supporting member and the anchorage at the front face of the corbel. It should
be noted that wide cracks are likely to occur if the main steel percentage r is less than 0.4%.
Any part of the area of the bearing which projects beyond the straight portion of the bars forming the main tension
reinforcement must be ignored when proportioning the strut and tie system, and when checking bearing stresses in
accordance with 7.2.3.3.
7.2.3.1A Concrete corbels
Specialist literature (21, 66) should be consulted when the depth at the outer edge of the bearing is less than one-half
of the depth at the face of the supporting member.
The limiting value of av/d for a corbel has been extended from the value of 0.6 in BS 5400-4 to 1.0 in the
assessment code. The latter value is within the range of applicability of the assessment method according to
reference (21).
When assessing corbels using strut and tie systems, further guidance on sizing of struts, ties and nodes can be found
in BS EN 1992-1-1.
A/92
August 2015
When assessing corbels using strut and tie systems, further guidance on sizing of struts, ties and
nodes can be found in BS EN 1992-1-1.
Volume 3 Section 4
Appendix A
The14BSBD
5400-4
is a serviceability
Part
44/15 minimum main steel percentage has been omitted since it(66)
requirement to prevent the rapid opening of cracks after initial cracking
TheBSBS
5400-4
requirement
for minimum
links issince
to ensure
a ductile failure
and to to prevent
The
5400-4
minimum
main steel
percentagehorizontal
has been omitted
it is a serviceability
requirement
control
the widths
of diagonal
cracks.
These(66)criteria
are not considered relevant to assessment
the
rapid opening
of cracks
after initial
cracking
.
and, thus, the minimum requirement has been omitted in the assessment code. However, the
assessor
should
be awarefor
thatminimum
the absence
of horizontal
could
resultfailure
in wide
The
BS 5400-4
requirement
horizontal
links is tolinks
ensure
a ductile
andcracks
to control the widths of
and/or
a
brittle
failure.
diagonal cracks. These criteria are not considered relevant to assessment and, thus, the minimum requirement has
been omitted in the assessment code. However, the assessor should be aware that the absence of horizontal links
could
in widerequirement
cracks and/or
failure. check is not considered relevant to
The result
BS 5400-4
fora brittle
a serviceability
assessment, unless specifically requested by the Overseeing Organisation.
The BS 5400-4 requirement for a serviceability check is not considered relevant to assessment, unless specifically
requested
Organisation.
7.2.3.2 by the Overseeing
Width of supports
for precast units. The width of supports for precast units
must be sufficient to ensure proper anchorage of tension reinforcement in accordance with 5.8.7.
7.2.3.2 Width of supports for precast units. The width of supports for precast units must be sufficient to ensure
proper anchorage of tension reinforcement in accordance with 5.8.7.
7.2.3.3
Bearing stresses. The compressive stress in the contact area must not exceed 0.6
f
cu/mc under the ultimate loads. When the members are made of concretes of different strengths,
7.2.3.3 Bearing stresses. The compressive stress in the contact area must not exceed 0.6 fcu/mc under the
the lower
concrete
is applicable.
ultimate
loads.
When strength
the members
are made of concretes of different strengths, the lower concrete strength is
applicable.
Where suitable measures have been taken to prevent splitting or spalling of the concrete, such as
the provision
of well-defined
bearing
and additional
in such
the ends
ofprovision of
Where
suitable measures
have been
takenareas
to prevent
splitting orbinding
spallingreinforcement
of the concrete,
as the
the
members,
higher
bearing
stresses
may
be
acceptable,
and
bearing
stresses
due
to
ultimate
well-defined bearing areas and additional binding reinforcement in the ends of the members, higher bearing stresses
loads
then beand
limited
to:stresses due to ultimate loads must then be limited to:
may
be must
acceptable,
bearing
3( f cu / mc )
1 + 2 Acon / Asup
but not more than
(1.5 f cu / mc )
where
where
Acon
A
Asupcon
Asup
is the contact area;
is the contact area;

is the supporting area.
is the supporting area.
For rectangular bearings (see Figure 6a):
For rectangular bearings (see Figure 6a):
Asup = (bx + 2x)(by + 2y) and x bx , y by

where
Asup = (bx + 2x)(by + 2y) and x bx , y by
where
y directions
respectively;
bxb,xb, yb y are the dimensions
dimensionsofofthe
thebearing
bearingininthe
thex,x,
y directions
respectively;
x, y
are the dimensions from the boundary of the contact area to the boundary of the support area.
For lightweight aggregate concrete the bearing stresses due to ultimate loads must be limited to two-thirds of those
for
normal weight aggregate concrete given by the above formula.
Mmmm/yyyy
Chapter/Page
Higher bearing stresses due to ultimate loads must be used only where justified by tests, e.g. concrete hinges.
August 2015
A/93
For lightweight aggregate concrete the bearing stresses due to ultimate loads must be limited to
two-thirds of those for normal weight aggregate concrete given by the above formula.
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Higher bearing stresses due to ultimate loads must be used only where justified by tests, Part
e.g. 14 BD 44/15
concrete hinges.
Figure 6a Bearing areas

Figure 6a Bearing areas
7.2.3.3A Bearing stresses
7.2.3.3A
Bearing stresses
The allowable
arethan
higher
than
the BS
5400-4
values.theHowever
the bearing
The allowable
bearingbearing
stressesstresses
are higher
the BS
5400-4
values.
However
bearing stress
expression is that
(67)
(67)
stress
expression
is
that
given
in
BS
8110-1
.
given in BS 8110-1 .
7.2.3.4
Horizontal Horizontal
forces or rotations
at bearings.
presence. of
significant
forces at bearing
7.2.3.4
forces or
rotationsThe
at bearings
The
presencehorizontal
of significant
can reduce
the
load-carrying
capacity
of
the
supporting
and
supported
members
considerably
by causing
horizontal forces at bearing can reduce the load-carrying capacity of the supporting and
supported
premature
splitting
or shearing.
forces
may be splitting
due to creep,
shrinkage
and temperature
members
considerably
byThese
causing
premature
or shearing.
These
forces mayeffects
be dueortoresult from
misalignment,
lack of plumb
or other causes.
When
these from
forcesmisalignment,
are likely to belack
significant,
it is
creep, shrinkage
and temperature
effects
or result
of plumb
ornecessary
other to check
that either:
causes. When these forces are likely to be significant, it is necessary to check that either:
(a)
sliding bearings are present; or
(c)
continuity reinforcement is present to tie together the ends of the supported members.
(a)
sliding bearings are present; or
(b) suitable
suitable
lateral reinforcement is present in the top of the supporting member; and
(b)
lateral reinforcement is present in the top of the supporting member; and
(c)
continuity reinforcement is present to tie together the ends of the supported members.
Where, owing to large spans or other reasons, large rotations are likely to occur at the end
supports
flexural
members,
capable
accommodating
rotationsofshould
Where,
owing of
to large
spans
or other suitable
reasons, bearings
large rotations
areof
likely
to occur at thethese
end supports
flexural
be
present.
In
the
absence
of
such
bearings,
bearing
stresses
could
be
increased
due
to
members, suitable bearings capable of accommodating these rotations should be present. In the absence of such
concentration
of thecould
reaction
towards one
of a bearingofand/or
flexure
of the one
supported
bearings,
bearing stresses
be increased
due edge
to concentration
the reaction
towards
edge of a bearing
and/or
flexure could
of the result,
supported
memberon
could
on the type
of bearing actually present.
member
depending
the result,
type ofdepending
bearing actually
present.
7.2.4 7.2.4Joints
between
precast
members
Joints
between
precast
members
7.2.4.1 General.
The
critical. sections
of members
to joints close
must be
assessed
under
the worst under
combinations
7.2.4.1
General
The critical
sectionsclose
of members
to joints
must
be assessed
of shear, axial force and bending effects caused by the co-existing ultimate vertical and horizontal forces. The
the worst combinations of shear, axial force and bending effects caused by the co-existing
evaluation of the effects must take due account of any fixities imposed by the joints.
7.2.4.2 Half joint. For the type of joint shown in Figure 7(a), the maximum vertical ultimate load, Fv, must not
exceed vubdo where
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
vu
b
do
A/94
is 0.36 (0.7 - fcu/250)fcu/mc,

is the breadth of the beam, and
is the depth to the horizontal reinforcement in the half joint.
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
The capacity of an half joint may be determined by considering the two following strut and tie systems and
summing the capacities of the two systems.
The first system, shown in Figure 7(b), involves the inclined reinforcement which intersects the line of action of
Fv. The inclined reinforcement may take the form of bent-up bars or links. In the case of bent-up bars the bearing
stresses inside the bends (see 5.8.6.9) must be checked to determine whether the stress in the bars should be limited
to less than fy/ms.
In the case of links, their anchorage in the compression face of the beam must be in accordance with 5.8.6.5, whilst
in the tension face the horizontal component, Fh, of the link force is transferred to the main reinforcement. The links
may be considered to be fully anchored in the tension face if the anchorage bond stress of the main reinforcement
due to the force Fh does not exceed twice the anchorage bond stresses given in 5.8.6.3.
The second strut and tie system shown in Figure 7(c) involves the vertical reinforcement in the full depth section
adjacent to the half joint, and the horizontal reinforcement in the half joint in excess of that required to resist the
horizontal ultimate load.
7.2.4.2A Half joint
The assessment sub-clause dealing with half joints is more general than the BS 5400-4 sub-clause in that it permits
two strut and tie systems to be assessed and the load capacities of the two systems added. This approach has been
shown to predict adequately failure loads (68).
The BS 5400-4 requirement to limit the shear stress to 4vc, with vc calculated for the full beam section, was
intended to prevent over-reinforcement of the joint and, hence, to ensure a ductile failure. It is more logical, in
terms of shear capacity, to adopt the maximum allowable shear stress given in 5.3.3.1.
BA 39 (DMRB 3.4.6) gives additional guidance on the assessment of half joints at both the ultimate and
serviceability limit states. Further guidance on sizing of struts, ties and nodes can be found in BS EN 1992-1-1.
Other feasible strut and tie systems may also be appropriate, particularly where there are reinforcement detailing
shortfalls, and assessors may consider other reference sources and specialist literature. Reference should be made to
the Overseeing Organisation for the latest advice on assessing structures containing half joints.
August 2015
A/95
Appendix A
Appendix A
Appendix A
7.3
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Volume 3 Section 4
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Part 14 BD 44/XX
Figure 7 Half joint

Figure 7 Half joint
Structural connections between units
7.3.1 General
Figure 7 Half joint
7.3.1.1 Structural requirements of connections. When assessing the connections across joints between precast
members the overall stability of the structure must be considered.
7.3.1.2 Assessment method. Connections must, where possible, be assessed in accordance with the generally
accepted methods applicable to reinforced concrete (see clause 5), prestressed concrete (see clause 6) or structural
steel. Where, by the nature of the construction or material used, such methods are not applicable, the efficiency of
the connection must be proved by appropriate tests.
7.3.1.3 Considerations affecting design details. Not applicable to assessment
A/96 Chapter/Page
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
August 2015
Mmmm/yyyy
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
7.3.1.4 Factors affecting design and construction. Not applicable to assessment

7.3.2
Continuity of reinforcement
7.3.2.1 General. The assumptions made in analysing the structure and assessing critical sections must reflect
the degree of continuity of reinforcement through a connection. The following methods are capable of achieving
continuity of reinforcement:
(a)
lapping bars;
(b)
butt welding;
(c) sleeving;
(d)
parallel threading of bars and tapered threads.
The strength of the joints in (c) and (d) and any other method not listed must be assessed on the basis of test
evidence, including behaviour under fatigue conditions where relevant. For methods (c) and (d), in tests on an
assembly consisting of the size, grade and profile of the reinforcing bar used and the type of connection used, the
permanent elongation after loading to 60% of the characteristic yield strength of the reinforcement must not exceed
0.1mm, and the ultimate tensile strength of the joined bar must exceed its characteristic yield strength by at least the
percentage specified in the British Standard the bar was specified to. Where supported by satisfactory test evidence,
the strength of the joint may be based on the specified characteristic yield strength of the joined bars divided in
each case by the appropriate ms factor.
7.3.2.2 Sleeving. The following three principal types of sleeve jointing were acceptable under BS 5400-4 and are
considered adequate for assessment purposes, provided that appropriate test data are available:
(a)
grout or resin filled sleeves;
(b)
sleeves that mechanically align the square-sawn ends of two bars to allow the transmission of
compressive forces only;
(c)
sleeves that are mechanically swaged to the bars.
7.3.2.2A Sleeving
This sub-clause has been abbreviated from BS 5400-4 sub-clause, because it is envisaged that test data appropriate
to the actual condition of use would be obtained.
7.3.2.3 Threading. The following methods for joining threaded bars were acceptable under BS 5400-4 and are
considered adequate for assessment purposes:
(a)
Parallel threaded ends of bars are joined by a coupler having left and right-hand threads.
(b)
One set of bars is welded to a steel plate that is drilled to receive the threaded ends of the second set of
bars, which are fixed to the plate by means of nuts.
(c)
Threaded anchors cast into a precast unit to receive the threaded ends of reinforcement.
(d)
Taper threaded bars joined by the use of internally taper threaded couplers.
August 2015
A/97
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
7.3.2.3A Threading
See 7.3.2.2A.
7.3.2.4 Welding of bars. Not applicable to assessment
7.3.2.4A Welding of bars
The BS 5400-4 sub-clause is assumed to refer to the locations of welded connections and is, thus, not relevant to
assessment.
7.3.3
Other types of connection. The load carrying capacity of any other type of connection at the ultimate
limit state must be justified by test evidence.
Under service loads, no tensile stresses are permitted for resin adhesive joints and resin mortar joints; for cement
mortar joints, the stresses in the joint must be compressive throughout the joint and not less than 1.5 N/mm2.
7.3.3A
Other types of connection
For resisting shear and flexure, suitable connections are generally only those types which are made by prestressing
across the joint.
7.4
Composite concrete construction
7.4.1 General. The requirements of 7.4 apply to flexural members consisting of precast concrete units acting in
conjunction with added concrete where the contact surface is capable of transmitting longitudinal shear. The precast
units may be of either reinforced or prestressed concrete.
In general, the analysis and assessment of composite concrete structures and members must be in accordance with
clause 5 or 6, modified where appropriate by 7.4.2 and 7.4.3. Particular attention must be given in the assessment to
the effect of the method of construction and whether or not props were used. The relative stiffness of members must
be based on the concrete, gross transformed or net transformed section properties as described in 4.4.2.1; if the
concrete strengths in the two components of the composite member differ by more than 10 N/mm, allowance for
this must be made in assessing stiffness and stresses.
Differential shrinkage of the added concrete and precast concrete members requires consideration in analysing
composite members for the serviceability limit states (see 7.4.3); it need not be considered for the ultimate limit
state.
When precast prestressed units, having pre-tensioned tendons, are assessed as continuous members with continuity
obtained with reinforced concrete cast in-situ over the supports, the compressive stresses due to prestress in the
ends of the units may be assumed to vary linearly over the transmission length for the tendons in assessing the
strength of sections.
7.4.2
Ultimate Limit State
7.4.2.1 General. Where the cross-section of composite members and the applied loading have increased by
stages (e.g. a precast prestressed unit initially supporting self-weight and the weight of added concrete and
subsequently acting compositely for live loading), the entire load may be assumed to act on the final cross-section.
A/98
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
7.4.2.2 Vertical shear. The assessment of the resistance of composite sections to vertical shear must be in
accordance with 5.3.3 for reinforced concrete (except that in determining the area As, the area of tendons within the
transmission length must be ignored) and 6.3.4 for prestressed concrete, modified where appropriate as follows.
(a)
For I, M, T, U and box beam precast prestressed concrete units with an in situ reinforced concrete top
slab cast over the precast units (including pseudo box construction), the shear resistance may be based on
either of the following:
(1)
the precast unit acting alone assessed in accordance with 6.3.4;
(2)
the composite section assessed in accordance with 6.3.4. In this case, section properties must be based on
those of the composite section, with due allowance for the different grades of concrete where appropriate.
(b)
For inverted T beam precast prestressed concrete units with transverse reinforcement placed through holes
in the bottom of the webs of the units, completely infilled with concrete placed between and over the units
to form a solid deck slab, the shear resistance may be taken as the sum of Vi and Vp where:
Vi
is the shear capacity of the infill concrete assessed in accordance with 5.3.3 with the breadth taken as the
distance between adjacent precast webs and the depth as the mean depth of infill concrete, or the mean
effective depth to the longitudinal reinforcement where this is provided in the infill section. Where there
is no longitudinal reinforcement in the infill, d may be taken as 0.9 times the average depth of the infill. Vi
should not be taken as greater than half of the concrete component of the shear capacity of the prestressed
beam (i.e. not greater than 0.5Vco nor 0.5Vcr of the precast prestressed section, whichever is applicable);
Vp
is the shear capacity of the precast prestressed section assessed in accordance with 6.3.4 with the breadth
taken as the web thickness and the depth as the depth of the precast unit.
7.4.2.2A Vertical shear

The BS 5400-4 rules for shear in infill concrete decks are conservative as they do not allow for redistribution of
shear between the in situ and precast sections. Tests (69) have shown that the shear capacity of an infill concrete deck
can be taken as the sum of the infill concrete section, Vi, and the precast concrete section, Vp.
7.4.2.3 Longitudinal shear. The longitudinal shear force, V1, per unit length of a composite member, whether
simply-supported or continuous, must be calculated at the interface of the precast unit and the in-situ concrete and
at any vertical planes which may be critical in longitudinal shear (e.g. planes 2-2 or 2-2 in Figure 8) by an elastic
method using properties of the composite concrete section (see 4.4.2.1) with due allowance for different grades of
concrete where appropriate.
August 2015
A/99
of the precast unit and the in-situ concrete and at any vertical planes which may be critical in
longitudinal shear (e.g. planes 2-2 or 2'-2' in Figure 8) by an elastic method using properties of
Appendix
A
3 Section 4
the composite
concrete section (see 4.4.2.1) with due allowance for different grades ofVolume
concrete
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD 44/15
where appropriate.
Figure 88Potential
Potentialshear
shearplanes.
planes.
Figure
V1
k1
V1
k1
fcu
mc fcu
Ls
v1 mc
Ls
must not exceed the lesser of the following:

must not exceed the lesser of the following:
(a) (k1fcu/mc)Ls
(a)
(k f / + )L
s
(b) (v1/1mvcu)Lsmc
(0.8
Aefs/ms), where
(b)
(v
/
)L
+
(0.8
whereacross the shear plane under consideration and must be
1
mv
s
efs/ms), bond
is a constant depending on theAconcrete
is as
a constant
depending construction
on the concrete
bond across
shear
under
taken
0.24 for monolithic
or surface
type 1 the
or 0.14
forplane
surface
typeconsideration
2. These values must
and
must
be
taken
as
0.24
for
monolithic
construction
or
surface
type
1
or 0.14 for surface
be reduced by 25% for lightweight aggregate concrete construction;
type
2. These values
must
be reduced
by 25%
lightweight
aggregate
concrete
is the
characteristic,
or worst
credible,
strength
of thefor
weaker
of the two
concretes
each side of the shear
construction;
plane; but must not be taken as >45 N/mm
is partial
the characteristic,
credible,
of the weaker of the two concretes each
is the
safety factoror
forworst
concrete
given strength
in 4.3.3.3;
side
of theofshear
plane;
but under
must not
be taken as >45 N/mm
is the
breadth
the shear
plane
consideration;
is the
shear factor
stress in
concretegiven
for the
under consideration, and must be taken as:
is longitudinal
the partial safety
forthe
concrete
in plane
4.3.3.3;
is the breadth of the shear plane under consideration;
less than
and not
greater than 1.56
(1) v1 For is
monolithic
construction:
the longitudinal
shear 0.05
stressfcuinbut
thenot
concrete
for1.13
theN/mm
plane under
consideration,
and N/mm;
must
be taken as:
For surface type 1: 0.04 fcu but not less than 0.8 N/mm and not greater than 1.28N/mm;
(2)
(1)
For monolithic construction: 0.05 fcu but not less than 1.13 N/mm and not greater than
For surface type 2: 0.019 fcu but not less than 0.38 N/mm and not greater than 0.63N/mm.
1.56 N/mm;
(2) must
For
1: 0.04
fcu but not aggregate
less than 0.8
N/mm and not greater than 1.28N/mm;
All values
besurface
reducedtype
by 25%
for lightweight
concrete;
(3)
For surface type 2: 0.019 fcu but not less than 0.38 N/mm and not greater than
0.63N/mm.
is the material partial safety factor for shear given in 4.3.3.3;
mv
All
values
must
reduced by per
25%unit
forlength
lightweight
aggregate
Ae
is the area
ofbe
reinforcement
crossing
the shearconcrete;
plane under consideration; reinforcement
(3)
fs
ms
assumed to resist co-existent bending and vertical shear (see 7.4.2.2) may be included;
is the stress at the ultimate limit state in the steel reinforcement of area Ae. The stress may be assumed to
be the characteristic, or worst credible, strength, fy, if the reinforcement Ae is fully anchored (see 5.8.6);
otherwise fs must be taken as a fraction of fy in proportion to the ratio of the anchorage
available to that
Chapter/Page
Mmmm/yyyy
required by 5.8.6; the value of fs should be such that Aefs/b is not greater than 10 N/mm, where b is the
width of the interface under consideration.
is the partial safety factor for steel given in 4.3.3.
For composite beam and slab construction, reinforcement crossing the shear plane must be considered as effective
only if its spacing does not exceed the lesser of the following:
(a)
six times the minimum thickness of the in-situ concrete flange;
(b)
900 mm.
A/100
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
The types of surface are defined as follows:

Type 1: The contact surface of the concrete in the precast members was prepared as described in either (1) or (2) as
appropriate.
(1)
When the concrete had set but not hardened the surface was sprayed with a fine spray of water or brushed
with a stiff brush, just sufficient to remove the outer mortar skin and expose the larger aggregate without
disturbing it.
(2)
The surface skin and laitance were removed by sand blasting or the use of a needle gun, but not by
hacking.
Type 2: The contact surface of the concrete in the precast member was jetted with air and/or water to remove
laitance and all loose material. (This type of surface is known as rough as cast.)
The type of surface must be assessed from contract record drawings, available site data or original design
calculations. In the absence of such information, surface type 2 must be assumed.
For inverted T beams defined in 7.4.2.2(b) no longitudinal shear strength check is required.
7.4.2.3A Longitudinal shear
The BS 5400-4 design values of k1 implicitly allow for a partial safety factor of 1.6. Hence, the assessment
characteristic values are 1.6 times the BS 5400-4 design values, and the partial safety factor, ms, is included in
expression (a).
Test data (70) have shown that the BS 5400-4 design values of v1 implicitly allow for partial safety factors of 1.25,
1.6 and 2.0 for type 2, type 1 and monolithic surfaces, respectively. Furthermore, the values for monolithic concrete
have been shown to be less dependent on concrete strength than implied by BS 5400-4. Hence, the assessment
characteristic values have been obtained as follows.
Monolithic
Design values suggested in reference (70) were incorporated in a slightly amended form in BS 5400-4. These values
incorporate a partial safety factor of 1.25 and have thus been multiplied by 1.25 to give the characteristic values for
assessment.
Surface type 1
BS 5400-4 values multiplied by 1.6.
Surface type 2
BS 5400-4 values multiplied by 1.25.
The partial safety factor for shear mv is applied to the characteristic v1 values (70).
The steel stress definition has been modified to permit partially anchored reinforcement to contribute to the
longitudinal shear capacity.
The factor 0.8 in expression (b) reduces to the BS 5400-4 value of 0.7 when the BS 5400-4 value of ms of 1.15 is
applied.
August 2015
A/101
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
The BS 5400-4 minimum steel requirement of 0.15% has not been included because its origin is unclear. However,
one should be aware that brittle longitudinal shear failures can occur with small amounts of reinforcement
(70). Furthermore, in reference (70) it is observed that the stirrups act as ties across the interface. If the form of
construction consists of a slab cast on to the top of beams with no reinforcement crossing the interface, then there
will be nothing to provide a tie if the tensile resistance of the concrete across the interface is destroyed by the
effects of repeated loading. In such a case, it would be prudent not to treat the member as acting compositely.
However, if the in-situ slab encases the top flange of the beam then mechanical interlock between the precast and
in-situ concretes may provide adequate tie action and the interface shear strength could be based on the concrete
interface shear resistance above.
The reason for the maximum steel spacing requirement in BS 5400-4 is also unclear. Hence, the assessor should
apply engineering judgement when considering this requirement and not automatically ignore reinforcement spaced
at centres greater than the specified maximum.
7.4.3
Serviceability Limit State. When a serviceability limit state assessment for composite concrete
structures is required by the Overseeing Organisation, it must be based on 7.4.3 of BS 5400-4, with the following
amendments:
a.
Any reference, in 7.4.3.1 to 7.4.3.5 of BS 5400-4, to clauses and sub-clauses of BS 5400-4 is to be

intended as a reference to the corresponding clauses and sub-clauses in this Standard.
b.
The maximum compressive stress limit referred to in 7.4.3.2 of BS 5400-4 can be taken as equal to
0.625(fcu/mc).
c.
The allowable flexural tensile stresses in Table 32 of BS 5400-4 may be increased by multiplying by a factor
not exceeding 2.5. However in such circumstances, the 50% increase permitted in 7.4.3.3 of BS 5400-4
should not be applied.
d.
The flexural and hypothetical tensile stress limits referred to in the last paragraph of 7.4.3.3 of BS 5400-4
are to be taken, respectively, as the class 2 tensile stress limit and the class 3 hypotethical tensile stress
limit in 6.3.2.

There appears to be no test data to quantify the permissible enhancement in allowable compressive stress in 7.4.3.2
of BS 5400-4. However, for the case of a fully restrained flange, an enhancement of up to 50% (67) was permitted in
BS 8110-1.
The allowable flexural tensile stresses in Table 32 of BS 5400-4 are very conservative and include a partial safety
factor of about 2.5 on the lower bound to the experimental evidence (4).
7.5
Plain concrete walls and abutments
7.5.1 General. A plain concrete wall or abutment is a vertical load bearing concrete member whose greatest
lateral dimension is more than four times its least lateral dimension and which is assumed to be without
reinforcement when considering strength.
The requirements given in 7.5.2 to 7.5.10 refer to the assessment of a plain concrete wall that has a height not
exceeding five times its average thickness.
A/102
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
7.5.1A General
BS 5400-4 restricts its application to braced plain concrete walls with a slenderness ratio not exceeding 5, since
it is considered that this ratio reflects current practice. When assessing an unbraced and/or a more slender wall,
the assessor may consult 3.9.4 of BS 8110-1 which deals with unbraced and slender walls. In applying the latter
sub-clause for assessment purposes, the constant 0.3 in Equations 43 to 46 of BS 8110-1 should be replaced with
(0.675/mcw), with mcw as given in 4.3.3.3.
Moments and forces in walls and abutments. Moments, shear forces and axial forces in a wall must be
7.5.2
determined in accordance with 4.4.
The axial force may be calculated on the assumption that the beams and slabs transmitting forces into it are simply
supported.
The resultant axial force in a member may act eccentrically due to vertical loads not being applied at the centre of
the member or due to the action of horizontal forces. Such eccentricities must be treated as indicated in 7.5.3 and
7.5.4.
A a direction at right-angles to the wall must be taken as not less than that
Volume
3 Section
4
The minimumAppendix
moment in
produced
by
Amendments
to
BS
5400-4
Part
14
BD
44/XX
considering the ultimate axial load per unit length acting at an eccentricity of 0.05 times the thickness of the wall.
7.5.3
Eccentricity in the plane of the wall or abutment. In the case of a single member this eccentricity can
thestatics
lengthalone.
of theWhere
member.
Where aforce
shearisconnection
vertical edges
of adjacent
be calculated of
from
a horizontal
resisted by between
several members,
the amount
allocated
members
can
withstand
the
calculated
forces,
an
appropriate
elastic
analysis
may
be used.
to each member must be in proportion to its relative stiffness provided the resultant eccentricity in any
individual
member is not greater than one third of the length of the member. Where a shear connection between vertical edges
7.5.4 can withstand
Eccentricity
at right-angles
to walls or elastic
abutments
. The
load
transmitted to a
of adjacent members
the calculated
forces, an appropriate
analysis
may
be used.
wall by a concrete deck may be assumed to act at one-third the depth of the bearing area from the
7.5.4
The load
transmitted
a wall
by a concrete
deck
Eccentricity
at right-angles
loaded face.
Where theretoiswalls
an in or
situabutments.
concrete deck
on either
side oftothe
member
the common
may be assumed
to
act
at
one-third
the
depth
of
the
bearing
area
from
the
loaded
face.
Where
there
is
an
in
situ
bearing area may be assumed to be shared equally by each deck.
concrete deck on either side of the member the common bearing area may be assumed to be shared equally by each
deck.
The resultant eccentricity of the total load on a member unrestrained in position at any level must
be calculated making full allowance for the eccentricity of all vertical loads and the overturning
The resultant moments

eccentricity
of the total
loadlateral
on a member
in position at any level must be calculated
produced
by any
forces unrestrained
above that level.
making full allowance for the eccentricity of all vertical loads and the overturning moments produced by any lateral
forces above that level.
The resultant eccentricity of the total load on a member restrained in position at any level may be
immediately
above
a lateralatsupport
themay
resultant
eccentricity
The resultant calculated
eccentricityon
ofthe
theassumption
total load onthat
a member
restrained
in position
any level
be calculated
on theof
all immediately
the vertical loads
thatsupport
level is
assumption that
aboveabove
a lateral
thezero.
resultant eccentricity of all the vertical loads above that
level is zero.
7.5.5
Analysis of section. Loads of a purely local nature (as at bearings or column
bases)
may
be
assumed
immediately
dispersed
provided
localbases)
stressmay
under
load does
7.5.5
Analysis of section. Loads oftoa be
purely
local nature
(as at bearings
or the
column
be the
assumed
to
notdispersed
exceed that
giventhe
in 7.5.7.
Where
the resultant
of allnot
theexceed
axial loads
act eccentrically
in the
the
be immediately
provided
local stress
under
the load does
that given
in 7.5.7. Where
of the
member,
the ultimate
loadofper
lengththe
of ultimate
wall, nw,axial
mustload
be assessed
on theof
resultant of allplane
the axial
loads
act eccentrically
in axial
the plane
theunit
member,
per unit length
be assessed
on
the
basis
of
an
elastic
analysis
assuming
a
linear
distribution
of
load
along
the
length
wall, nw, mustbasis
of an elastic analysis assuming a linear distribution of load along the length of the member,
f cu
of the member,
assuming
a tensileresistance
resistanceof
ofconcrete
concrete of
of 0.12
.. Consider
bending
in
assuming
a tensile
Considerfirst
firstthe
theaxial
axialforce
forceand
and
bending
mc
in the
of the wall
to determineofthe
distribution
of tensionalong
and compression
along themoment
wall.
the plane of the
wallplane
to determine
the distribution
tension
and compression
the wall. The bending
at right anglesThe
to the
wall must
then be
considered
the wall
section
assessed
forconsidered
this moment
and
compression
bending
moment
at right
anglesand
to the
must
then be
and
thethesection
assessed
or tension perfor
unitthis
length
at various
positions
along the
Where
the eccentricity
of loadpositions
in the plane
of the
moment
and the
compression
or wall.
tension
per unit
length at various
along
the
member is zero,
a uniform
distribution
of nwofmay
wall.
Where the
eccentricity
loadbeinassumed.
the plane of the member is zero, a uniform distribution of
nw may be assumed.
For members restrained in position, the axial load per unit length of member, nw, due to ultimate
August 2015loads must be such that:
nw (0.675 fcu/mcw)(h - 2ex)
A/103
Equation 36
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
For members restrained in position, the axial load per unit length of member, nw, due to ultimate loads must be such
that:
nw (0.675 fcu/mcw)(h - 2ex) Equation 36
where
nw
h
ex
fcu
mcw
is the maximum axial load per unit length of member due to ultimate loads;
is the overall thickness of the section;
is the resultant eccentricity of load at right-angles to the plane of the member (see 7.5.2) (minimum value
0.05h);
is the characteristic, or worst credible, concrete strength;
is a material partial safety factor which is taken as 2.25 if the characteristic concrete strength is used, and
1.80 if the worst credible strength is used.
7.5.5A Analysis of section

The factor w in BS 5400-4 and CP 110 has been replaced with a constant value of 0.3 in BS 8110-1. The latter
value includes (67) an allowance for a partial safety factor of 2.25. Hence, in the assessment code, the factor 0.3 is
replaced with (0.3 x 2.25/mcw) where mcw is either 2.25 (for use with the characteristic strength) or 2.25 x 1.2/1.5 =
1.80 (for use with the worst credible strength).
7.5.6 Shear. The resistance to shear forces in the plane of the member may be assumed to be adequate provided
the horizontal shear force due to ultimate loads is less than either one quarter of the vertical load, or the force to
produce an average shear stress of 0.45 N/mm over the whole cross-section of the member in the case of fcu of at
least 25 N/mm; where fcu is less than 25 N/mm, a figure of 0.3 N/mm must be used.
7.5.6A Shear
The background to this sub-clause, which originated in CP 110, is unclear. In particular the value of the inherent
partial safety factor is not known. Hence, the shear stresses should be considered as assessment values and no
partial safety factor applied to them.
7.5.7 Bearing. Bearing stresses due to ultimate loads of a purely local nature, as at girder bearings, must be
limited in accordance with 7.2.3.3.
7.5.8
Deflection of plain concrete walls or abutments. Not applicable to assessment
7.5.9
Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement. Not applicable to assessment
7.5.10
Stress limitations for Serviceability Limit State. Not applicable to assessment
A/104
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
ANNEX A: REFERENCES
A.1 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB): HMSO
BD 9
Implementation of BS 5400-10: 1980 Code of Practice for Fatigue
(DMRB 1.3)
BD 37 Loads for Highway Bridges
(DMRB 1.3)
BD 21 The Assessment of Highway Bridges and Structures
(DMRB 3.4.3)
BD 48 The Assessment and Strengthening of Highway Bridge Supports
(DMRB 3.4.7)
BD 86 The Assessment of Highway Bridges and Structures for the Effects of Special Types General Order
(STGO) and Special Order (SO) Vehicles
(DMRB 3.4.19)
BS 5400-1:1988. Steel, concrete and composite bridges. General statement
BS 5400-10:1980. Steel, concrete and composite bridges. Code of practice for fatigue
A.2 INFORMATIVE REFERENCES
Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB): HMSO
BA 40 Tack Welding of Reinforcing Bars
(DMRB 1.3.4)
BE 23 Shear key decks
(DMRB 1.3)
BE 5
Rules for the Design and Use of Freyssinet Concrete Hinges in Highway Structures
(DMRB 1.3)
DMRB Volume 3: Section 1: Inspection
BA 93 Structural Assessment of Bridges with Deck Hinges
(DMRB 3.1.5)
August 2015
A/105
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15

BA 38 Assessment of Fatigue Life of Corroded or Damaged Reinforcing Bars
(DMRB 3.4.5).
BA 39 Assessment of Reinforced Concrete Half Joints
(DMRB 3.4.6)
BA 51 The Assessment of Concrete Structures Affected by Steel Corrosion
(DMRB 3.4.13)
BD 81 Use of Compressive Membrane Action in Bridge Decks
(DMRB 3.4.20)
BS 4757:1971. Specification for nineteen-wire steel strand for prestressed concrete
BS 4486:1980. Specification for hot rolled and hot rolled and processed high tensile alloy steel bars for the prestressing
of concrete
BS 5896:1980. Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing of concrete
BS 6089:2010. Assessment to in situ compressive strength in structures and precast concrete components
Complementary guidance to that given in BS EN 13791
BS 8110-1:1997. Structural use of concrete. Part 1. Code of practice for design and construction (incorporating
amendments 1 to 4, 2007)
BS 8110-2:1985. Structural use of concrete. Part 2. Code of practice for special circumstances (incorporating
amendments 1 to 3, 2005)
BS EN 1992-1-1:2004. Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings
(incorporating amendments 1 and 2, 2011)
BS EN 1992-2:2005. Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures Part 2: Concrete bridges design and detailing rules
(incorporating amendment 1, 2010)
CP110. Parts 2 and 3:1972. British Standards code of practice - Use of concrete
PD 6687-2:2008. Recommendations for the design of structures to BS EN 1992-2:2005
Other Documents
1.
INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. Appraisal of existing structures. October 2010.
2.
THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Concrete core testing for strength. Technical Report No. 11, 1987.
3.
CLARK, L. A. Elastic analysis of concrete bridges and the ultimate limit state. The Highway Engineer,
October 1977, pp. 22-24.
A/106
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
4.
CLARK, L. A. Concrete bridge design to BS 5400. Construction Press, 1983, pp. 186. (Including supplement
incorporating 1984 revisions, 1985, pp. 31).
5.
NIELSEN, M. P. and HOANG, L. C. Limit analysis and concrete plasticity. Prentice-Hall, 2011, 816 pp.
IBELL, T. J., MORLEY, C. T. and MIDDLETON, C. R. Shear assessment of concrete beam-and-slab

bridges. Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers, Structures and Buildings 128 (3), 1998,
pp.386391.
7.
VALERIO, P., IBELL, T. J. and DARBY, A. P. Shear assessment of prestressed concrete bridges. Proceedings
of the Institution of Civil Engineers, Bridge Engineering 164 (4), 2011, pp. 195-210.
8.
VALERIO, P. Realistic shear assessment and novel strengthening of existing concrete bridges. PhD thesis,
University of Bath, 2009, 235 pp.
9.
COPE, R. J. and RAO, P. V. A two-stage procedure for the non-linear analysis of slab bridges. Proceedings of
the Institution of Civil Engineers, Vol. 75, Part 2, December 1983, pp. 671-688.
10.
COPE, R. J. and CLARK, L. A. Concrete slabs: analysis and design. Elsevier Applied Science, 1984, 507 pp.
11.
SIVIERO, E. Rotation capacity of monodimensional members in structural concrete. Istituto Universitario di

Architettura di Venezia, Instituto di Scienza delle Construzioni, 1973, pp. 17.
12.
MARSHALL, W. T. A survey of the problems of lateral instability in reinforced concrete beams. Proceedings
of the Institution of Civil Engineers, Vol. 43, July 1969, pp. 397-406.
13.
KENT, D. C. and PARK, R. Flexural members with confined concrete. Proceedings of the American Society
of Civil Engineers, Vol. 97, No. ST7, July 1971, pp. 1969-1990.
14.
CHAN, W. W. L. The ultimate strength and deformation of plastic hinges in reinforced concrete frameworks.
Magazine on Concrete Research, Vol. 7, No. 21, November 1955, pp. 121-132.
15.
PEDERSON, C. Shear in beams with bent-up bars. Final Report of the International Association for Bridge
and Structural Engineering Colloquium on Plasticity in Reinforced Concrete, Copenhagen, 1979, pp. 79-86.
16.
SHEAR STUDY GROUP. The shear strength of reinforced concrete beams. Institution of Structural
Engineers, London, 1969, pp. 170.
17.
CORGI, J. L. Shear capacity of high strength concrete beams. Concrete, Vol. 21, No. 3, March 1987,
pp.2426.
18.
BURTON, K. T. and HOGNESTAD, E. Fatigue tests of reinforcing bars tack welding of stirrups.
Proceedings of the American Concrete Institute, Vol. 64, No. 5, May 1967, pp. 244-252.
19.
BAKER, A. L. L., YU. C. W. and REGAN, P. E. Explanatory note on the proposed Unified Code Clause
on shear in reinforced concrete beams with special reference to the Report of the Shear Study Group. The
Structural Engineer, Vol. 47, No. 7 July 1969, pp. 285-293.
20.
CONCRETE BRIDGE DEVELOPMENT GROUP. Testing of high strength concrete beams with limestone
aggregate. Technical Paper no 7, 2003.
August 2015
A/107
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
21.
SOMERVILLE, G. The behaviour and design of reinforced concrete corbels. Cement and Concrete
Association, Technical Report 42.472, August 1972, pp. 12.
22.
SHAVE, J. D., IBELL, T. J. and DENTON, S. R. Shear assessment of reinforced concrete bridges with short
anchorage lengths. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 85, No. 5, March 2007, pp. 30-36.
23.
JACKSON, P. and SALIM, S. Web crushing in EN 1992. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 84, No. 23,
December 2006, pp. 50-57.
24.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE COMMITTEE 438. Tentative recommendations for the design of
reinforced concrete members to resist torsion. Proceedings of the American Concrete Institute, Vol. 66, No.
1, January 1969, pp. 1-8.
25.
LAMPERT, P. Torsion and bending in reinforced and prestressed concrete members. Proceedings of the
Institution of Civil Engineers, Vol. 50, December 1971, pp. 487-505.
26.
KENNEDY, G. and GOODCHILD, C. Practical yield line design. British Cement Association, 2003, 171 pp.
27.
REGAN, P. E. Behaviour of reinforced concrete flat slabs. CIRIA Report 89, London 1981, pp. 89.
28.
CULLINGTON, D. W. and HILL, M. E. Assessment of reinforced concrete slab bridge decks with circular
voids. Bridge Management 4, Thomas Telford Publishing, 2000.
29.
CLARK, L. A. and THOROGOOD, P. Flexural and punching shear strengths of concrete beams and slabs.
Transport and Road Research Laboratory, Contractor Report 60, 1987, pp. 33.
30.
LEE, D. J. The theory and practice of bearings and expansion joints for bridges. Cement and Concrete
Association, Publication 12.036, 1971, pp. 65.
31.
TIMOSHENKO, S. P. Theory of elastic stability. McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York and London, 1936,
pp.518.
32.
JACKSON, P. A. Slender bridge piers and the effective height provisions of BS 5400: Part 4. Cement and
Concrete Association, Technical Report 42.461, June 1985, pp. 18.
33.
CRANSTON, W. B. Analysis and design of reinforced concrete columns. Cement and Concrete Association,
Research Report 41.020, 1972, pp. 54.
34.
CRANSTON, W. B. A computer method for the analysis of restrained columns. Cement and Concrete
Association, Technical Report 42.402, April 1967, pp. 20.
35.
MENEGOTTO, M. and PINTO, P. E. Slender RC compressed members in biaxial bending. Proceedings of

the American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 103, No. ST3, March 1977, pp. 587-605.
36.
CRANSTON, W. B. Computer analysis of columns. Instability and plastic collapse of steel structures,
Proceedings of The Michael R. Horne Conference. Editor: L. J. Morris. St. Albans, Granada Publishing Ltd.,
1983, pp, 243-252.
37.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE. Building code requirements for reinforced concrete (ACI 318-83),
1983, pp. 111.
A/108
August 2015
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
Appendix A
38.
REGAN, P. E. and BRAESTRUP, M. W. Punching shear in reinforced concrete. CEB Bulletin No. 168,
January 1985, pp. 232.
39.
INSPECTION MANUAL FOR HIGHWAY STRUCTURES. The Stationery Office, 2007.
40.
REYNOLDS, G. C. Bond strength of deformed bars in tension. Cement and Concrete Association, Technical
Report 42.548, May 1982, pp. 23.
41.
ODUYEMI, T. O. S. and CLARK, L. A. Prediction of crack widths in circular-voided reinforced concrete

slabs subjects to transverse bending. Magazine of Concrete Research, Vol. 39, No. 140, September 1987,
pp.124-132.
42.
SNOWDON, L. C. Classifying reinforcing bars for bond strength. Building Research Station Current Paper
36/70, November 1970.
43.
NAVARATNARAJAH, V, and SPEARE, P. R. S. An experimental study of the effects of lateral pressure on

the transfer bond of reinforcing bars with variable cover. Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers,
Vol. 81, Part 2, December 1986, pp. 697-715.
44.
MORITA, S. and FUJI, S. Bond capacity of deformed bars due to splitting of surrounding concrete. Bond in
Concrete, Applied Science Publishers, 1982, pp. 331-341.
45.
ROBINS, P. J. and STANDISH, I. G. Effect of lateral pressure on bond of reinforcing bars in concrete. Bond
in Concrete, Applied Science Publishers, 1982, pp. 262-272.
46.
ROBINS, P J and STANDISH, I G. The influence of lateral pressure upon anchorage bond. Magazine of
Concrete Research, Vol. 36, No. 129, December 1984, pp. 195-202.
47.
JIRSA, J, OBREEN, J E, LUKE, J J and HAMAD, B S. Effect of casting position on bond. In: Bond in
Concrete, Applied Science Publishers, 1982, pp. 300-307.
48.
CAIRNS, J. An analysis of the ultimate strength of lapped joints of compression reinforcement. Magazine of
Concrete Research, Vol. 31, No. 106, March 1979, pp. 1927.
49.
SOROUSHIAN, P., OBASEKI, K and ROJAS, M. Bearing Strength and Stiffness of Concrete Under
Reinforcing Bars. ACI Materials Journal, May-June 1987.
50.
CLARK, L. A. Longitudinal shear reinforcement in beams. Concrete, Vol. 18, No.2, February 1984,
pp.22-23.
51.
REGAN, P. E. Concrete Society Current Practice Sheet No. 105, Shear, Concrete, Vol. 19, No. 11, November
1985, pp.25.
52.
ODUYEMI, T. O. S. and CLARK, L. A. Tension stiffening in transverse sections of circular-voided concrete

slabs. Magazine of Concrete Research, Vol. 39. No. 138, March 1987, pp. 35.41.
53.
ODUYEMI. T. O. S. Stiffnesses and cracking of voided slab bridges. PhD Thesis, University of Birmingham,
September 1986.
54.
CLARKE J. L. Shear strength of lightweight aggregate concrete. Concrete, Vol. 21, No. 4, April 1987,
pp.12-13.
August 2015
A/109
Appendix A
Volume 3 Section 4
Part 14 BD 44/15
55.
ANDREW, A. E. Unbonded tendons in post-tensioned construction. Thomas Telford. 1987.
56.
VIRLOGEUX, M. External prestressing of concrete. FIP Notes, 1987/2, pp. 16-20.
57.
SWAMY, R. N. Prestressed lightweight concrete. Developments in prestressed Concrete 1, Sawko, F. (Ed.)

Applied Science Publishers, 1978, pp. 149-191.
58.
CLARK, L. A. and TOMS, S. Shear Strength of Beam with Unbonded or External Tendons. Proceedings of
FIP Symposium, London, 1996.
59.
HAWKINS, N. M. The shear provision of AS CA35-SAA Code for prestressed concrete. Civil Engineering
Transactions, Institute of Engineers, Australia, Vol. CE6, September 1964, pp. 103-116.
60.
REYNOLDS, G. C., CLARKE, J. L. and TAYLOR, H. P. J. Shear provisions for prestressed concrete in the
Unified Code, CP 110:1972. Cement and Concrete Association, Technical Report 42.500, October 1974,
pp.16.
61.
SWAN, R. A. and WILLIAMS, A. Combined loading tests on model prestressed concrete box beams with
steel mesh. Cement and Concrete Association, Technical Report 42.485, October 1973, pp. 43.
62.
MAISEL, B. I. and SWAN, R. A. The design of concrete box spine-beam bridges. CIRIA Report 52,
November 1974, pp. 52.
63.
BEEBY, A. W., KEYDER, E. and TAYLOR, H. P. J. Cracking and deformations of partially prestressed
concrete beams. Cement and Concrete Association, Technical Report 42.465. January 1972, pp. 26.
64.
CLARK, J. L. A guide to the design of anchor blocks for post-tensioned prestressed concrete members.
CIRIA Guide 1, June 1976, pp. 34.
65.
ZIELINSKI, J. and ROWE, R. E. An investigation of the stress distribution in the anchorage zones of posttensioned concrete members. Cement and Concrete Association, Research report 9, September 1960, pp. 32.
66.
KRIZ, L. B. and RATHS, C. H. Connections in precast concrete structures: strength of corbel brackets.
Journal of the Prestressed Concrete Institute. Vol. 10, No. 1, February 1965, pp. 16-61.
67.
ROWE, R. E. et al. Handbook to British Standard BS 8110: 1985. The Structural Use of Concrete. Viewpoint
Publication, 1987, pp. 206.
68.
CLARK, L. A. and THOROGOOD, P. Serviceability behaviour of reinforced concrete half-joints. Transport

and Road Research Laboratory, Contractor Report 70, 1988.
69.
CULLINGTON, D. W., HILL, M. E. and SYKES, D. P. Shear capacity of pretensioned inverted T-beams
with infill concrete. Transport Research Laboratory, Project Report PR/CE/130/95, 1995.
70.
HUGHES G. Longitudinal shear in composite concrete bridge beams. Part 2: Experimental investigation and
recommendations. Transport and Road Research Laboratory, Contractor Report 52, 1987, pp. 97.
A/110
August 2015

BD 4415

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BD 4415

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DESIGN MANUAL FOR ROADS AND BRIDGES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Remove existing contents pages for Volume 3

Remove BD 44/95 and BA 44/96 from Volume 3,

Insert BD 44/15 into Volume 3, Section 4,

Archive this sheet as appropriate.

Note: A quarterly index with a full set of Volume

DESIGN MANUAL FOR ROADS AND BRIDGES

The Assessment of Concrete

Signature & Date of incorporation

Signature & Date of incorporation

Signature & Date of incorporation

Signature & Date of incorporation

DESIGN MANUAL FOR ROADS AND BRIDGES

THE ASSESSMENT OF CONCRETE

Use of Appendix A and BS 5400-4:1990

DESIGN MANUAL FOR ROADS AND BRIDGES

trunk roads and motorways.

Worst Credible Strength

Worst credible strengths should be used in the following circumstances:

Ultimate Limit State (ULS)

Serviceability Limit State (SLS)

4 USE OF APPENDIX A AND BS 5400-4:1990

Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB)

The Department for Regional Development

All technical enquiries or comments on this Standard should be sent to

APPENDIX A AMENDMENTS TO BS 5400-4

DEFINITION AND SYMBOLS

LIMIT STATE PHILOSOPHY

ASSESSMENT: REINFORCED CONCRETE

ASSESSMENT: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

ASSESSMENT: PRECAST, COMPOSITE AND PLAIN CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS

possible unfavourable deviations of the loads from their nominal values;

The values of f3 are given in 4.2.

Worst credible strength, refer to 2.4B to 2.15B.

The symbols used in Appendix A are as follows:

average compressive stress in the flexural compressive zone

shear enhancement factor for short shear spans

LIMIT STATE PHILOSOPHY

General. Refer to 3.1B to 3.6B.

Limit state requirements. Refer to 3.1B to 3.6B.

Loads, load combinations and partial safety factors fL and f3

Serviceability limit state: values are given in 4.3.1 of BS 5400-4

Ultimate limit state: values are given in 4.3.2

Figure 4 Short term assessment

Table 4A Values of m at the Ultimate Limit State.

Value for use with:

Worst credible strength

May be reduced to 1.05 for grade 460 steel.

4.3.3.3A Ultimate Limit State

Analysis for Serviceability Limit State

Analysis for Ultimate Limit State

bars < 16mm dia

bars > 16mm dia

The slab acts compositely with its supporting beams or webs.

The slab does not contain welded reinforcement or reinforcement couplers.

Combined global and local effects

Serviceability Limit State

ASSESSMENT: REINFORCED CONCRETE

Structures and structural frames

0.008 + 0.035 (0.5 - d / d )

is the calculated depth of concrete in compression at the ultimate limit state;

((( fff yy /// ms

0.36 (0.7 fcucu / 250) fcucu / mc

s s vvcc bbwwdd

s s vvcc bbwwdd

is a strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear, taken as 0.6 1